sm-MFX2200 2225 2700 2725

Muratec MFX-2725/MFX-2225 MFX-2700/MFX-2200
FACSIMILE SYSTEM
FIELD ENGINEERING MANUAL MEUK version 1
5 February, 2008
MURATA MACHINERY, LTD

COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT DIV.
Safety Information
LED Safety Label
A LED safety label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below.
Battery Precautions
Important: Muratec does not recommend the independent replacement of the batteries. The batteries are sold only as component parts of the Main Control PCB and Voice PCB, and cannot be purchased separately from Muratec. Ni-MH (Nickel Metal Hydride) batteries are installed inside the machine as back up memory batteries. Be sure to dispose of them according to local, state and federal regulations.
Table of contents
Safety Information ..................................................................................................................................a
1 General Description ................................................................................1-1

1.1 Product Description .......................................................................................................................1-1 1.2 Specifications ................................................................................................................................1-3
2 Machine Composition .............................................................................2-1

2.1 Document Scanning Sequence .....................................................................................................2-2 2.2 Recording Section .......................................................................................................................2-23 2.3 Image Processing........................................................................................................................2-24 2.4 Interconnect Block Diagram ........................................................................................................2-38 2.5 Block diagrams ............................................................................................................................2-39 2.6 Network Control Unit (NCU) PCB ................................................................................................2-42 2.7 Low Voltage Power Supply Unit (LVPS) .....................................................................................2-43 2.8 High Voltage Power Supply ........................................................................................................2-44
3 Adjustment Procedures ..........................................................................3-1

3.1 Field Service Program Modes .......................................................................................................3-1 3.2 Machine Parameter Adjustment ....................................................................................................3-3 3.3 Memory Switch Adjustment .........................................................................................................3-85 3.4 Setting Individual Autodialer Attributes......................................................................................3-107 3.5 Unique Switch Adjustment ........................................................................................................3-112 3.6 Clear Programmed Data / User Settings ...................................................................................3-137 3.7 All RAM Clear ............................................................................................................................3-137 3.8 T.30 Monitor ..............................................................................................................................3-138 3.9 Printer maintenance mode ........................................................................................................3-143 3.10 Monitor speaker.......................................................................................................................3-144 3.11 Test Modes..............................................................................................................................3-145 3.12 Print Machine Parameters, Memory Switch and Unique Switch Settings ...............................3-150 3.13 Factory Functions ....................................................................................................................3-151 3.14 Line Tests ................................................................................................................................3-157 3.15 Mirror Carriage Transfer Mode ................................................................................................3-160 3.16 Consumable order sheet .........................................................................................................3-161 3.17 DRAM Clear ............................................................................................................................3-165 3.18 Clear Life Monitor ....................................................................................................................3-165 3.19 Clear Optional Data .................................................................................................................3-165 3.20 Set Service Code ....................................................................................................................3-166 3.21 Life monitor maintenance ........................................................................................................3-167 3.22 Sensor input test .....................................................................................................................3-169 3.23 Printer diagnostic mode...........................................................................................................3-172 3.24 Network service mode .............................................................................................................3-173 3.25 Flash Rom Sum Check ...........................................................................................................3-174 3.26 Printer registration adjustment ................................................................................................3-174 3.27 Set Service Report ..................................................................................................................3-175 3.28 Reset Printer Trouble ..............................................................................................................3-177 3.29 Cleaning mode ........................................................................................................................3-177 3.30 Voice test.................................................................................................................................3-177 3.31 Network Switch........................................................................................................................3-178 3.32 Security function maintenance ................................................................................................3-178 3.33 Measuring the black ratio ........................................................................................................3-179 3.34 Service function menu .............................................................................................................3-179 3.35 Quick Initial settings ................................................................................................................3-180 3.36 Update the software ................................................................................................................3-181
4 Troubleshooting Procedures ..................................................................4-1

4.1 Troubleshooting Outline ................................................................................................................4-1 4.2 Mirror Carriage Error .....................................................................................................................4-1 4.3 Recording Paper Jam....................................................................................................................4-2 4.4 Document Feeder Jam ..................................................................................................................4-3
i
4.5 Service Call Error ..........................................................................................................................4-8 4.6 Error Codes .................................................................................................................................4-13 4.7 LCD Failure .................................................................................................................................4-16 4.8 Machine malfunction ...................................................................................................................4-17 4.9 The Image Quality Problems .......................................................................................................4-27
5 Maintenance & Adjustment.....................................................................5-1

5.1 Maintenance schedule ..................................................................................................................5-2 5.2 Re/Disassemble ............................................................................................................................5-4 5.3 Adjustment ................................................................................................................................5-190
6 Options ...................................................................................................6-1
6.1 Paper cassette ..............................................................................................................................6-1 6.2 Conformation Stamp .....................................................................................................................6-4 6.3 Page Counter ................................................................................................................................6-5 6.4 PCL printer controller ....................................................................................................................6-6 6.5 OfficeBridge Expansion kit ............................................................................................................6-8 6.6 Network Interface Board..............................................................................................................6-10 6.7 Scanner heater ............................................................................................................................6-12 6.8 Cassette heater ...........................................................................................................................6-14
ii
1 General Description
1.1 Product Description
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ADF glass Platen cover Document pad Document glass Fuser cover (C2) Right cover Right cover release lever (C1)
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Paper loading guide Bypass tray Lower right covers (paper cassette) Paper level indicator Paper cassette Front cover Control panel
1-1
15 16 23 17
18
22
24
19 20 21
15 16 17 18 19
Paper output area Ventilation slot Power switch Power jack Handset jack
20 21 22 23 24
External telephone line jack Telephone line jack USB port 10Base-T/100Base-Tx port* Additional phone line jack
Equipment and components shown with * are optional.
6 7
5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
Drum cartridge lock lever (B4) Drum cartridge The charging needle cleaning rod (B7) LED print head cleaning rod (B6)
5 6 7
Toner cartridge Drum cartridge lock lever (B3) Feeder roller release lever
1-2
1.2 Specifications
Item Type Telephone network Compatibility Coding method Modem speed Dual Access LCD Scanning method Recording method Acceptable document size Specifications / Comments Desktop type PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network) or equivalent. ITU-T T.4 and T.30 ITU-T-standard MH, MR, MMR and JBIG 33600, 31200, 28800, 26400, 24000, 21600, 19200, 16800, 14400, 12000, 9600, 7200, 4800 and 2400 bps Allows up to three simultaneous operations. LCD: 15 characters x 5 lines (Touch panel : bottom line only) Language: English, German Black and White Dry electrophotographic (LED) printer <ADF, RADF> Single sheet Two or more sheets Max: 297 (W) x 432 (L) mm 297 (W) x 420 (L) mm Min: 120 (W) x 100 (L) mm 148 (W) x 105 (L) mm Paper weight: 35 128 g/m2 52 105 g/m2 Thickness: 0.05 0.15 mm 0.07 0.12 mm <FBS glass> Max: 297 (W) x 420 (L) mm Min: No limit A4 : 50 sheets, B4 : 40 sheets, A3 : 30 sheets A4 : 50 sheets, B4 : 25 sheets, A3 : 25 sheets <Transmission> horizontal x vertical (in dots/inch x in lines/inch) Normal: 203 x 98 Fine: 203 x 196 Super fine: 406 x 392* or 600dpi 600lpi Grayscale: 203 x 196
ADF capacity RADF capacity Scanning resolution
*: In the case that the remote fax has the ability of 406 x 392. If not, the superfine resolution is 203 x 392, and the grayscale resolution in feeder transmission is 203 196.
Effective Scanning width Transmission speed Document Memory Document memory backup Printing resolution
<Copy> 600 x 600 dpi <Scanner> 200 dpi 200 dpi x 200 lpi 300 dpi 300 dpi x 300 lpi 600 dpi 600 dpi x 600 lpi 294 mm (Fax), 297 mm (Copy) Under 3 seconds (Super G3) Based on transmission of ITU-T Test Document 1 to a Muratec fax machine. 64 MB (4665 pages) 72 hours The backup battery requires about 24 hours to reach full charge after power to the fax unit is restored. 600 dpi
1-3
Item Printing speed Simplex Duplex Toner yield Drum yield Print margin Acceptable recording paper
Specifications / Comments MFX-2720 MFX-2200 MFX-2725 MFX-2225 27 ppm 22 ppm 9 spm 8 spm
Recording paper capacity
(When loading A4-sized paper from 1st paper cassette.) Approx. 10,000 or 20,000 sheets (A4, 6 document coverage under 3-pages interval printing.) Approx. 100,000 pages 0,000 ,000 (A4, paper under 3-pages interval printing.) Reading edge, Trailing edge, Left edge and Right edge: 3 mm Simplex printing <Paper cassette> A3, A4, A4(LEF), A5, A5(LEF), B4, B5, B5(LEF), F4, 8K, 16K, 16K(LEF), Letter, Letter(LEF), Legal, 11x17, Half-letter, Half-letter(LEF), Executive, Executive(LFE) Paper weight: 60 90g/m2 <Bypass tray> Plain paper: A3, A4, A4(LEF), A5, A5(LEF), B4, B5, B5(LEF), F4, 8K, 16K, 16K(LEF), Letter, Letter(LEF), Legal, 11x17, Half-letter, Half-letter(LEF), Executive, Executive(LFE) Postcard Envelopes: DL, COM10, Monarch Transparency Custom size: (90 297 mm) x (140 432 mm) (Width x Length) Paper weight: 60 90g/m2 Duplex printing Plain paper: A3, B4, A4, A4 (LEF), B5, B5(LEF), A5(LEF) , <Paper cassette> 500 sheets <Bypass tray> Plain paper: 100 sheet Postcard/Transparency: 30 sheets Envelopes 10 sheets Approx. 250 sheets Face down Ambient temperature: 10 C to 32 C Relative humidity: 20 to 80 with no condensation 230 VAC 10 50 Hz 0
Receive paper tray capacity Printouts exit Environmental conditions Power requirements
1-4
Item Power consumption
Specifications / Comments MFX-2720 MFX-2200 Sleep mode (W) 8.5 Energy save mode (W) 20 Standby (Wh) 57 Memory Transmission (W) 21 Reception (W) 920 Copying (W) 920 Maximum (W) 920 MFX-2700 MFX-2200 MFX-2725 MFX-2225 MFX-2720 MFX-2320 MFX-2725 MFX-2225 1 cassette 4 cassettes 1 cassette 4 cassettes 1 cassette 4 cassettes 1 cassette 4 cassettes
MFX-2725 MFX-2225 8.2 20 48 62 930 960 980
Dimensions
597.2 x 679.7 x 626.5 mm 597.2 x 679.7 x 998.5 mm 600.3 x 686.9 x 634.8 mm 600.3 x 686.9 x 1006.8 mm Approx. 55.8 kg Approx. 88.8 kg Approx. 57.8 kg Approx. 90.8 kg
Weight
Optional products
without consumables Second, third and fourth paper cassette Conformation stamp Mechanical page counter PCL printer controller Network interface board OfficeBridge board Scanner heater Cassette heater
1-5
2 Machine Composition
ADF model (MFX-2700 and MFX-2200)
45 6 7 8 9
3 2 1 42 41 40 39 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
38 37 36 35
34
33 32 31
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Feed roller DS2 Press roller DRS Exit roller Separator roller DW2 DW1 DL1 Lens CCD Exit roller A Exit roller B Cleaning roller Heat roller Lamp Heater Press fuser roller Cleaner blade Charge unit OPC drum LED head
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
Transfer roller Magnet roller Regist roller Regist shaft Pickup MP roller Separator roller Ritard roller Pickup roller Feed roller Agitator paddle Agitator screw A Agitator screw B Toner screw B Toner agitator paddle Toner screw A Ozone filter Fan Mirror C Mirror A Mirror B Lamp
2-1
2.1 Document Scanning Sequence

2.1.1 ADF Detection (MFX-2700 and MFX-2200)
When a document is placed into the document feeder, Document Sensor 1 (DS1) is activated and you will hear the short beep. The width of document is detected by DW1and DW2 and length of document is detected by DL1sensor. The document will be transferred when the start key is pressed. The motor drives clutch 1 (CL1) with the gear for the pick up roller to turn. Document separation is the process that allows a multi-page document to go through the scanner one page at a time. The top document is separated from the remaining documents by the friction of the separate roller. Following the document separation, the separate roller causes the document to advance. During this feed, clutch 2 (CL2) is set to off not to supply power of the motor to the feed roller. A loop is made by the transfer roller, which prevents the document to skew. As it advances, the leading edge of the document activates the DS2 sensor. Once DS2 is activated, the feed roller continues to rotate until the document reaches the scan position. The machine uses the distance from DS2 to the scan position and the diameter of the feed roller to determine the number of rotations necessary to feed the document to the scan position. When the document reaches the scan position, the light from the scanner lamp strikes the face of the document and is reflected into the lens through mirrors A, B, and C. In case the light intensity along the length of the scanner lamp is not uniform, shading compensation is provided to ensure even illumination. As the reflected image passes through the lens, it is focused onto the charged coupled device (CCD). The CCD then converts the dark and light areas of the image into electrical impulses, or image data. When DS2 detects the trailing edge of the document, the image signal output is turned off. The scanner continues to remain active for a few more seconds in case there is another document to follow. The scanned document is discharged through the document exit by the exit roller.
Document detection (ADF)

The sizes of the documents are detected by the following two sensors Detection Document presence Leading and trailing edge detection Document size detection length width Action Sensor DS1 DS2, DRS
Detects whether there is a document on the tray or not Detects the leading and trailing edge of the feeding document
Detects the length of the document on DL1 the tray Detects the width of the document on the DW1, DW2 tray
2-2
2.1.2 FBS section

The FBS (Flat Bet Scanner) section consists of document glass (pain), the optical reading section (Carriage A Assy, Carriage B Assy and scanner frame Assy) and scanner driving section. The document size detection stars when the BIS sensor is on. The detection of whether the FBS cover is closed is made by the APS sensor. Light reflected from the original passes through three mirrors and a lens to form a reduced image on the CCD Sensor as the Scanner Motor moves the Scanner. The CCD sensor converts the light pattern (image data) into an electrical image signal. The electrical image signal is then output to the Main Board.
Exposure Section: Construction and Function
2 1
1 Reflector Tape The Reflector Tape reflects the light from the Exposure Lamp and supplements its illumination. 2 Exposure Lamp A Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamp (CCFL) is used to illuminate the original. 3 Mirror Directs the reflected light from the original to the lens.
2-3
Scanner frame Moving Mechanism

<Carriage A> During a scan, the Carriage A projects an even amount of light from the Exposure Lamp onto the entire surface of the original. The light is reflected from the original to the Mirror A of the Carriage A and then to the Mirror B and Mirror C of the Carriage B. The Carriage A is driven by the FBS Motor and front and rear Scanner Drive belts. Scanner speed is determined by the set zoom ratio in reference to the full size mode. The Carriage A is at home position when Scanner Home Position Sensor is blocked. This position serves as the reference for the scan motion. <Carriage B> The Mirror B and Mirror C are mounted to their holder at right angles to each other. They direct the light reflected off the Mirror A through the lens to the CCD. The Carriage B is also moved by the Scanner Drive belts and pulleys driven by the FBS Motor. It travels at a speed half that of the Carriage A, thereby keeping constant the optical path length between the Original Glass and lens.
5 4 3 2 1 6 7 8
9 10 13 12 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
APS sensor BIS sensor Caridge B Document size detection sensor FBS motor Inverter Lens
8 9 10 11 12 13
PCB CCD Caridge A Lamp Mirror A Home sensor Mirror B and C
2-4
Document size detection (FBS)

When the machine is in Auto Paper or Auto Size, the document length detecting sensor mounted in the FBS section receive light reflected off the original to allow the machine to determine the document length size. And the CCD detects document width by reflecting light from the Exposure Lamp. Document size A4 A4 A5 A5 B4 B5 B5 A3 Multi Beam Sensor (Length detection) CCD (Width detection)
: Means that the unit is used.
2-5
2.1.3 RADF section (MFX-2725 and MFX-2225)

Cross-section
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
[12] [15]
[14] [13] [11] [10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[1] Lower registration roller [2] Upper registration roller [3] Separation roller [4] Separation pad [5] Pickup roller [6] Document supply tray [7] Upper delivery reversal roller [8] Lower delivery reversal roller [9] Read roller 2 (lower) [10] Read roller 2 (upper) [11] Platen roller [12] Read roller [13] Read roller 1 (upper) [14] Read roller 1 (lower) [15] White sheet
2-6
Outline of Electrical Components

Electric Parts Layout/Functions <Sensors> Symbol PI1 PI2 PI3 PI4 PI5 PI6 PI7 PI8 PI10 PI11 Name Document width sensor 2(directly mounted on the Relay PCB) Document width sensor 1 (directly mounted on the Relay PCB) Last document detection sensor Document length sensor 1 Document length sensor 2 Delivery reversal sensor Read sensor Registration paper sensor Cover open/close sensor Document set sensor
PI2 PI3 PI10 PI11
Relay PCB
ADF driver PCB CN7 CN7
The names in Sensor Text DW2 DW1 LAST DL1 DL2 EXIT DS2 DRS TXIL DS1
CN32 CN32 CN32
CN7 CN7 CN7 CN8 CN8 CN8 CN9 CN9
PI5 PI4
PI7
PI6 PI8
PI1
<Motors, Clutch, Solenoids, PCBs, etc.> Symbol M1 M2 SL1 SL2 PCB1 PCB2 Name Motor Solenoid ADF driver PCB Relay PCB Function Feed motor Pickup motor Roller release solenoid Stamp solenoid RADF control Repeating for sensors in document pickup tray/Document width detection ADF driver PCB CN4 CN11 CN5 CN6 CN7
PCB1 M1 M2 SL1 PCB2
SL2
2-7
Basic Construction
Electric circuits of the RADF are controlled by the Scanner RADF PCB and Main PCB.The Main PCB detects the signals received from the host machine to output the signals that drive DC loads such as motors and solenoids at the predetermined timings. The Main PCB does not have a memory area data (service mode, etc.) is stored in the Main PCB.
Motor Sensor
ADF driver PCB
Solenoid
CN1 CN2 CN10
+3.3V +24V
P151 P150 P140A P14A
Scanner RADF PCB

P1408 P14B
Main PCB
2-8
Basic Operation
Drive Mechanism and Signals
The RADF is a document feeder exclusively for stream reading. The RADF uses two motors to pick up and feed document paper. Name (symbol) Feed motor (M1) Pickup motor (M2) The drive mechanism and signals are shown below.
[1] (EXIT)CN89 (STMPSOL)CN62 (SIZEW1)CN75 (SIZEW2)CN76 (RKSOL)CN52 (SIZEL1)CN72 [13] PI4 PI2 [15] PI1 (SIZEL2)CN71 PI5 [14] (READ)CN86 (REG)CN83 (EMPTY)CN93 CN4 (LAST)CN73 [10] CN11
Function Feeds documents. Separates and feeds documents.
PI11
PI7 PI8
PI6
[1] ADF driver PCB [2] Document detection signal [3] Document detection signal [4] Pickup motor drive signal [5] Document placement signal [6] Stamp solenoid drive signal [7] Document placement signal [8] Feed motor drive signal [9] Roller release solenoid drive signal [10] Last document detection signal [11] Paper size (width) identification signal 1 [12] Paper size (width) identification signal 2 [13] Paper size (length) identification signal 1 [14] Paper size (length) identification signal 2 [15] Relay PCB
2-9
PI3
[11]
[12]
[2] [3]
[4]
[5] [6]
[7] [8]
[9]
Outline of Operation Mode
The RADF has four operation modes. The RADF operates in the operation mode specified by the host machine to perform printing. Operation mode names, brief outline of operations, and associated print modes are given in the following table: Operation mode name [1] Forward pickup/delivery Outline of operation Picks up, reads, and then delivers an document. Associated print mode Single-sided document > Simplex printing Single-sided document > Duplex printing (This operation is performed for documents with the same width/different width.) Picks up, reads, reverses, and Double-sided document > delivers an document. Duplex printing Double-sided document > Simplex printing (This operation is performed for documents with the same width/different width.)
[2] Forward feed/reversal delivery
Forward Pickup/Delivery (Single-sided document > Simplex Printing) Operation
The document flows as shown below. Note: This operation is performed for all single-sided documents irrespective of whether document widths are the same or different.
Document
Pickup
Delivery
Formation of loop
End of job
Waiting for reading
Reading
2-10
Forward Pickup/Reversal Delivery (Double-sided document > Duplex printing) Operation
The document flow is shown below. Note: This operation is performed for all double-sided documents irrespective of whether document widths are the same or different.
Document
Pickup
Feed
Formation of loop
Reversal
Waiting for reading
Formation of loop
Reading
Waiting for reading
to next page
Reverse side reading
Feed
Feed
Idle feed
Reversal
Delivery
Feed
End of job
2-11
Document Detection
Outline
The RADF detects a document using either one of the two methods depending on the print mode. - Normal print mode (other than mixed size print mode and banner paper mode) - Mixed size print mode and banner paper mode a. Normal print mode (other than mixed size print mode and banner paper mode) In the normal print mode, the following four document detection functions are used: Function Document presence/ absence detection Last document detection Initial document size detection - Longitudinal direction - Lateral direction Sensor used (symbol) Description Detects whether there is an document Document set sensor (PI11) on the document pickup tray. Detects whether the document being Last document detection sensor picked up is the last one. (PI3)
Detects the length of the document placed on the document pickup tray. Detects the width of the document placed on the document pickup tray.
Document length sensor 1/2 (PI4/ PI5) Document width sensor 1/2 (PI2/ PI1)
b. Mixed size print mode and banner paper mode In the mixed size print mode and banner paper mode, the following three document detection functions are used: Function Document presence/ absence detection Last document detection Sensor used (symbol) Description Detects whether there is a document Document set sensor (PI11) on the document pickup tray.
Detects whether the document being Last document detection sensor picked up is the last one. (PI3) Document length detection Detects the document length Read sensor (PI7) according to the distance from the position where the read sensor (PI7) turns on to the position where the read sensor (I7) turns off.
Document Presence/Absence Detection
The Document set sensor (PI11) detects presence/absence of a document on the document tray. When a document is placed on the document tray, the detection lever moves the light shielding plate to allow light to pass thorough the photo interrupter. Thus, the Document set sensor (PI11) generates an document detection signal (EMPTY) to notify the host machine that an document is placed on the document tray via the ADF driver PCB.
ADF driver PCB EMPTY
Detection lever PI11
Document
2-12
Detection of Last Document
The last document detection sensor (PI3) and Document set sensor (PI11) detect whether the document being picked up is the last one. When the trailing edge of the last document has moved past the last document detection lever, the detection lever moves the light shielding plate to allow light pass through the photo interrupter. Thus, the last document detection sensor (PI3) generates a last document detection signal (LAST). When the last document has moved past the document sensor (PI11), an document absence signal (EMPTY) is generated to notify the host machine that an document being picked up is the last one via the ADF driver PCB.
ADF driver PCB EMPTY Detection lever
Document
PI11 PI3
Initial Document Size Detection
The document length sensor 1 (PI4) and document length detection sensor 2 (PI5) detect the longitudinal size of the document placed on the document tray, and the document width sensor 1 (PI2) and document width sensor 2 (PI1) detect the lateral size of the document. When an document is placed on the document tray, detection levers of the two document length sensors move the light shielding plate to allow light pass through the photo interrupter. If the slide guide is adjusted to the document size, the two document width sensors mounted inside the document tray are shielded by the light shielding plate mounted at the bottom of the slide guide. Document sizes are determined by the combination of the ON/OFF states of document length sensors and the combination of ON/OFF states of document width sensors.
PI5 PI4
PI2
LAST
PI1
2-13
The following tables show the relationships among document width sensors, document length sensors, and document sizes. 1. AB type Sensor name Document width Document width Document length sensor 1 sensor 2 sensor 1 A3 ON ON ON B4 OFF ON ON A4R OFF OFF ON B5R ON OFF ON A4 ON ON OFF A5R ON OFF OFF B5 OFF ON OFF A5 OFF OFF OFF B6 ON OFF OFF Document length sensor 2 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Size
2. Inch type Sensor name Document width Document width Document length sensor 1 sensor 2 sensor 1 11 x 17 ON ON LGL OFF ON LTRR OFF ON LTR ON OFF STMT OFF OFF Document length sensor 2 ON ON OFF OFF OFF
Size
2-14
Document Pickup/Separation
Basic Pickup Operation
With a document placed on the document tray, pressing the print start key will picks up the document in the following manner. a. Pickup operation When the pickup motor (M2) turns in reverse direction, the pickup roller unit lowers to rotate the pickup rollers, thus feeding the document. The stopper rises in conjunction with the pickup roller unit. The separation sheet and pad are used to prevent multiple sheets from being fed together.
M2 Pickup roller unit One-way clutch Document One-way clutch M2 Pickup roller unit Document
Stopper
Separation pad
Separation sheet
b. Formation of loop While the pickup motor (M2) is turning in the reverse direction, the document is fed against the registration roller that is stopped by the idling one-way clutch to form a loop, thus preventing the document from skewing.
Registration Loop formation 1 roller
c. Feed The pickup motor (M2) and feed motor (M1) turn in the forward direction to raise the paper pickup roller unit, feeding the document to the read standby point with the registration roller and read roller. When the document reaches the read standby point, the pickup motor (M2) and feed motor (M1) stop.
Registration roller M1 M2
Read roller
Read standby point
2-15
d. Stream reading When the leading edge of the document reaches the read standby point, an image leading edge signal is sent to the host machine to start stream reading. Stream reading is a scan mode in which the document is moved on the optical system's glass using the platen roller. The read image is stored in the memory of the host machine.
M1 Platen roller
LED Read glass
Pickup Unit and Stopper

The pickup unit consists of a pickup roller and separation roller. When the print start key is pressed or an document pickup signal is input, the pickup motor (M2) turns in the reverse direction to lower the pickup unit, turning the pickup roller and separation roller to feed the document. The stopper rises in conjunction with the pickup unit. When the document is picked up, the separation pad and separation plate prevent multiple sheets from being fed together. When the document is looped at the registration roller, the pickup motor turns in the forward direction to raise the pickup unit, feeding the document with the registration roller. At this time, the separation roller drive shaft driven via the spring one-way clutch stops at the upper limit of the pickup unit and the friction against the document forces the separation roller to rotate with the aid of the one-way clutch.
Stopper arm Pickup roller
Document
Stopper arm
Pickup motor (M2)
Feed roller
Separation pad
2-16
Pickup Timing
Start key ON or document pickup signal input Document placement
Document separation/feed Document set sensor (PI11) Registration paper sensor (PI8) Read sensor (PI7) Delivery reversal sensor (PI6) Pickup motor (M2) Feed motor (M1) Image leading edge signal : Reverse rotation of motor Document reading
Loop formation
Read standby
Reverse rotation Forward rotation
Pickup Motor (M2) Control

The pickup motor (M2) control circuit diagram is shown below. A 2-phase stepping motor is used to feed documents. This circuit mainly performs the following types of control: - Motor ON/OFF control - Motor rotation direction control - Motor speed control
+24V
IC2 MD0008
P151
KMOT_A KMOT_A* KMOT_B KMOT_B* KMOT_IA KMOT_IB
CN11 KMOT_A
IC1 Motor driver
KMOT_A* KMOT_B KMOT_B*
4 5 6 3 2 1
M2
CN1
Scanner RADF PCB
ADF driver PCB
The pickup motor of the RADF is controlled by MD0008(IC2) on the Scanner RADF PCB. The MD0008(IC2) on the Scanner RADF PCB outputs drive pulses to the pickup motor according to the selected print mode (magnification, operation mode, timing, etc.). The pickup motor is a stepping motor. Its rotation direction and speed are controlled by changing the order of output pulses (KMOT_A, KMOT_A*, KMOT_B, and KMOT_B*) and frequency.
2-17
Document Reversing
Basic Operation
There are two types of document reversal operation: one that is performed from the top to the reverse side of the document and the other that is performed from the reverse side to the top of the document. Since the basic operation methods are identical, only the reversal operation performed from the reverse side to the top is discussed below. a. Top side pickup The feed motor (M1) drives the read roller and platen roller to scan the surface of the document. After completion of reading, the delivery reversal roller feeds the document to the delivery unit.
M1 M1 Delivery reversal roller
SL1 Platen roller Read roller
SL1
b. Reversal/feed 1 When the trailing edge of the fed document moves past the delivery reversal sensor (PI6), the feed motor (M1) stops. Immediately after this, the feed motor start turning in the reverse direction to feed the document to the registration roller, then stops. At this time, the roller release solenoid (SL1) turns on to release the pressure of the delivery reversal roller.
M1 M1
SL1 Delivery reversal sensor
c. Reversal/feed 2 The feed motor (M1) turns to feed the document to the read standby point and stops. Thus, the document has been reversed. Next, the document is picked up again and read, turning off the roller separation solenoid. After this, the document is reversed again, fed, and delivered.
Registration roller M1 M2
Delivery reversal roller M1
SL1
Read roller
Read standby point
2-18
Operation Sequence
Document separation /feed Document set sensor (PI11) Registration paper sensor (PI8) Read sensor (PI7) Delivery reversal sensor (PI6) Pickup motor (M2) Feed motor (M1) Roller release solenoid (SL1) Image leading edge signal : Reverse rotation of motor
Loop formation Read standby Reversal standby Loop formation Reverse rotation Forward rotation
Document reading
Document reversal
Document's reverse side reading
Document Feeding/Delivery
Basic Operation
After stream reading on the document glass, the document is delivered to the document delivery unit as discussed below. a. Document feed/delivery After moving past the reading position, the document is fed by the delivery reversal roller driven by the feed motor (M1) turning in the forward direction. The deliver reversal motor is normally pressurized the roller release solenoid turns on only when the document is reversed for duplex printing.
M1 Delivery reversal roller M1 Delivery reversal roller
SL1
SL1
Reading position
2-19
Operation Sequence
Document separation/feed Document set sensor (PI11) Registration paper sensor (PI8) Read sensor (PI7) Delivery reversal sensor (PI6) Pickup motor (M2) Feed motor (M1) Roller release solenoid (SL1) Image leading edge signal : Reverse rotation of motor
Loop formation
Document reading
Document delivery
Read standby
Feed Motor (M1) Control
The feed motor (M1) control circuit diagram is shown below. The feed motor (M1) is a 2-phase stepping motor. This circuit mainly performs the following types of control: - Motor ON/OFF control - Motor rotation direction control - Motor speed control
+24V
IC50 MD0008
P151
RMOT_A RMOT_A* RMOT_B RMOT_B* RMOT_IA RMOT_IB
CN4
IC2 Motor driver
RMOT_A RMOT_A* RMOT_B RMOT_B*
4 5 6 3 2 1
M1
CN1
Scanner RADF PCB
ADF driver PCB
The feed motor of the RADF is controlled by the MD0008(IC50) on the Scanner RADF PCB. The MD0008(IC50) on the Scanner RADF PCB outputs drive pulses to the feed motor according to the selected print mode (magnification, operation mode, timing, etc.). The feed motor is a stepping motor. Its rotation direction and speed are controlled by changing the order of output pulses (RMOT_A, RMOT_A*, RMOT_B, and RMOT_B*) and frequency.
2-20
Detecting Jams
Jam
The RADF detects a jam using the sensors shown below. Document jam check timings are stored in the ROM on the Main PCB to check whether a jam has occurred according to presence/absence of the document at the relevant sensor position.
PI10 PI11 PI7 PI6 PI8
PI6: Delivery reversal sensor PI7: Read sensor PI8: Registration paper sensor PI10: Cover open/close sensor PI11: Document set sensor
Power Supply
Power Supply
The power supply lines are shown below. The RADF is powered via two power supply lines (24 V and 3.3 V) from the host machine.
24V
Host machine
24V
- Motor - Solenoid
CN10 CN2
3.3V
3.3V ADF driver PCB
- Sensor
2-21
Stamp Operation
Outline
If the stamp function is selected in the FAX mode of the host machine, the stamp solenoid drive signal (STMP_SOL) from the ADF driver PCB drives the stamp solenoid (SL2) to affix a stamp indicating that the document has been read or sent.
Document
Stamp solenoid drive signal
Stamp solenoid (SL2)
ADF driver PCB
In the stamp mode, the feed speed is set to 118 mm/s after completion of document reading. The document stops when it has been fed 21.45 mm since detection of tuning off of the delivery reversal sensor, where the stamp is printed. The solenoid drive time is 50 ms, and the stamp is affixed at the position which is about 10 mm away from the trailing edge of paper.
Document separation/feed
Document set sensor (PI11) Registration paper sensor (PI8) Read sensor (PI7) Delivery reversal sensor (PI6) Pickup motor (M2) Feed motor (M1) Roller release solenoid (SL1) Image leading edge signal Stamp solenoid (SL2)
Document reading
STMP_SOL
Document delivery
Loop formation
Read standby
: Reverse rotation of motor
Note: Fresh out of the package, the stamp cartridge is good for about 7,000 documents.
2-22
2.2 Recording Section

Recording Paper Feed Path
A sheet of the recording paper is separated from the remaining paper by the friction of the pickup roller. The paper is moved along the paper guide until it reaches the register roller, then fed by the rotation of the register roller.
If there is a duplex printing unit, the machine can print both sides of the paper (duplex printing). When the first side of the paper is printed, it is transferred to the exit. However after a few steps after Switchback (SWBK) sensor detected the trailing edge, the exit roller rolls in reverse and the paper is transferred to the image processing area by the duplex rollers. It reaches to the image transfer area turned inside out, and the duplex side of the paper is printed.
2-23
2.3 Image Processing

The fax incoming data, copy data or pirnt data is sent to the printer for image processing.
12. Paper Exit 11. Fusing
9. Cleaning 10. Erase 2. Drum Charging 8. Discharge Plage 3. LED Exposure 4. Development 1. OPC Drum 7. Image Transfer 6. Manual Bypass 5. Paper Feed
The image processing is roughly divided into the following steps: 1. OPC Drum Changes the image of the original projected onto the surface of the OPC drum to a corresponding electrostatic latent image. 2. Drum Charge Generates a negative DC charged layer on the surface of the OPC Drum. 3. Drum Exposure The LED light strikes the surface of the OPC Drum, creating an electrostatic latent image. 4. Development Negatively charged toner adheres to the latent image on the OPC Drum surface. DC negative bias voltages are applied to the Sleeve/Magnet rollers, thereby preventing toner from sticking to the background. 5. Paper Feed Feeds sheets of paper from the appropriate paper source. 6. Bypass Paper Feed Feeds sheets of paper from the bypass source. 7. Image Transfer A positive charge is applied to the Transfer roller to transfer the visible image on the surface of the OPC Drum onto the paper. 8. Discharge Plate The discharge plate removes the potential charge from paper. 9. Cleaning Residual toner is scraped off the surface of the OPC Drum. 10. Erase The OPC Drum is exposed to light, which effectively neutralize any residual charge on the surface of the OPC Drum. 11. Fusing Heat and pressure fuse toner on the paper . 12. Paper Exit Feeds paper out of the MFP onto the exit tray.
2-24
2.3.1 LED exposure

Location of the unit
The LED exposure area depends on the paper size. The image lacks each edge of the paper for 3mm because of non-exposure area.
3mm 3mm
3mm
3mm
2-25
2.3.2 Drum Cartridge

The drum cartridge consists of charge section / drum / developing section / cleaning section.
4 5
6 7 8 10
1 2 3 4 5 Eraser Charge unit Waste toner screw Cleaner blade Waste toner paddle
9
6 7 8 9 10 OPC Drum Magnet roller Agitator paddle Agitator screw A Agitator screw B
2-26
2.3.3 Drum charge

The OPC Drum Charge Corona has a grid mesh to deposit a charge evenly across the surface of the OPC Drum. The corona unit has a comb electrode that discharges only toward the grid mesh, thus minimizing the amount of ozone produced.
2-27
2.3.4 Development
The toner supplied from the toner cartridge is stirred by the agitator and paddle, and is transferred to the developing roller. The developing roller consists of a magnet roller and a sleeve roller turning around it. The developing roller transfers the toner to the OPC drum. The toner on the drum surface is controlled by the developing bias on the developing roller.
ATDC sensor
The ATDC sensor is at the bottom of the toner cartridge. The toner density (T/D) in the developing unit is detected by a magnetic permeability sensor. When the toner density becomes low, the RX motor rotates the screw in the toner hopper and supplies the toner to the developing unit. The sensor is adjusted when the drum cartridge is replaced.
2-28
2.3.5 Cleaning the OPC drum

The cleaner blade is pressed against the OPC drum surface to scrape toner off the surface. The eraser lamp lights the drum surface to neutralize the potential of the OPC drum after the image transfer.
3
1 2 Eraser Cleaner blade 3 OPC Drum
2-29
2.3.6 Toner Cartridge

Toner cartridge structure

The toner in the toner cartridge is transferred to the screw by the toner agitator paddle sheet which is on the toner agitator paddle. The paddle rotates by TP motor. The toner screw A is also rotating and transfers the toner to the discharger.
4
1 2 Toner agitator paddle Toner agitator paddle sheet 3 4 Toner screw A Discharger
2-30
Toner hopper structure

A piezoelectric vibrating sensor detects the remaining toner. The toner is stirred by the agitator. The toner in the hopper is transferred to the drum cartridge by the rotating screw.
2 3
1 2
Toner sensor Agitator
Screw
Waste Toner collection

The toner pressed against the OPC drum is scratched by the cleaning blade, and transferred to the waste toner collection area located at the bottom of the toner cartridge by the waste toner collection screw. The toner in the collection area is design to accumulate evenly by the toner screw B.
1 2
Opening
Toner screw B
2-31
Toner transferring mechanism
2 1 3
4 5
1 2 3 Toner cartridge Toner hopper Toner supply route 4 5 Drum cartridge Toner collection route
2-32
2.3.7 Image Transfer

Structure
A charge is applied to the Transfer roller to transfer the toner image formed on the surface of the OPC drum onto the paper. The image transfer current is controlled according to the size and type of paper ,whether the copy cycle is 1-sided or 2-sided, temperature and humidity . The surface of theTransfer Roller is cleaned by applying the same negative polarity as the toner.
2-33
Discharger Brush
To neutralize any charge potential left in the paper which has undergone the image transfer stage, there is the Discharge Brush fitted to the guide plate after the Transfer Roller.
Drum Scrapers
The drum scrapers mounted in the drum cartridge properly separate paper from the surface of the OPC drum.
2-34
2.3.8 Fusing
The toner image transferred on to the paper is securely fixed. A heat roller system is used as the fusing system. The heat roller is heated by the lamp heater inside the roller. The toner image is securely fixed by the pressure between the heat roller and press fuser roller. A thermistor detects and controls the heater rollers temperature.
9
1 2 3 4 5 Cleaning roller Heat roller Paper separate blade Fused toner Press fuser roller
6
6 7 8 9
5
Paper Non-fused toner Lamp heater Thermistor
2-35
The cleaning roller cleans the dirt of the heat roller. It is driven by the heat roller and rotates at a circumferential velocity of 0.625 times faster than the heat roller.
2
1 2 3 Press roller Heat roller Thermostat
4
4 5
5
Thermistor Thermal fuse
2-36
2.3.9 Paper supply

The main motor drives the pickup roller and the paper feed roller to supply paper. The pickup roller transfers the paper and the paper feed roller and separate roller separates oen sheet of paper and fed into the main unit. When the paper cassette is closed, the lever is pushed to lower the pickup roller. The Liftup upper limit sensor detects the upper limit position when the paper lifting plate is raised. The paper empty sensor detects when paper in the cassette runs out.
1
2 3
5 4
1 2 3
Lever Pickup roller Liftup upper limit sensor
4 5 6
Paper feed roller Separate roller Paper empty sensor
2-37
2.4 Interconnect Block Diagram

See the attached files.
2-38
2.5 Block diagrams

PCB MAIN PCB PANEL LCD PANEL -A PANEL -B Gate IC1 SH7706 CPU IC7 64Mb FLASH ROM IC9 (*1) 256Mb -SDRAM (System Memory) (Document Memory) (ECM Buffer) (MODEM Buffer) System Bus IC8 (*2) 1Mb -SRAM
ADF model (MFX-2700 and MFX-2200)

PCBVOICE IC2 MSM6650 IC5 32Mb FLASH ROM Ni-MH battery System Bus -B IC35 MMD5020 MODEM V34 Option 2nd LINE MODEM PCB NCU DAA RJ11 Option 2nd LINE NCU RJ45 RJ11 Option NIC NP-400
EX memory (*1) 256Mb-SDRAM
Option Office Bridge Pro WS -550 Option PCL OP -550 Gate
or
PCB SCANER IC5 AFE IC2 MD0008 IMAGE PROCESSING IC1 Driver. PCB ADF
Lithium battery
Gate
SPEAKER
Audio
IC2 CCD 600dpi Inverter Lamp
Compact Flash Memory
Gate
IC2 MD0010 SYSTEM ASIC System Bus Controller Image Bus Controller PSU-200E POWER SUPPLY Power Saved Option
IC6 MD0002 Image Memory Control
FBS MOTOR ADF MOTOR
CODEC (COMM) CODEC (Scanner) CODEC (Printer) USB 1.1 I/F CON
RES. CONV (COMM)
IC13 256Mb-SDRAM (Image Memory)
IC1 Driver. PCB PRT
RJ45 PCB CCD
PRINTER UNIT
RES. CONV (Smoothing)
Main MOTOR1 Gate PCB LPH IC1 LPH control PCB CASSETTE LED HEAD Main MOTOR2
VIDEO I/F LED I/F
(*1) Cpmmected to the Ni-MH battery (*2) Cpmmected to the Lithium battery
HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY
RADF model (MFX-2725 and MFX-2225)

PCB MAIN PCB PANEL LCD PANEL -A PANEL -B Gate IC1 SH7706 CPU IC7 64Mb FLASH ROM IC9 (*1) 256Mb-SDRAM (System Memory) (Document Memory) (ECM Buffer) (MODEM Buffer) IC8 (*2) 1Mb-SRAM PCB VOICE IC2 MSM6650 IC5 32Mb FLASH ROM System Bus-B Ni-MH battery IC35 MMD5020 MODEM V34 Option 2nd LINE MODEM PCB NCU DAA
RJ11
Option 2nd LINE NCU

RJ45
EX memory (*1) 256Mb-SDRAM 512Mb-SDRAM 32MB or 64MB SPEAKER System Bus
Option Office Bridge Pro OB-550 Option PCL OP-550 Gate
RJ11
or
Option NIC NP-400
PCB SCANNER RADF IC5 AFE IC2 MD0008 IMAGE PROCESSING IC50 MD0008 ADF CONTROLER ADF driver PCB Driver. Senser. PCB PRT FEED MOTOR IC1 Driver.
RJ45
PCB CCD IC2 CCD 600dpi Inverter Lamp
Audio Lithium battery Gate
Compact Flash Memory
Gate
IC2 MD0010 SYSTEM ASIC PSU-200E System Bus Controller Image Bus Controller POWER SUPPLY Power Saved Option CODEC (COMM) CODEC (Scanner) CODEC (Printer) USB 1.1 I/F
CON
IC6 MD0002 Image Memory Control
FBS MOTOR
RES. CONV (COMM)
IC13 256Mb-SDRAM (Image Memory)
READ MOTOR PRINTER UNIT
RES. CONV (Smoothing) VIDEO I/F LED I/F
Gate
PCB LPH IC1 LPH control
MOTOR1
Main
(*1) Connected to the Ni-MH battery (*2) Connected to the Lithium battery
PCB CASSETTE
LED HEAD
HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY
MOTOR2
Main
2-39
Main Control PCB

The main control PCB controls the operations of all machine functions. The modem modulates and demodulates the data, detects the control signal, and send DTMF signals. It processes the rotation of the scanned image, fax received image and print image. It transports the image in memory to the LPH PCB in serial data. When a Compact Flash Memory Card is inserted to the socket and the machine is turned on, it transfers the updating data to the SDRAM, and after the transferring writes the data on to the FLASH memory. It controls the High Voltage Power Supply. Memory section: FLASH MEMORY -- The FLASH MEMORY contains all program instructions for unit operation, the background level and all other parameters. SRAM -- The SRAM, which is backed-up by a lithium battery is used to store user programmed information. When the jumper pin JP2 is removed, the stored information will be cleared. SDRAM -- The SDRAM is used for buffer the following items. It is backed-up by a Nickel-metalhydride battery on the Voice PCB. Program data - When the machine is turned on, the CPU operation data on the Flash memory will be copied to SDRAM, and the program will be executed. Program data - Encoded image data Program data - Temporary memory for transmission Note: The SDRAM back-up battery is connected to the Voice PCB. When the Main control PCB is replaced, the connection will be lost. To remove the Main control PCB without loosing the backed-up memory, do not remove the harness between Main control PCB and Voice PCB. When the jumper pin JP2 is removed and reinserted, be sure to clear all the data. When the harness between the Main control PCB and Voice PCB is removed and reinserted, execute the DRAM Clear operation. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <6> and [Yes].)
Note: Note:
Scanner PCB / Scanner RADF PCB

The scanner PCB and scanner RADF PCB detect the sensors on the scanner. They control the drive motor. They drive the FBS motor. They control the CCD. They offset and adjust the image signal (analog) from the CCD, converts AD, and processes the image.
ADF PCB / ADF driver PCB

The ADF PCB and ADF driver PCB detect the sensors on the ADF and RADF. They control the ADF and RADF drive motor.
CCD PCB
The CCD PCB scans the document with 600 dpi CCD, and transfer the image signal (analog) to the Scanner PCB.
PRT PCB
The PRT PCB detect the sensors in the printer unit. It controls the clutch.
2-40
LPH PCB
The LPH PCB changes the print serial data on the Main control PCB to a data format for LEDPrintHead, and transfer the data to the LED-Print-Head. It reads the LED individual difference correction data, and adjust the print density automatically.
Panel PCB
The Panel PCB controls the LCD. It scans the keys on the panel and on the LCD.
Voice PCB
The Voice PCB outputs the voice guidance. The nickel metal hydride battery to back-up the SDRAM of the Main control PCB, is equipped on the voice PCB.
2-41
2.6 Network Control Unit (NCU) PCB

The NCU PCB provides the connection to the telephone line. It consists of the interface circuit, ring signal detector and telephone control circuit.
IC1 IC2
OFHK CI SDI SDO FSYNL MCLK
24.576MHZ
LINE
TEL1
PC4
OH
TEL2
NCU PCB block diagram Major components of the NCU IC1: AFE (Analog Front End) IC1 has the following functions: Off Hook (The establishment of DC loop state): It makes the quiescent state from the loop state. CI detector: It detects the ringing signal. OH detector: It detects the state of On-hook or Off-hook of the external telephone. IC2 IC2 controls the IC1. It also sets the parameter of the IC1. H relay It exchanges the connection for the Tel1 and Tel2 line connection. Normally, it is connected to the line, makes AC loop and detects Off-hook by line current. When it is connected to the private line, the line current is not available but it is supplied private current from the MFP. CI detector Detects the calling signal. OH detector Detects the hook condition of the second telephone unit. Normally, IC1 detects the hook condition. When the second telephone is connected to the private line, PC4 detects the hook condition.
2-42
2.7 Low Voltage Power Supply Unit (LVPS)

The power supple is from 220 VAC to 240 VAC. The power supply unit receives the input line voltage and currents it to output voltage of +5 VDC, +24 VDC and +3.3 VDC. +24 VDC is controlled by transformer, + 5 VDC and + 3.3 VDC is controlled by DC/DC converter. It consists of the primary controller, secondary controller, heater controller and flicker controller. The AC input is switched between INLET and AC SW. An overvoltage and overcurrent preventing circuit is equipped. A driver circuit for the heat roller is quipped. The output range is from 750 W / 220 VAC to 750 W / 240 VCA.
INLET
L CN1 N
SW
INPUT AC CN1
FUSE LINE FILTER RECTIFICATION/ LEVEL RECTIFICATION/ LEVEL
OUTPUT CN2
+24.0V 3 4 5 6 CONTROL +24V HEATER CONTROL 1 CONTROL IC HEATER CONTROL 2 CONTROL DC/DC + +5.0V 11 12
01
PC1A
CONTROL DC/DC +
+3.3V
OUTPUT HEATER CN101

PGND PC2A
13 14 7 8 9 10 15 16 2
SGND PT102 HC2
PT101
HC1
DB2 LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY
2-43
2.8 High Voltage Power Supply

This PCB makes and supply high voltage for every electrophotographic process (charging, grid, developing, transferring). To charge the drum surface negatively, the charge section generates negative-voltage and impresses the comb electrode. To charge the drum surface evenly, the grid mesh at the opening of the charge section generates negative-voltage and impresses the grid electrode. The voltage is changed by an analog signal. To transfer the toner in the developing unit to the drum, the developing unit generates negative-charge and impresses the mag-roller. The voltage is changed by an analog signal. To transfer the image on the drum to the paper, the transfer unit generates positive-voltage and impresses the transfer roller. By cleaning the transfer roller, negative-voltage is generated and impressed to the roller. The voltage is changed by an analog signal.
+24V
Charge(-)
Control Signal
G rid(-)
PCB HVPS
D eveloper(-) Analog Signal
Transfer (+) Transfer (-)
DB2 PCB High Voltage Power Supply
2-44
3 Adjustment Procedures
3.1 Field Service Program Modes
The machine feature maintenance modes for machine adjustment. Each mode is listed below along with the command used to activate the mode and a brief functional description. Note: When you press * , you will hear short beeps. However continue the operation, as there is no problem. Set or Clear Machine Parameters ................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <0> Used to set or clear machine parameters. Set or Clear Memory Switches ........................................................................ <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <1> Used to set or clear memory switches. Clear Programmed Data / User Settings ........................................................ <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <2> Erases user-programmed information (date, time, TTI, address book, etc.) and any docu, ments stored in memory. All RAM Clear .................................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <3> Erases same information as Clear Programmed Data / User Settings function along with resetting all of the memory switches and unique switches to factory defaults. Set or Clear Unique Switches.......................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <4> Used to set or clear Unique switches. T.30 Monitor ...................................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <5> Used to print a G3 procedural summary of the fax communication. Printer maintenance ......................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <6> Access this mode to determine the cause of the Call Service error message. ccess Or, when replaced the Fuser unit or Image transfer roller, reset the counter using this mode. hen ransfer , Monitor Speaker ............................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <8> Use to hear the signal sound with machines speaker during fax transaction. Test Modes ........................................................................................................ <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9> Allows the technician to perform a series of diagnostic tests. Print Machine Parameters, Memory Switches and Unique Switches List ....................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <0> Prints a list of the machine switch settings showing the default settings and current settings. Factory Functions ........................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1> Allows the technician to perform a series of diagnostic tests. Line Tests .......................................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <2> s Allows the technician to perform a series of diagnostic tests. Mirror Carriage Transfer Mode ........................................................................ <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <4> Perform it before installing the fax machine. Set or clear the consumable order sheet ....................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <5> Used to set or clear the consumable order sheet. DRAM Clear ....................................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <6> Used to clear a DRAM. Clear Life Monitor ............................................................................................. <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <7> Used to clear a Life monitor keeps a count of the pages scanned, etc. Clear option modules SRAM .......................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <8> , Used to clear a SRAM of option module. Set Service Code .............................................................................................. <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <9> Used to protect to clear a Life monitor. Life Monitor Maintenance ................................................................................ <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <0> , When the main PCB has been replaced, you should register the previous several counter values of the life monitor. Sensor Input test ............................................................................................. <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <2> , Sensor diagnostic test. 3-1
Printer diagnostic mode .................................................................................. <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <3> , Printer diagnostic test. Network service mode .................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <4> ode , Used to display the server sumcheck, export/import the network setting data or to initialize the network settings. Flash ROM Sum check ..................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <9> , Used to confirm flash ROM Check Sum after the software is overwritten. Service Report setting ..................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <2> , Used to enter location where to send the service report. Printer registration adjustment ....................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <3> , Used to adjust the printer registration. Printer trouble reset ......................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <5> , Used to delete the error message on the LCD. Cleaning mode .................................................................................................. <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <6> , Used to rotate the feed roller and registration roller for cleaning. Voice test........................................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <7> , Used to test the voice guidance. Set or Clear Network Switches........................................................................ <Menu>, <*>, <5>, <1> Used to set or clear Network switches. Security function maintenance ....................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <5>, <2> Used to edit the security function regardless of the registered protect passcode. Black ratio measuring ...................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <5>, <4> Used to measure the black ratio of any document. Service function menu ..................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <7>, <7> Displays all the available field service program modes shortcuts. Update the software ......................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <9>, <6> Used to upgrade the software using the CF (Compact Flash) card. Quick installation mode ................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <9>, <9> You can set the initial setting mode, consumable order sheet setting and service report setting continuously.setting continuously.
3-2
3.2 Machine Parameter Adjustment

3.2.1 Setting the Machine Parameters
These switches are used to program internal machine parameters. The primary back up battery maintains these settings if power is lost. 1. From standby, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <0>. 2. Select Edit Parameters. and press [Enter].
3. Call up the desired switch by pressing < > or < >, or by pressing the numeric keypad.
4. Press [Enter].
5. To navigate through the machine parameter settings: The bits are ranged from 7 (left) to 0 (right). Press < > or < > of the cursor key to move the cursor. Press <0> or <1> on the numeric keypad, or < > or < >, to change the bit value. Press [Enter] to save the setting of the displayed parameter and return to the machine parameter edit screen. Press [Close] not to save the setting of the displayed parameter. 6. If you want to set other machine parameters, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7. 7. Press <Reset> to return the machine to standby. Note: You can confirm the initial setting of each Machine parameter by the Machine Parameters List. The Machine Parameters List will be printed by pressing <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <0>.
3.2.2 Clearing the Machine Parameters

Resets the machine parameters to factory defaults. 1. From standby, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <0>. 2. Select Clear Parameters and press [Enter].
3. Press [Yes]. The machine parameters will reset to factory defaults. Note: To finish the operation without clearing the parameters, press [No]. 4. Press <Reset> to return the machine to standby. 3-3
Machine Parameter 000 Factory use only Machine Parameter 001

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Output attenuation Usage/Comments
See table below Note: The setting of this switch is available only when setting other than 0 dB (and this setting is used instead o f Memory Switch 011, bit 3-0.)
Machine Parameter 001Output attenuation

Switch 3 2 1 0 -15 dB 1 1 1 1 -14 dB 1 1 1 0 -13 dB 1 1 0 1 -12 dB 1 1 0 0 -11 dB 1 0 1 1 -10 dB 1 0 1 0 -9 dB 1 0 0 1 -8 dB 1 0 0 0 -7 dB 0 1 1 1 -6 dB 0 1 1 0 -5 dB 0 1 0 1 -4 dB 0 1 0 0 -3 dB 0 0 1 1 -2 dB 0 0 1 0 -1 dB 0 0 0 1 -0 dB 0 0 0 0
Machine Parameter 002 ~ 006 Factory use only Machine Parameter 007
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Adjust Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used DRAM capacity indication on the Expansion Memory n PCB DRAM capacity indication on the Expansion Memory n PCB DRAM capacity indication on the Main PCB n Usage/Comments
This switch indicates the DRAM capacity. (This switch is read only, do not set any character) You can see the memory capacity by how many 1 is indicated on the LCD. One 1 means 32 MB. For example, if two 1 are indicated, i.e. 011, the DRAM capacity is 32 MB x 2 64 MB.
Machine Parameter 008 and 009 Factory use only
3-4
Machine Parameter 010

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Adjust ADF scanner registration adjustment (Horizontal) Copy mode Adjusts the start point to scan the document. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. 1 step 5 / 600 dpi (0.2116 mm) Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 Settings +5.290 mm +4.232 mm +2.116 mm 0 mm -2.116 mm -4.232 mm -5.290 mm
+25 steps 00011001 : +20 steps 00010100 : +10 steps 00001010 : 00000000 : -10 steps 10001010 : -20 steps 10010100 : -25 steps 11111101
Note:To adjust fax / scan mode, adjust machine parameter 453.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Adjustment of the scanning stretching and squeezing for ADF. (Horizontal) The plus setting stretches the image data and the minus setting squeezes it. Each setting changes by 0.1 Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00001111 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000010 00000001 01 1 00000000 10000001 0000001 01 1 10000010 0000010 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10001111 Settings +1.5 +0.8 +0.4 +0.2 +0.1 0 Initial setting -0.1 -0.2 -0.4 -0.8 -1.5
3-5

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Adjust Adjustment of the scanning stretching and squeezing for ADF. (Vertical) Fax/Scan mode The plus setting squeezes the image data and the minus setting stretches it. Each setting changes by 0.1 Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00111111 : 00011111 : 00001111 : 00001000 : 00000001 01 1 00000000 10000001 0000001 001 1 : 10001000 : 10001111 : 10011111 : 10111111 Settings +6.3 +3.2 +1.5 +0.8 +0.1 0 Standard -0.1 0.1 1 -0.8 -1.5 -3.2 -6.3
For copy mode, adjust machine parameter 430.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment (ADF) Adjusts the leading edge margin from Document Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start of scanning the position. 1 step 2 / 300 dpi (0.0847 x 2 mm) Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 Settings +10.67 mm +5.41 mm +2.71 mm +1.35 mm 27.8 mm -1.35 mm -2.71 mm -5.41 mm -10.67 mm
63 steps 00111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10100000 : -63step 101111111
Note: To adjust the steps for each mode, use aditional parameters. Mode Copy mode Fax mode Resolution Normal Fine Super fine / Hyper fine Ultra fine Adding Machine Parameter 431 086 087 088 089
3-6

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Adjust Trailing edge document margin adjustment (ADF) Adjusts document feed after the trailing edge of a document passes Document Sensor 2 (DS2). 1 step 2 / 300 dpi (0.0847 x 2 mm) Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 Settings +10.67 mm +5.41 mm +2.71 mm +1.35 mm 27.8 mm -1.35 mm -2.71 mm -5.41 mm -10.67 mm
63 steps 00111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10100000 : -63step 101111111
Note: To adjust the steps for each mode, use aditional parameters. Mode Copy mode Fax mode Resolution Normal Fine Super fine / Hyper fine Ultra fine Adding Machine Parameter 432 076 077 078 079
3-7

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Adjust FBS scanner registration adjustment (Horizontal) Copy mode Adjusts the start point to scan the document. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. 1 step 5 / 600 dpi (0.2116 mm) Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 Settings +5.29 mm +3.39 mm +1.69 mm 0 mm -1.69 mm -3.39 mm -5.29 mm
25 steps 00011001 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : -25 steps 10011001
Note: For adjust fax / scan mode, adjust machine parameter 454.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Adjustment of the scanning stretching and squeezing for FBS. . (Horizontal) The plus setting stretches the image data and the minus setting squeezes it. Each setting changes by 0.1 Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00001111 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000010 00000001 01 1 00000000 10000001 0000001 01 1 10000010 0000010 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10001111 Settings +1.5 +0.8 +0.4 +0.2 +0.1 0 Initial setting -0.1 -0.2 -0.4 -0.8 -1.5
3-8

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Adjustment of the scanning stretching and squeezing for FBS. (Vertical) Copy mode The plus setting squeezes the image data and the minus setting stretches it. Each setting changes by 0.1 Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00001111 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000010 00000001 01 1 00000000 10000001 0000001 01 1 10000010 0000010 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10001111 Settings +1.5 +0.8 +0.4 +0.2 +0.1 0 Initial setting -0.1 -0.2 -0.4 -0.8 -1.5
For copy mode, adjust machine parameter 435.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment for FBS or ADF model Copy and Scan mode Adjusts the leading edge margin after Home Sensor OFF to the start of scanning the position. Each setting changes by 0.140793616 mm. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 31 steps 00011111 1 : 16 steps 00010000 010000 10000 : 8 steps 00001000 001000 1000 : 4 steps 00000100 000100 0100 : 00000000 : -4 steps 10000100 0000100 0100 : -8 steps 10001000 0001000 1000 000 00 : -16 steps 10010000 0010000 10000 0000 00 : -31 steps 10100000 1 0100000 Settings +4.36 mm +2.25 mm +1.13 mm +0.56 mm 5 mm -0.56mm 0.56mm -1.13mm 1.13mm -2.25 mm -4.36 mm
For copy mode, add the value of machine parameter 436. For fax mode, adjust machine parameter 455. Note: For RADF model, adjust it using the machine parameter 457.
Machine Parameter 019 Factory use only
3-9

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 Adjust Mirror carriage standby position adjustment Adjusts the number of the steps from the home sensor of the mirror carriage OFF to the standby position. 1 step 0.140793616 mm Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 63 steps 00111111 : 60 steps 00111100 : 50 steps 00110010 : 30 steps 00010100 : 10 steps 00001010 : 3 steps 00000011 2 steps 00000010 1 step 00000001 00000000 Settings +8.87 mm +8.45 mm +7.04 mm +2.82 mm +1.41 mm +0.42 mm +0.28 mm +0.14 mm 20 mm
When Switch 7 is 1, it means - . For example, 10000001 means -0.14 mm. 4

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Adjust Mirror carriage transfer mode position adjustment Adjusts the number of the steps from the home sensor of the mirror carriage OFF to the transfer mode position. 1 step 0.140793616 mm Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 63 steps 00111111 : 60 steps 00111100 : 50 steps 00110010 : 30 steps 00010100 : 10 steps 00001010 : 3 steps 00000011 2 steps 00000010 1 step 00000001 00000000 Settings +8.87 mm +8.45 mm +7.04 mm +2.82 mm +1.41 mm +0.42 mm +0.28 mm +0.14 mm 20 mm
When Switch 7 is 1, it means - . For example, 10000001 means -0.14 mm. 4
Machine Parameter 022 ~ 029 Factory use only
3-10

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Scanning density level adjustment in normal resolution. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Darkest setting : 00001000 : 00000000 Initial setting : 10001000 : 11111111 Lightest setting

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Scanning density level adjustment in fine resolution. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Darkest setting : 00001000 : 00000000 Initial setting : 10001000 : 11111111 Lightest setting

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Scanning density level adjustment in super-fine resolution. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Darkest setting : 00001000 : 00000000 Initial setting : 10001000 : 11111111 Lightest setting
3-11

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Scanning density level adjustment in hyper-fine resolution. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Darkest setting : 00001000 : 00000000 Initial setting : 10001000 : 11111111 Lightest setting

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Scanning density level adjustment in ultra-fine (600dpi x 600dpi) resolution. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Darkest setting : 00001000 : 00000000 Initial setting : 10001000 : 11111111 Lightest setting

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Scanning density level adjustment in background mode. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 Darkest setting : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 11000000 Initial setting : 11111111 Lightest setting
3-12
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Left side edge document margin adjustment Each setting changes by 0.4233 mm. Left side means the side of the scanning position. Usage/Comments
Adjust this parameter when black line appears on the left edge of the printouts in following cases: While paper selection is set to Auto, A4 or B4 paper is selected in rotate printing The document set on the FBS is A5 or B5 , or the vertical length of the document is shorter than A5 or B5 . Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0 111111 : 111100 : 110010 : 101000 : 011110 : 010101 : 000101 : 000001 000000 Settings 26.67 mm 25.40 mm 21.17 mm 16.93 mm 12.70 mm 8.47 mm 2.11 mm (Initial setting) 0.42 mm 0.0 mm
3-13

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 Adjust Trailing edge document margin adjustment (ADF) ADF model Fax mode Normal Resolution Adjusts document feed after the trailing edge of a document passes Document Sensor 2 (DS2). 1 step 2 / 300 dpi (0.0847 x 2 mm) Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 Settings +5.25 mm +2.71 mm +1.35 mm 27.8 mm -1.35 mm -2.71 mm -5.25 mm
31 steps 00011111 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : -31step 100011111
Note: Add these steps to machine parameter014, when adjusting the steps for transmission with normal resolution.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Adjust Trailing edge document margin adjustment (ADF) ADF model Fax mode Fine Resolution Adjusts document feed after the trailing edge of a document passes Document Sensor 2 (DS2). 1 step 2 / 300 dpi (0.0847 x 2 mm) Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 Settings +5.25 mm +2.71 mm +1.35 mm 27.8 mm -1.35 mm -2.71 mm -5.25 mm
31 steps 00011111 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : -31step 100011111
Note: Add these steps to machine parameter014, when adjusting the steps for transmission with fine resolution.
3-14

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Adjust Trailing edge document margin adjustment (ADF) ADF model Fax mode Super-fine Resolution Hyper-fine Resolution Adjusts document feed after the trailing edge of a document passes Document Sensor 2 (DS2). 1 step 2 / 300 dpi (0.0847 x 2 mm) Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 Settings +5.25 mm +2.71 mm +1.35 mm 27.8 mm -1.35 mm -2.71 mm -5.25 mm
31 steps 00011111 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : -31step 100011111
Note: Add these steps to machine parameter014, when adjusting the steps for transmission with super/hyper -fine resolution.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Trailing edge document margin adjustment (ADF) ADF model Fax mode Ultra-fine Resolution Adjusts document feed after the trailing edge of a document passes Document Sensor 2 (DS2). 1 step 2 / 300 dpi (0.0847 x 2 mm) Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 Settings +5.25 mm +2.71 mm +1.35 mm 27.8 mm -1.35 mm -2.71 mm -5.25 mm
31 steps 00011111 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : -31step 100011111
Note: Add these steps to machine parameter 014, when adjusting the steps for transmission with ultra-fine resolution.
3-15
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment (ADF) Adjusts the leading edge margin from Document Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start of scanning the position. ADF model Fax mode Document type: Normal 1 step 2 / 300 dpi (0.0847 x 2 mm) Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 Settings +10.67 mm +5.41 mm +2.71 mm +1.35 mm 27.8 mm -1.35 mm -2.71 mm -5.41 mm -10.67 mm
63 steps 00111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10100000 : -63step 101111111
Note: Add these steps to machine parameter013, when adjusting the steps for transmission with normal resolution.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment (ADF) Adjusts the leading edge margin from Document Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start of scanning the position. ADF model Fax mode Document type: Fine 1 step 2 / 300 dpi (0.0847 x 2 mm) Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 Settings +10.67 mm +5.41 mm +2.71 mm +1.35 mm 27.8 mm -1.35 mm -2.71 mm -5.41 mm -10.67 mm
63 steps 00111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10100000 : -63step 101111111
Note: Add these steps to machine parameter 013, when adjusting the steps for fax mode / fine scanning.
3-16

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment (ADF) Adjusts the leading edge margin from Document Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start of scanning the position. ADF model Fax mode Document type: Super Fine / Hyper Fine 1 step 2 / 300 dpi (0.0847 x 2 mm) Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 Settings +10.67 mm +5.41 mm +2.71 mm +1.35 mm 27.8 mm -1.35 mm -2.71 mm -5.41 mm -10.67 mm
63 steps 00111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10100000 : -63step 101111111
Note: Add these steps to machine parameter 013, when adjusting the steps for fax mode / super/ hyper-fine or hyper-fine scanning.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment (ADF) Adjusts the leading edge margin from Document Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start of scanning the position. ADF model Fax mode Document type: Ultra Fine (600 dpi) 1 step 2 / 300 dpi (0.0847 x 2 mm) Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 Settings +10.67 mm +5.41 mm +2.71 mm +1.35 mm 27.8 mm -1.35 mm -2.71 mm -5.41 mm -10.67 mm
63 steps 00111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10100000 : -63step 101111111
Note: Add these steps to machine parameter 013, when adjusting the steps for fax mode / ultrafine (600dpi) scanning.

3-17

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 1st cassette for normal printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 0.1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 110 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm
-8 steps -16 steps -127 steps
Note: Set this switch after setting the margin to 0 mm in Unique Switch 52. Then, after setting this switch, set the margin to the initial setting in Unique Switch 52.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 2nd cassette for normal printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 0.1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 111 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm
3-18

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 3rd cassette for normal printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 0.1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 112 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 4th cassette for normal printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 0.1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 113 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm
3-19

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the Bypass tray for normal printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 0.1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 117 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the duplex printing for normal printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 0.1mm. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm
3-20

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 1st cassette for rotate printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 0.1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 100 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 2nd cassette for rotatel printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 0.1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 101 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm
3-21

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 3rd cassette for rotate printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 0.1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 102 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 4th cassette for rotate printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 0.1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 103 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm
3-22

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the Bypass tray for rotate printing. Adjusts the start point to print. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 0.1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 107 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm
3-23

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 1st cassette for normal printing. Adjusts the ending point to print. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 0.1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 130 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 2nd cassette for normal printing. Adjusts the ending point to print. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 0.1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 131 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm
3-24

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 3rd cassette for normal printing. Adjusts the ending point to print. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 0.1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 132 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 4th cassette for normal printing. Adjusts the ending point to print. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 0.1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 133 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm
3-25

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the Bypass tray for normal printing. Adjusts the ending point to print. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 0.1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 137 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the duplex printing for normal printing. Adjusts the ending point to print. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 0.1mm. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm
3-26

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 1st cassette for rotate printing. Adjusts the ending point to print. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 0.1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 120 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 2nd cassette for rotatel printing. Adjusts the ending point to print. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 0.1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 121 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm
3-27

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 3rd cassette for rotate printing. Adjusts the ending point to print. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 0.1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 122 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 4th cassette for rotate printing. Adjusts the ending point to print. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 0.1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 123 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm
3-28

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the Bypass tray for rotate printing. Adjusts the ending point to print. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 0.1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 127 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm
3-29

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the left margin at the 1st cassette for normal printing. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 150 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the left margin at the 2nd cassette for normal printing. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 151 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm
3-30

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the left margin at the 3rd cassette for normal printing. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 152 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the left margin at the 4th cassette for normal printing. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 153 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm
3-31

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the left margin at the Bypass tray for normal printing. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 16 dots (0.6773 mm). Note: See Machine Parameter 157 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm
3-32

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the left margin at the 1st cassette for rotate printing. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 140 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the left margin at the 2nd cassette for rotate printing. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 141 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm
3-33

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the left margin at the 3rd cassette for rotate printing. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 142 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the left margin at the 4th cassette for rotate printing. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 1 mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 143 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm
3-34

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the left margin at the Bypass tray for rotate printing. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The setting changes by 16 dots (0.6773 mm). Note: See Machine Parameter 147 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm
3-35

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the right margin at the 1st cassette for normal printing. The plus setting decreases the right margin and the minus setting increases it. The setting changes by 1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 170 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the right margin at the 2nd cassette for normal printing. The plus setting decreases the right margin and the minus setting increases it. The setting changes by 1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 171 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm
3-36

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the right margin at the 3rd cassette for normal printing. The plus setting decreases the right margin and the minus setting increases it. The setting changes by 1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 172 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the right margin at the 4th cassette for normal printing. The plus setting decreases the right margin and the minus setting increases it. The setting changes by 1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 173 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm
3-37

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the right margin at the Bypass tray for normal printing. The plus setting decreases the right margin and the minus setting increases it. The setting changes by 1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 177 for the rotate printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm
3-38

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the right margin at the 1st cassette for rotate printing. The plus setting decreases the right margin and the minus setting increases it. The setting changes by 1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 160 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the right margin at the 2nd cassette for rotate printing. The plus setting decreases the right margin and the minus setting increases it. The setting changes by 1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 161 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm
3-39

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the right margin at the 3rd cassette for rotate printing. The plus setting decreases the right margin and the minus setting increases it. The setting changes by 1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 162 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the right margin at the 4th cassette for rotate printing. The plus setting decreases the right margin and the minus setting increases it. The setting changes by 1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 163 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm
3-40

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Adjusts the right margin at the Bypass tray for rotate printing. The plus setting decreases the right margin and the minus setting increases it. The setting changes by 1mm. Note: See Machine Parameter 167 for the normal printing. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 11110111 : 11101111 : 10000000 Settings +12.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.6 mm +0.8 mm 0 mm -0.8 mm -1.6 mm -12.7 mm
Machine Parameter 178 ~ 179 Factory use only Machine Parameter 180 ~ 379 Factory use only
3-41

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Adjust RADF scanner registration adjustment (Horizontal) Copy mode Adjusts the start point to scan the document. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. 1 step 5 / 600 dpi (0.2116 mm) Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 Settings +5.290 mm +4.232 mm +2.116 mm 0 mm -2.116 mm -4.232 mm -5.290 mm
+25 steps 00011001 : +20 steps 00010100 : +10 steps 00001010 : 00000000 : -10 steps 10001010 : -20 steps 10010100 : -25 steps 11111101
Note: To adjust ADF model, use machine parameter 010.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Adjustment of the scanning stretching and squeezing for RADF. (Horizontal) The plus setting stretches the image data and the minus setting squeezes it. Each setting changes by 0.1 Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00001111 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000010 00000001 01 1 00000000 10000001 0000001 01 1 10000010 0000010 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10001111 Settings +1.5 +0.8 +0.4 +0.2 +0.1 0 Initial setting -0.1 -0.2 -0.4 -0.8 -1.5
3-42

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 Adjust Adjustment of the scanning stretching and squeezing for RADF. (Vertical) Fax/Scan mode The plus setting squeezes the image data and the minus setting stretches it. Each setting changes by 0.1 Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00111111 : 00011111 : 00001111 : 00001000 : 00000001 01 1 00000000 10000001 0000001 001 1 : 10001000 : 10001111 : 10011111 : 10111111 Settings +6.3 +3.2 +1.5 +0.8 +0.1 0 Standard -0.1 0.1 1 -0.8 -1.5 -3.2 -6.3
3-43

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment Adjusts the leading edge margin from Document Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start of scanning the position. RADF model Front page 1 step 0.03093 x 2 mm -16 steps -32 steps -64 steps -127 steps Switch 127 steps 64 steps 32 steps 16 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10100000 : 11111111 Settings +7.86 mm +4.0 mm +2.0 mm +1.0 mm 0 -1.0 mm -2.0 mm -4.0 mm -7.86 mm
Note: To adjust ADF model, use machine , parameter 013. Note: To adjust RADF model back page, use , machine parameter 398. Note: To adjust the steps for each mode, use aditional parameters.
Mode Copy mode Fax mode
Resolution Normal Fine Super fine / Hyper fine Ultra fine
Adding Machine Parameter 386 394 395 396 397
3-44

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 Adjust Trailing edge document margin adjustment Adjusts document feed after the trailing edge of a document passes Document Sensor 2 (DS2). (RADF model Front page) 1 step 0.03093 x 2 mm -16 steps -32 steps -64 steps -127 steps Switch 127 steps 64 steps 32 steps 16 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10100000 : 11111111 Settings +7.86 mm +4.0 mm +2.0 mm +1.0 mm 0 -1.0 mm -2.0 mm -4.0 mm -7.86 mm
Note: To adjust ADF model, use machine , parameter 014. Note: To adjust RADF model back page, use , machine parameter 399. Note: To adjust the steps for each mode, use aditional parameters.
Mode Copy mode Fax mode
Resolution Normal Fine Super fine / Hyper fine Ultra fine
Adding Machine Parameter 387 390 391 392 393
3-45

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Adjust Adjustment of the scanner stretching and squeezing for RADF. (Vertical) Copy mode The plus setting squeezes the image data and the minus setting stretches it. Each setting changes by 0.1 Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00111111 : 00101000 : 00010100 : 00000000 : 10010100 : 10101000 : 10111111 Settings +6.3 +4.0 +2.0 0 Standard -2.0 -4.0 -6.3
Note: Add these steps to machine parameter 383.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment Adjusts the leading edge margin from Document Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start of scanning the position. RADF model Front page Copy mode 1 step 0.03093 x 2 mm Switch 63 steps 32 steps 16 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 00111111 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10111111 Settings +3.9 mm +2.0 mm +1.0 mm 0 -1.0 mm -2.0 mm -3.9 mm
Note: Add these steps to machine parameter 383, when adjusting the steps for copy mode. Note: Adjust the steps in 600 dpi copy.
3-46

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Trailing edge document margin adjustment Adjusts document feed after the trailing edge of a document passes Document Sensor 2 (DS2). RADF model Front page Copy mode 1 step 0.03093 x 2 mm Switch 63 steps 32 steps 16 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 00111111 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10111111 Settings +3.9 mm +2.0 mm +1.0 mm 0 -1.0 mm -2.0 mm -3.9 mm
3-47

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Document skew adjustment RADF model (Front Page) 1 step 0.03093 x 2 mm Usage/Comments This sets the flexible volume at the separator roller. If the flexible volume is high, the document skew will improve but thin paper may easy jam. Switch 127 steps 64 steps 32 steps 16 steps 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10100000 : 11111111 Settings +7.86 mm +4.0 mm +2.0 mm +1.0 mm 0 -1.0 mm -2.0 mm -4.0 mm -7.86 mm
-16 steps -32 steps -64 steps -127 steps
Note: For ADF model, adjust it using the machine parameter 452.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Document skew adjustment RADF model (Back Page) ADF 1 step 0.03093 x 2 mm Usage/Comments This sets the flexible volume at the separator roller. If the flexible volume is high, the document skew will improve but thin paper may easy jam. Switch 127 steps 64 steps 32 steps 16 steps 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10100000 : 11111111 Settings +7.86 mm +4.0 mm +2.0 mm +1.0 mm 0 -1.0 mm -2.0 mm -4.0 mm -7.86 mm
Note: For ADF model, adjust it using the machine parameter 452.
3-48

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 Adjust Trailing edge document margin adjustment RADF model (Front page) Fax mode Normal Resolution Adjusts document feed after the trailing edge of a document passes Document Sensor 2 (DS2). 1 step 0.03093 x 2 mm Switch 63 steps 32 steps 16 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 00111111 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10111111 Settings +3.9 mm +1.9 mm +1.0 mm 0 -1.0 mm -1.9 mm -3.9 mm
Note: Add these steps to machine parameter 384, when adjusting the steps for transmission with normal resolution.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 Adjust Trailing edge document margin adjustment RADF model (Front page) Fax mode Fine Resolution Adjusts document feed after the trailing edge of a document passes Document Sensor 2 (DS2). 1 step 0.03093 x 2 mm Switch 63 steps 32 steps 16 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 00111111 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10111111 Settings +3.9 mm +1.9 mm +1.0 mm 0 -1.0 mm -1.9 mm -3.9 mm
Note: Add these steps to machine parameter 384, when adjusting the steps for transmission with fine resolution.
3-49

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Adjust Trailing edge document margin adjustment RADF model (Front page) Fax mode Super-fine Resolution Hyper-fine Resolution Adjusts document feed after the trailing edge of a document passes Document Sensor 2 (DS2). 1 step 0.03093 x 2 mm Switch 63 steps 32 steps 16 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 00111111 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10111111 Settings +3.9 mm +2.0 mm +1.0 mm 0 -1.0 mm -2.0 mm -3.9 mm
Note: Add these steps to machine parameter 384, when adjusting the steps for transmission with super/hyper fine resolution.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Trailing edge document margin adjustment RADF model (Front page) Fax mode Ultra-fine Resolution Adjusts document feed after the trailing edge of a document passes Document Sensor 2 (DS2). 1 step 0.03093 x 2 mm Switch 63 steps 32 steps 16 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 00111111 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10111111 Settings +3.9 mm +2.0 mm +1.0 mm 0 -1.0 mm -2.0 mm -3.9 mm
3-50

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment Adjusts the leading edge margin from Document Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start of scanning the position. RADF model (Front page) Fax mode Document type: Normal 1 step 0.03093 x 2 mm Switch 63 steps 32 steps 16 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 00111111 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10111111 Settings +3.9 mm +2.0 mm +1.0 mm 0 -1.0 mm -2.0 mm -3.9 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment (ADF) Adjusts the leading edge margin from Document Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start of scanning the position. RADF model (Front page) Fax mode Document type: Fine 1 step 0.03093 x 2 mm Switch 63 steps 32 steps 16 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 00111111 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10111111 Settings +3.9 mm +2.0 mm +1.0 mm 0 -1.0 mm -2.0 mm -3.9 mm
3-51

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment (ADF) Adjusts the leading edge margin from Document Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start of scanning the position. RADF model (Front page) Fax mode Document type: Super Fine / Hyper Fine 1 step 0.03093 x 2 mm Switch 63 steps 32 steps 16 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 00111111 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10111111 Settings +3.9 mm +1.9 mm +1.0 mm 0 -1.0 mm -2.0 mm -3.9 mm
Note: Add these steps to machine parameter 383, when adjusting the steps for transmission with super/hyber fine resolution.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment (ADF) Adjusts the leading edge margin from Document Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start of scanning the position. RADF model (Front page) Fax mode Document type: Ultra Fine (600 dpi) 1 step 0.03093 x 2 mm Switch 63 steps 32 steps 16 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 00111111 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10111111 Settings +3.9 mm +2.0 mm +1.0 mm 0 -1.0 mm -2.0 mm -3.9 mm
Note: Add these steps to machine parameter 383, when adjusting the steps for transmission with ultra fine resolution.
3-52

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment (RADF model Back page) Adjusts the leading edge margin from Document Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start of scanning the position. 1 step 0.03093 x 2 mm Switch 127 steps 64 steps 32 steps 16 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10100000 : 11111111 Settings +7.86 mm +4.0 mm +2.0 mm +1.0 mm 0 -1.0 mm -2.0 mm -4.0 mm -7.86 mm
Note: To adjust ADF model, use machine , parameter 013. Note: To adjust RADF model front page, use , machine parameter 393. Note: To adjust the steps for each mode, use aditional parameters. Mode Copy mode Fax mode Resolution Normal Fine Super fine / Hyper fine Ultra fine Adding Machine Parameter 410 416 417 418 419
3-53

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 Adjust Trailing edge document margin adjustment (RADF model Back page) Adjusts document feed after the trailing edge of a document passes Document Sensor 2 (DS2). 1 step 0.03093 x 2 mm Switch 127 steps 64 steps 32 steps 16 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10100000 : 11111111 Settings +7.86 mm +4.0 mm +2.0 mm +1.0 mm 0 -1.0 mm -2.0 mm -4.0 mm -7.86 mm
Note: To adjust ADF model, use machine , parameter 014. Note: To adjust RADF model back page, use , machine parameter 384. Note: To adjust the steps for each mode, use aditional parameters. Mode Copy mode Fax mode Resolution Normal Fine Super fine / Hyper fine Ultra fine Adding Machine Parameter 411 412 413 414 415
3-54

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment Adjusts the leading edge margin from Document Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start of scanning the position. RADF model Back page Copy mode 1 step 0.03093 x 2 mm Switch 63 steps 32 steps 16 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 00111111 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10111111 Settings +3.9 mm +2.0 mm +1.0 mm 0 -1.0 mm -2.0 mm -3.9 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Trailing edge document margin adjustment Adjusts document feed after the trailing edge of a document passes Document Sensor 2 (DS2). RADF model Back page Copy mode 1 step 0.03093 x 2 mm Switch 63 steps 32 steps 16 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 00111111 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10111111 Settings +3.9 mm +2.0 mm +1.0 mm 0 -1.0 mm -2.0 mm -3.9 mm
3-55

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 Adjust Trailing edge document margin adjustment RADF model (Back page) Fax mode Normal Resolution Adjusts document feed after the trailing edge of a document passes Document Sensor 2 (DS2). 1 step 0.03093 x 2 mm Switch 63 steps 32 steps 16 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 00111111 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10111111 Settings +3.9 mm +2.0 mm +1.0 mm 0 -1.0 mm -2.0 mm -3.9 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 Adjust Trailing edge document margin adjustment RADF model (Back page) Fax mode Fine Resolution Adjusts document feed after the trailing edge of a document passes Document Sensor 2 (DS2). 1 step 0.03093 x 2 mm Switch 63 steps 32 steps 16 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 00111111 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10111111 Settings +3.9 mm +2.0 mm +1.0 mm 0 -1.0 mm -2.0 mm -3.9 mm
3-56

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 Adjust Trailing edge document margin adjustment RADF model (Back page) Fax mode Super-fine Resolution Hyper-fine Resolution Adjusts document feed after the trailing edge of a document passes Document Sensor 2 (DS2). 1 step 0.03093 x 2 mm Switch 63 steps 32 steps 16 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 00111111 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10111111 Settings +3.9 mm +2.0 mm +1.0 mm 0 -1.0 mm -2.0 mm -3.9 mm
Note: Add these steps to machine parameter 399, when adjusting the steps for transmission with super/hyper fine resolution.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Trailing edge document margin adjustment RADF model (Back page) Fax mode Ultra-fine Resolution Adjusts document feed after the trailing edge of a document passes Document Sensor 2 (DS2). 1 step 0.03093 x 2 mm Switch 63 steps 32 steps 16 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 00111111 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10111111 Settings +3.9 mm +2.0 mm +1.0 mm 0 -1.0 mm -2.0 mm -3.9 mm
3-57

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment Adjusts the leading edge margin from Document Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start of scanning the position. RADF model (Back page) Fax mode Document type: Normal 1 step 0.03093 x 2 mm Switch 63 steps 32 steps 16 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 00111111 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10111111 Settings +3.9 mm +2.0 mm +1.0 mm 0 -1.0 mm -2.0 mm -3.9 mm

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment (ADF) Adjusts the leading edge margin from Document Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start of scanning the position. RADF model (Back page) Fax mode Document type: Fine 1 step 0.03093 x 2 mm Switch 63 steps 32 steps 16 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 00111111 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10111111 Settings +3.9 mm +2.0 mm +1.0 mm 0 -1.0 mm -2.0 mm -3.9 mm
3-58

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment (ADF) Adjusts the leading edge margin from Document Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start of scanning the position. RADF model (Back page) Fax mode Document type: Super Fine / Hyper Fine 1 step 0.03093 x 2 mm Switch 63 steps 32 steps 16 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 00111111 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10111111 Settings +3.9 mm +2.0 mm +1.0 mm 0 -1.0 mm -2.0 mm -3.9 mm
Note: Add these steps to machine parameter 398, when adjusting the steps for transmission with super/hyber fine resolution.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment (ADF) Adjusts the leading edge margin from Document Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start of scanning the position. RADF model (Back page) Fax mode Document type: Ultra Fine (600 dpi) 1 step 0.03093 x 2 mm Switch 63 steps 32 steps 16 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 00111111 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10111111 Settings +3.9 mm +2.0 mm +1.0 mm 0 -1.0 mm -2.0 mm -3.9 mm
Note: Add these steps to machine parameter 398, when adjusting the steps for transmission with ultra fine resolution.
3-59

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Adjustment of the scanner stretching and squeezing for ADF. (Vertical) Copy mode The plus setting squeezes the image data and the minus setting stretches it. Each setting changes by 0.1 Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00111111 : 00011111 : 00001111 : 00001000 : 00000001 01 1 00000000 10000001 0000001 001 1 : 10001000 : 10001111 : 10011111 : 10111111 Settings +6.3 +3.1 +1.5 +0.8 +0.1 0 Standard -0.1 0.1 1 -0.8 -1.5 -3.1 -6.3
Note: Add these steps to machine parameter 383. For fax and scan mode, adjust machine parameter 012.. .
3-60

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment Adjusts the leading edge margin from Document Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start of scanning the position. ADF model Copy mode 1 step 2 / 300 dpi (0.0847 x 2 mm) Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 63 steps 00111111 : 60 steps 00111100 : 50 steps 00110010 : 30 steps 00011110 : 20 steps 00010100 : 10 steps 00001010 : 00000000 : -10 steps 10001010 : -20 steps 10010100 : -30 steps 10011110 : -50 steps 10110010 : -63 steps 10111111 Settings +10.76 mm +10.16 mm +8.47 mm +5.08 mm +3.38 mm +1.69 mm
-1.69 mm -3.38 mm -5.08 mm -8.47 mm -10.76 mm
3-61

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Adjust Trailing edge document margin adjustment (ADF) Adjusts document feed after the trailing edge of a document passes Document Sensor 2 (DS2). ADF model Copy mode 1 step 2 / 300 dpi (0.0847 x 2 mm) Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 63 steps 00111111 : 60 steps 00111100 : 50 steps 00110010 : 30 steps 00011110 : 20 steps 00010100 : 10 steps 00001010 : 00000000 : -10 steps 10001010 : -20 steps 10010100 : -30 steps 10011110 : -50 steps 10110010 : -63 steps 10111111 Settings +10.76 mm +10.16 mm +8.47 mm +5.08 mm +3.38 mm +1.69 mm
-1.69 mm -3.38 mm -5.08 mm -8.47 mm -10.76 mm
Note: These steps are added to the steps set in machine parameter 014. Note: Adjust the steps in 600 dpi copy.
3-62

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Adjustment of the scanning stretching and squeezing for FBS. (Vertical) Copy mode The plus setting squeezes the image data and the minus setting stretches it. Each setting changes by 0.1 Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00001111 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000010 00000001 01 1 00000000 10000001 0000001 01 1 10000010 0000010 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10001111 Settings +1.5 +0.8 +0.4 +0.2 +0.1 0 Initial setting -0.1 -0.2 -0.4 -0.8 -1.5
For fax and scan mode, adjust machine parameter 017.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment For FBS or ADF model Copy and Scann mode Adjusts the leading edge margin after Home Sensor OFF to the start of scanning the position. Each setting changes by 0.140793616 mm. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 31 steps 00011111 1 : 16 steps 00010000 010000 10000 : 8 steps 00001000 001000 1000 : 4 steps 00000100 000100 0100 : 00000000 : -4 steps 10000100 0000100 0100 : -8 steps 10001000 0001000 1000 000 00 : -16 steps 10010000 0010000 10000 0000 00 : -31 steps 10100000 1 0100000 Settings +4.36 mm +2.25 mm +1.13 mm +0.56 mm 5 mm Initial setting -0.56mm 0.56mm -1.13mm 1.13mm -2.25 mm -4.36 mm
Adjust the leading edge document margin for copy mode add this value to machine parameter 018. For fax mode, adjust machine parameter 455. Note: For ADF model, adjust it using the machine parameter 436.
3-63
Machine Parameter 437 and 438

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Lamp check times Usage/Comments This determines how many times to check the lamp before correcting the shading data. When the it is cold and lamp error is easy to occur, check the lamp more times if it ready. The checking time is a total of value of the machine parameter 437 value integral multiple with 256 and the value of machine parameter 438. The initial setting is five times.
3-64

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 Adjust Document skew adjustment ADF model 1 step 1 / 300 dpi (0.0847 mm) Usage/Comments This sets the flexible volume at the separator roller. If the flexible volume is high, the document skew will improve but thin paper may easy jam. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 1001000 : 11101111 : 11111000 Settings +10.75 mm +2.71 mm +1.35 mm +0.68 mm 0 mm -0.68 mm -1.6 mm -10.16 mm
Note: For RADF model, adjust it using the machine parameter 388.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 Adjust Adjusts the start point to scan the document. Fax mode 1 step 5 / 600 dpi (0.2116 mm) Usage/Comments Adjusts the start point to scan the document using the ADF in fax mode. The plus setting makes to start the point backward than the standard point and the minus setting makes the point forward . Switch 25 steps 20 steps 10 steps 5 steps 76543210 00011001 : 00010100 : 00001010 : 00000101 : 00000000 : 10000101 : 10001010 : 10010100 : 10011001 Settings +5.29 mm +4.23 mm +2.12 mm +1.05 mm 0 mm -1.05 mm -2.12 mm -4.23 mm -5.29 mm
Note: For copy mode, adjust machine parameter 010.
3-65

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 Adjust Adjusts the start point to scan the document. Fax mode 1 step 5 / 600 dpi (0.2116 mm) Usage/Comments Adjusts the start point to scan the document using the FBS in fax mode. The plus setting makes to start the point backward than the standard point and the minus setting makes the point forward . Switch 25 steps 20 steps 10 steps 5 steps 76543210 00011001 : 00010100 : 00001010 : 00000101 : 00000000 : 10000101 : 10001010 : 10010100 : 10011001 Settings +5.29 mm +4.23 mm +2.12 mm +1.05 mm 0 mm -1.05 mm -2.12 mm -4.23 mm -5.29 mm
Note: For copy mode, adjust machine parameter 015.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment for FBS or ADF mode Fax mode Adjusts the leading edge margin after Home Sensor OFF to the start of scanning the position. Each setting changes by 0.140793616 mm. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 31 steps 00011111 1 : 16 steps 00010000 010000 10000 : 8 steps 00001000 001000 1000 : 4 steps 00000100 000100 0100 : 00000000 : -4 steps 10000100 0000100 0100 : -8 steps 10001000 0001000 1000 000 00 : -16 steps 10010000 0010000 10000 0000 00 : -31 steps 10100000 1 0100000 Settings +4.36 mm +2.25 mm +1.13 mm +0.56 mm 5 mm -0.56mm 0.56mm -1.13mm 1.13mm -2.25 mm -4.36 mm
For copy and scan mode, adjust machine parameter 018. Note: For RADF model, adjust it using the machine parameter 459.

3-66

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment for FBS or RADF model Copy and Scan mode Adjusts the leading edge margin after Home Sensor OFF to the start of scanning the position. Each setting changes by 0.140793616 mm. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 31 steps 00011111 1 : 16 steps 00010000 010000 10000 : 8 steps 00001000 001000 1000 : 4 steps 00000100 000100 0100 : 00000000 : -4 steps 10000100 0000100 0100 : -8 steps 10001000 0001000 1000 000 00 : -16 steps 10010000 0010000 10000 0000 00 : -31 steps 10100000 1 0100000 Settings +4.36 mm +2.25 mm +1.13 mm +0.56 mm 0 mm -0.56mm 0.56mm -1.13mm 1.13mm -2.25 mm -4.36 mm
For copy mode, add the value of machine parameter 458. For fax mode, adjust machine parameter 459. Note: For ADF model, adjust it using the machine parameter 018.
3-67

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment For FBS or RADF model Copy mode Adjusts the leading edge margin after Home Sensor OFF to the start of scanning the position. Each setting changes by 0.140793616 mm. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 31 steps 00011111 1 : 16 steps 00010000 010000 10000 : 8 steps 00001000 001000 1000 : 4 steps 00000100 000100 0100 : 00000000 : -4 steps 10000100 0000100 0100 : -8 steps 10001000 0001000 1000 000 00 : -16 steps 10010000 0010000 10000 0000 00 : -31 steps 10100000 1 0100000 Settings +4.36 mm +2.25 mm +1.13 mm +0.56 mm 0 mm -0.56mm 0.56mm -1.13mm 1.13mm -2.25 mm -4.36 mm
Adjust the leading edge document margin for copy mode add this value to machine parameter 458. For fax mode, adjust machine parameter 459. Note: For ADF model, adjust it using the machine parameter 436.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment for FBS or RADF model Fax mode Adjusts the leading edge margin after Home Sensor OFF to the start of scanning the position. Each setting changes by 0.140793616 mm. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 31 steps 00011111 1 : 16 steps 00010000 010000 10000 : 8 steps 00001000 001000 1000 : 4 steps 00000100 000100 0100 : 00000000 : -4 steps 10000100 0000100 0100 : -8 steps 10001000 0001000 1000 000 00 : -16 steps 10010000 0010000 10000 0000 00 : -31 steps 10100000 1 0100000 Settings +4.36 mm +2.25 mm +1.13 mm +0.56 mm 0 mm -0.56mm 0.56mm -1.13mm 1.13mm -2.25 mm -4.36 mm
For copy and scan mode, adjust machine parameter 457.
3-68
Machine Parameter 460 ~ 462 Factory use only Machine Parameter 463 ~ 492
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting Adjust White balance adjustment See next page which mode to adjust Switch 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps 4 steps 0 step -4 step -8 step -16step -32step Usage/Comments 76543210 00100000 + Darkest setting : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 Standard : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10100000 -Lightest setting
3-69
White balance adjustment

Mode Copy Document type Text Photo/Text Photo Bachground Scan Text Photo/Text Photo Bachground Text Photo/Text Photo Bachground Text Photo/Text Photo Bachground Fax Normal, Fine, Super-, Hyper-, Ultra-fime Background Grayscale Simlpe binalize 200 dpi 300 dpi 600 dpi Error diffusion Resolution Binalize method 600 dpi Error diffusion Contrast Normal Other than normal Normal Other than normal Normal Other than normal Normal Other than normal Normal Other than normal Normal Other than normal Normal Other than normal Normal Other than normal Normal Other than normal Normal Other than normal Normal Other than normal Normal Other than normal Normal Other than normal Normal Other than normal Normal Other than normal Normal Other than normal All contrasts All contrasts Normal Other than normal Normal Other than normal Normal Other than normal Normal Other than normal Machine parameter 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492
200 dpi 400 dpi 600 dpi 200 dpi
Error diffusion
Dither
See former page how to adjust the parameter.
3-70

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Adjust PCL Personality Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 00000001 00000010 PCL (Initial setting) PCL XL

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust PCL Orientation Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 00000000 00000001 Portrait (Initial setting) Landscape

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Adjust PCL Orientation Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 00000000 00000001 00000010 00000011 00000100 00000101 00000110 00000111 00001000 00001001 00001010 00001101 00001110 00010000 00010001 00010100 Letter Ledger Legal Executive A3 A4 (Initial setting) A5 A6 F4 B4 (JIS) B5 (JIS) Half Letter COM10 DL Postcard Custom
3-71

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust PCL Paper source Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 00000000 00000010 00000011 00000100 00000101 00000110 Auto (Initial setting) Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Bypass tray

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust PCL Default Media Type Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 00000000 00000001 00000010 00000011 Plain (Initial setting) Thick Transparency Envelope/Postcard
3-72
Machine Parameter 508 ~ 509 Default Font Number

Machin parameter 508 Switch 76543210 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010001 01000000 01000001 01000010 01100000 01100000 01100000 01100000 01100010 01110000 01110000 11110000 11110000 01111010 10110000 10110000 00001011 Machin parameter 509 Switch 76543210 00000011 00000101 00000110 00010001 00010100 00010111 00011111 00101100 00110100 01001000 01100101 11001001 00001010 11011010 00101110 00000101 00000011 00000100 00001111 00101111 00000101 01010000 01100010 01010000 01001101 10101010 00101011 00101101 00101110 Courier (Initial setting) CG Times Letter Gothic CG Omega Coronet Nw Cent Schlbk IT CA vant Gard Clarendon Univers Antiq Olive Garamond Marigold Albertus Arial Symbol Times New Rmn Courier PS Helvetica Palation ITC Bookman Times Mincho Gothic P. Mincho P. Gothic Winding Zapf Chancery Zapf Dingbats Symbol PC Usage/Comments
Note: The invalid combination of font number and symbols are on page 3-75.
3-73
Machine Parameter 510 ~ 511 Default Symbol

Machin parameter 510 Switch 76543210 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 Machin parameter 511 Switch 76543210 00000100 00001001 00001110 00010011 00010101 00100101 00100110 00100111 00110101 01001110 01011110 10101101 10101110 10110100 11001010 11001110 11101010 00001101 00010101 00100101 00101010 00110100 00110101 01001010 01010101 01110101 10001010 10010101 11001100 11110101 00110101 01001110 01101011 01101100 01101101 01110101 ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian ISO 15: Italian ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 ISO 11: Swedish ISO 6: ASC ll ISO 4: United Kingdom ISO 69: French ISO 21: German Legal ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 ISO 17: Spanish PS Math ISO 8859/5 Latin 5 Windows 3.1 Latin 5 Microsoft Publishing ISO 8859/6 Latin6 Desk Top Math-8 Roman-8 Windows 3.1 Latin 2 PC-1004 PC-8 TK, Code Page 437T Windows 3.0 Latin 1 Ps Text PC-8 Cord Page 437 (Initial setting) PC-8 D/N, Cord Page 437N Macintosh PC-850 Multilingual HP 4000 ITC Zapf Dingbats PI Font PC-852 Latin 2 ISO 8859/1 Latin1 Windows 3.1j Latin Windows 3.1 Baltic Symbol Windows 3.1 Latin 1 Usage/Comments
Note: The invalid combination of font number and symbols are on page 3-75.
3-74
Invalid combination of font number and symbols

Courier CG Times LetterGothic CG Omega Coronet NwCentSchlbk ITCAvantGard Clarendon Univers AntiqOlive Garamond ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian ISO 15: Italian ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 ISO 11: Swedish ISO 6: ASCII ISO 4: United Kingdom ISO 69: French ISO 21: German Legal ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 ISO 17: Spanish PSMath ISO 8859/5 Latin 5 Windows 3.1 Latin 5 Microsoft Publishing ISO 8859/6 Latin 6 DeskTop Math-8 Roman-8 Windows 3.1 Latin 2 PC-1004 PC-8 TK, Code Page 437T Windows 3.0 Latin 1 PS Text PC-8 Code Page 437 PC-8 D/N, Code Page 437N Macintosh PC-850 Multilingual HP4000 ITC ZapfDingbats PI Font PC-852 Latin 2 ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 Windows 3.1j Latin Windows 3.1 Baltic Symbol Windows 3.1 Latin 1 PC-775 Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Marigold Albertus Arial Symbol TimesNewRmn CourierPS Helvetica Palatino ITCBookman Times Mincho GothicP. MinchoP. Gothic Windings ZapfChancery Zapf Dingbats SymbolPS
Windings
3-75
Machine Parameter 516 ~ 517 PCL X Resolutuion

Machin parameter 516 Switch 76543210 00000001 00000010 Machin parameter 517 Switch 76543210 00101100 01011000 300 dpi 600 dpi (Initial setting) Usage/Comments
Machine Parameter 518 ~ 519 PCL X Resolutuion

Machin parameter 518 Switch 76543210 00000001 00000010 Machin parameter 519 Switch 76543210 00101100 01011000 300 dpi 600 dpi (Initial setting) Usage/Comments
Machine Parameter 520 ~ 521 PCL Time-out period

Machin parameter 520 Switch 76543210 00000000 00000000 00000000 : 00000000 : 00000000 : 00000001 : 00000001 : 00000011 : 11111111 Machin parameter 521 Switch 76543210 00000000 00000001 00000010 : 01100100 : 11001000 : 00101100 : 11110100 : 00100000 : 111111111 Invalid 1 sec 2 sec : 100 sec : 200 sec : 300 sec (Initial setting) : 500 sec : 800 sec : 65535 sec Usage/Comments
Machine Parameter 522 ~ 523 PCL Print copies

Machin parameter 520 Switch 76543210 00000000 00000000 00000000 : 00000011 Machin parameter 521 Switch 76543210 00000000 00000001 00000010 : 11100111 Invalid 1 copy (Initial setting) 2 copies : 999 copies Usage/Comments
3-76
Machine Parameter 524 ~ 525 PCL Time-out period

Machin parameter 524 Machin parameter 525 Switch 76543210 00000000 00000000 00000000 : 00000000 : 00000000 : 00000000 : 00000001 : 00000001 : 11111111 Switch 76543210 00000000 00000001 00000010 : 00001010 : 01100100 : 11001000 : 00101100 : 11110100 : 11111111 Invalid 1 sec 2 sec : 10 sec (Initial setting) : 100 sec : 200 sec : 300 sec : 500 sec : 65535 sec Usage/Comments
3-77
Machine Parameter 532 ~ 533 Characters per inch

Machin parameter 532 Switch 76543210 00000000 : 00000000 00000000 00000000 : 00000000 : 00000000 : 00000000 : 00000011 Machin parameter 533 Switch 76543210 00000000 : 00000011 00000100 00000101 : 01011010 : 01100100 : 01101110 : 11100111 Invalid : Invalid 0.4 characters/inch 0.5 characters/inch : 9.0 characters/inch : 10.0 characters/inch (Initial setting) : 11.0 characters/inch : 99.9 characters/inch Usage/Comments
Machine Parameter 536 ~ 537 PCL Size of Characters

Machin parameter 536 Switch 76543210 00000000 00000000 : 00000000 : 00000000 : 0100111 Machin parameter 537 Switch 76543210 00000000 00000001 : 01100100 : 01111000 : 00001101 Invalid0 1 point: : 10.0 point : 12.0 point (Initial setting) : 999.7 point Usage/Comments
3-78

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust PJL Respose (for AS400) 0: Disable 1: Enable Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only End-Off-Line Text Wrap 0: Enable 1: Disable Usage/Comments
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust PCL Line per page (1 line/page) Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 00000000 00000001 : 00000100 00000101 : 10000000 60 lines (Letter)(Initial setting) Invalid Invalid 5 lines 128 lines

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust PCL Main Paper Source Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 00000000 00000010 00000011 00000110 Cassette 1 (Initial setting) Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Bypass Tray
3-79

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Line Terminate Usage/Comments
Switch 1 0 0 1 0
0 0 1 0 0
CRCR LFLF FFFF CRCR-LF LFLF FFFF CRCR LFCR-LF FFCR-FF CRCR-LF LFCR-LF FFCR-FF
Machine Parameter 547~ 849 Factory use only
3-80

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Loop adjustment Usage/Comments This switch adjust the paper loop at the timing roller. The more loop it is made, the more square the printout becomes. At the same time, thin paper is easy to jam Switch 6543210 0000000 0001000 0010001 0101010 0110010 80 ms 170 ms 340 ms 420 ms 500 ms
When Switch 7 is 1, it means - . For example, 10001000 means -170 ms.
Machine Parameter 851~ 859 Factory use only
3-81
Machine Parameter 860 ~ 879

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Transfer current adjustment 1 step 0.5 A See table below for adjusting paper size and type. Usage/Comments When the all black printed images are light, increase the current. When the half-tone printed images are light or when the images drop out in white spots, decrease the current. Switch 3210 1111 1110 : 1100 1010 : 0110 : 0100 : 0010 0001 0000 7.5 A 7.0 A 6.0 A 5.0 A 3.0 A 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A 0.0 A
When Switch 7 is 1, it means - (minus). For example, 10000100 means -2.0 A.
Adjustment targets Size Type Plain paper (front) Plain paper (back) Machin parameter 860 861 862 863 864 Thick paper Emvelops Machin parameter 875 876 877 878 879
148 mm or smaller 149 ~ 182 mm 183 ~ 216 mm 217 ~ 257 mm 258 ~ 297 mm
Machin parameter Machin parameter 865 870 866 871 867 872 868 873 869 874
3-82

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Copy print density Usage/Comments
Switch 3210 1001 Darkest setting : 0111 : 0101 Initial setting : 0011 : 0001 Lightest setting 0000 Invalid

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Fax received documents print density Usage/Comments

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only PC printout print density Usage/Comments
3-83

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only List printout print density Usage/Comments

Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 0 0 Adjust Fusing temperature Transparency Sheet Switch 76 11 10 01 00 011 010 001 000 101 110 111 Usage/Comments 180 C 175 C 170 C 165 C Initial setting 205 C 200 C 195 C 190 C Initial setting 185 C 180 C 175 C
5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
Fusing temperature Envelop Fusing temperature Postcard
Switch

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Fusing temperature Plain paper Usage/Comments
Switch
210 011 010 001 000 101 110 111
190 C 185 C 180 C 175 C Initial setting 170 C 165 C 160 C
3-84
3.3 Memory Switch Adjustment

3.3.1 Setting the Memory Switches
These switches are used to program internal machine parameters. The primary back up battery maintains these settings if power is lost. 1. From standby, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <1>. 2. Select Mem Switch Edit and press [Enter].
4. Press [Enter].
5. To navigate through the memory switch settings: The bits are ranged from 7 (left) to 0 (right). Press < > or < > of the cursor key to move the cursor. Press <0> or <1> on the numeric keypad, or < > or < >, to change the bit value. Press [Enter] save the setting of the displayed memory switch and return to the memory switch edit screen. Press [Close] not to save the setting of the displayed memory switch. 6. If you want to set other memory switches, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7. 7. Press <Reset> to return the machine to standby. Note: You can confirm the initial setting of each Memory Switch by the Memory Switches List. The memory switch List will be printed by pressing <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <0>.
3.3.2 Clearing the Memory Switches

Resets the memory switches to factory defaults. 1. From standby, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <1>. 2. Select Mem Switch Clear and press [Enter].
3. Press [Yes]. The memory switches will reset to factory defaults. Note: To finish the operation without clearing the switches, press [No]. . 4. Press <Reset> to return the machine to standby. 3-85
Memory Switch 000 Dialer Initial Switch Adjust Setting 7 0 Factory use only 6 0 Factory use only 5 0 CED detection condition 4 0
Usage/Comments
Sets whether the detection should be strict or not. Normal Strict 350ms 500ms 700ms 1000ms 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1
Switch 3 2 1 0 0 1 1 0 DIS detect time after dialing 0: 55 sec 1: 70 sec CED detection 0: No 1: Yes Dial tone detection 0: Do not dial 1: Dial Phone line type for the first phone line 0: PSTN 1: PBX
5 4
Sets the time DIS signal is detected after dialing a number. Can be use to ignore CED detection if noise on the telephone line is mistaken as a 2100 Hz CED signal. Determines if the machine proceeds with dialing or indicates an error if no dial tone is detected within five seconds of going off-hook. When set to PSTN, the machine checks for dial tone and acts according to the setting of memory switch 000, bit 1. When set to PBX, the machine 00, 0, always dials a given number of seconds after going off-hook. Memory switch 001 sets the number of seconds.
3-86
Memory Switch 001 Dialer

Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only DIS detection condition Usage/Comments
Sets whether the detection should be strict or not. Normal Strict 200ms 300ms 400ms 500ms 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1
Switch 3 2 1 0 0 1 0 0 PBX mode dial pause
5 4
Sets the number of seconds the machine waits before dialing when memory switch 000, bit 0 is set 0, , to PBX mode. Switch 3 2 1 0 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Pause time 0 sec 1 sec 2 sec 3 sec 4 sec Initial setting 5 sec 6 sec 7 sec 8 sec 9 sec 10 sec 11 sec 12 sec 13 sec 14 sec 15 sec

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments
Redial in D.0.7 error 0: Yes 1: No
When set to 1, the machine does not redial in D.0.7 error (Incoming detection time over).
Memory Switch 003 Factory use only
3-87

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only DTMF attenuation Usage/Comments
See table below Note: The setting of this switch is available only when setting other than 0.
Memory Switch 004 DTMF attenuation


Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 1 1 0 Adjust Factory use only
Ring signal detect time Set the time that an incoming ring will not be detected after hanging up. (Fax/Tel Ready mode only.) Switch 6 5 4 0 0 0 100 ms 0 0 1 200 ms 0 1 0 300 ms 0 1 1 400 ms 1 0 0 500 ms 1 0 1 600 ms 1 1 0 700 ms 1 1 1 800 ms Select the number of detection time of CI signal in lect the Fax/Tel Ready mode or in the ringer silent mode. ilent . Incoming calls are answered according to this setting regardless of the number of rings chosen in the User Settings.
Usage/Comments
Number of CI signal detection in Fax/Tel Ready mode 0: Detect 1 time 1: Detect 2 times
2 1 0
0 0 1
Dual ring detection 0: No 1: Yes Long ring detection 0: No 1: Yes

Frequency of the CI signal requency detection 0: No 1: Yes
When enabled, the machine is able to auto answer an incoming ring with an off time of 120 - 60 ms. Allows the machine to respond to an incoming ring if the ring on time is longer than two seconds.
When disabled, the unit will not check the frequency of the incoming CI signal.
Memory Switch 006 ~ 009 Factory use only
3-88
Memory Switch 010 Transmission

Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 1 0 Adjust Usage/Comments Busy tone detection Set this switch to 0 if the ring tone of remote unit is 0: No mistaken for a busy signal. 1: Yes Fallback pattern (bps) 2400 4800 7200 9600 12000 14400 Set at 0: 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times Set at 1: 4 times 1 times 1 times 1 times 1 times 1 times Overseas mode Re-enables echo suppression that is disabled by 0: No the CED signal (2100 Hz). Also ignores the first DIS 1: Yes signal and transmits the DCS signal in response to the second DIS signal. V.29 Echo Protect tone International telephone lines equipped with echo 0: No suppression will cut the beginning portion of the 1: Yes transmitted information which may cause the receiver not to receive the training and data. To protect the received image from degrading, a 0.5 second Echo Protect tone is placed prior to the training using G3 high-speed modem training (V.29). Maximum transmit speed (kbps) 2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 12 14.4 16.8 19.2 21.6 24 26.4 28.8 31.2 33.6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
3 2 1 0
1 1 0 1
3-89

Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Usage/Comments The time between reception of CFR and transmission of data When CFR and data overlap due to line echo, increase the interval between CFR and data transmission using this switch. 6 1 250 ms 500 ms 750 ms 1000 ms Switch 7 0 0 1 1 Switch 6 0 1 0 1 Interval between DCS and TCF When FTT is received after DCS and TCF signals due to line echo, increase the interval between DCS and TCF signals using this switch. 4 0 Switch 5 Switch 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 1 0 75 ms 300 ms 450 ms 600 ms 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 See table below
Output attenuation
Memory Switch 011 Output attenuation

3-90

Switch 7 6 5 Initial Setting 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Changing the date format of the transmitted TTI 0: No 1: Yes TTI transmit 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments
When set to 1, the machine changes the date format of the transmitted TTI from MM:DD:YY, or vice versa. When set at 0, transmission of the TTI is disabled. The TTI includes the followings: Sender name Senders fax number s s Data & time, and number of pages To set the individually transmission of them, see Memory SW 016. The time limit to receive the response signal for the ECM post message.
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
(Note: Turning TTI transmission off may violate local or federal regulations.) ECM response time 0: 3 sec 1: 4.8 sec ECM error retransmit time The time limit before the ECM error is retransmitted. 0: 200 ms 1: 400 ms Interval between DIS and DCS Switch 1 Switch 0 0 ms 500 ms 1000 ms 1500 ms 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust ANSam detection 0: Yes 1: No V.34 transmission 0: Yes 1: No CSI/TSI/CIG transmit 0: Yes 1: No ECM mode 0: On 1: Off Retransmit automatically when receiving RTN/PIN signals 0: Yes 1: No Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments During the V8 handshake, if some noise disturbs the handshake and an error occurs, set to 1. Individual setting for V.34 transmission. When set at 1, transmission of the CSI, TSI and CIG signals are disabled. Determines ECM mode. ECM mode reduces document memory and may lengthen transmission and reception times. When set to 1, retransmission disables automatically if receiving RTN/PIN signals.
2 1 0
1 0 0
3-91

Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Program individual autodialer attributes 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Sending RTC signal when transmission is canceled 0: Yes 1: No Cancel redial if T.4.1 or T.4.4 error occurs 0: Yes 1: No Action after EOR signal 0: Continue 1: Discontinue Usage/Comments Allows individual setting of memory switches 010 as attribute 1, 011 as attribute 2, 012 as attribute 3 and 013 as attribute 4 when fax or e-mail destination are registered in the address book. (Refer to page 3-107 for settings.)
6 5 4 3 2
0 0 0 0 0
RTC signal is sent at the end of the transmission. When set at 0, the machine will send the RTC if the transmission is canceled. No error will occur. When set at 1, an error will occur because RTC will not be sent at the end of a canceled transmission. When set at 0, if a T.4.1 or T.4.4 error occurs, the machine will not retry the transmission. Sets action after receiving PPR four times at 2400 bps.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Additional data on TTI transmit 0: No 1: Yes Subscriber ID transmit 0: No 1: Yes TTI (name) transmit 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Usage/Comments
When set at 0, the transmission of the additional data (time, the number of pages, file number, etc) is disabled. Note: This switch is available only when Memory switch 012, bit 4 and/or Memory switch 013, bit 5 is available. When set at 0, the transmission of the subscriber ID is disabled. Note: This switch is available only when Memory switch 012, bit 4 and/or Memory switch 013, bit 5 is available. When set at 0, the transmission of the name that is stored in the unit is disabled. Note: This switch is available only when Memory switch 012, bit 4 and/or Memory switch 013, bit 5 is available.
3-92

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Check only manually entered fax numbers in ID check transmission 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments
When set at 1, the ID check transmission will check only the manually entered fax numbers and not check the numbers entered using the address book.
3-93
Memory Switch 020 Reception

Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 0 0 Adjust Data error rate 0: 10 1: 20 Pause one second after sending CED 0: No (75 ms) 1: Yes (1 sec) Usage/Comments Determines the allowable number of erred lines out of total lines received in a document. A 2100 Hz CED signal disables echo suppression in some telephone equipment. When set to 1, the machine pauses one second after sending CED, which allows echo suppression to restart. This may help with problematic overseas reception.
5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 1 1 0 1
Factory use only Factory use only Receive speed (kbps) Maximum receive speed may be slowed to compensate for poor phone lines. 2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 12 14.4 16.8 19.2 21.6 24 26.4 28.8 31.2 33.6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 Adjust Not used DIS inch declaration 0: No 1: Yes Not used T1 timer 0: 35 sec 1: 20 sec Print image data when post message is not received after receiving RTC signal 0: No 1: Yes DIS/DTC Extend field Transmit 0: Yes 1: NoTx until Bit No.24 of DIS/DTC G3 echo receive Usage/Comments
Adjusts the T1 time-out. After the machine dials the remote machines phone number, it begins sending CNG and waits this amount of time before disconnecting the line. If the received document includes the RTC, the machine prints the data even though the following protocol is not succeeded. Setting this switch to 1 will disable ITU-T superfine mode.
1 0
0 1
Adjusts the delay between detection of training/TCF and sending of CFR. Switch 1 Switch 0 100 ms 500 ms 800 ms 1200 ms 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1
3-94

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only V.34 reception 0: Yes 1: No Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Calling period in Fax/Tel reception mode Usage/Comments Individual setting for V.34 reception.
Defines the callign period in Fax/Tel reception mode Switch 2 1 0 000 30 seconds Inital setting 001 40 seconds 010 50 seconds 011 60 seconds 100 90 seconds 101 120 seconds 110 180 seconds 111 300 seconds
Memory Switch 030 Modem

Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 0 1 0 Adjust Number of HDLC end flags Usage/Comments Defines the number of HDLC end flags. Switch 7 6 5 4 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Factory use only Factory use only Digital cable equalizer 0: Free 1: Hold No use 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Initial setting
3 2 1
0 0 0
When set to 1, become efficient for the line short break, but become weak for the line noise. It s available only for communication at 14,400 or 12,000 bit/s.
3-95

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 Adjust EYE-Q check level at 7200 bps EYE-Q check level at 9600 bps EYE-Q check level at 12000 bps EYE-Q check level at 14400 bps Usage/Comments 0 0 1 1 Strict-- - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 Strict - - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 Strict - - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 Strict - - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient 0 1 0 1

Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 1 1 Adjust EYE-Q slice level 0: Disable 1: Enable Check EYE-Q 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only EYE-Q check level at 2400 bps EYE-Q check level at 4800 bps Usage/Comments Setting this bit to 1 enables memory switch 032, bits 0-3 and memory switch 031, bits 0-7 and enables EYE-Q check adjustment. Set at 0: Line condition status (EYE-Q) is not checked after checking TCF. Set at 1: Line condition status (EYE-Q) is checked after checking TCF.
5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 1 0 1 0
0 0 1 1 Strict - - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 Strict - - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient 0 1 0 1
3-96

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Delete receive echo of CFR at the receiver side 0: No 1: Yes Expand FSK receive time after detecting flag 0: 3.3 seconds 1: 10 seconds Usage/Comments
Modem will be opened only in high-speed mode. Sets this switch to 1 to resolve the problem caused of the echo of CFR. Setting this switch to 1 extend HDLC frame receive timer in FSK from 3.3 seconds to 10 seconds after detecting pre-amble.
3-97
Memory Switch 040 Scanner

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Document length limit Usage/Comments
2 1 0
1 0 1
Setting to unlimited will override document jam sensing. See the table below. ADF model (mm) RADF model (mm) 650 650 1,000 1,000 2000 3600 500 6,50 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 650 650 1,000 1,000 2,000 3,600 500 650 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000
Memory Switch 40 -0 0
Mode COPY FAX SCAN
Ultra-fine Hyper-fine Super-fine Fine Normal Ultra-fine Hyper-fine Super-fine Fine Normal
COPY FAX SCAN
Memory Switch 041 ~ 059 Factory use only Memory Switch 060 Remote reception
Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 0 1 Adjust Factory use only CML relay off time after dialing 0: 1 sec 1: 200 ms DTMF tones heard through handset 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Remote reception from fax handset 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments When dialing from the keypad, phone line noise may occur as the CML relay switches on and off. Set this switch to 0 to avoid this. Determines if DTMF tones are produced through the handset in off-hook dialing.
4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0
When this switch is set to 0, fax-calls answered manually using the handset is available to receive by pressing <Start>.
3-98
Memory Switch 061 Remote reception

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Off-hook / on-hook detect time Usage/Comments
Sets the time interval between the on-hook and offhook (or off-hook/on-hook) condition. Switch 3 2 1 0 Time 0000 0 ms 0001 100 ms 0010 200 ms 0011 300 ms 0100 400 ms Initial setting 0101 500 ms 0110 600 ms 0111 700 ms 1000 800 ms 1001 900 ms 1 0 1 0 1000 ms 1 0 1 1 1100 ms 1 1 0 0 1200 ms 1 1 0 1 1300 ms 1 1 1 0 1400 ms 1 1 1 1 1500 ms
3-99

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only CNG detect in Ans/Fax ready 0: No 1: Yes Switch-hook time Usage/Comments
When set to 1, the machine detects the CNG signal in Ans/Fax ready. If the switch hook is quickly depressed and released, switch-to-fax will occur. This setting adjusts how quickly the switch hook activation must be. Switch 3 2 1 0 Time 0000 0 ms 0001 100 ms 0010 200 ms 0011 300 ms Initial setting 0100 400 ms 0101 500 ms 0110 600 ms 0111 700 ms 1000 800 ms 1001 900 ms 1 0 1 0 1000 ms 1 0 1 1 1100 ms 1 1 0 0 1200 ms 1 1 0 1 1300 ms 1 1 1 0 1400 ms 1 1 1 1 1500 ms
3-100
Memory Switch 064 Remote reception and TAD interface

Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust CNG detect period after TAD begins recording ICM Usage/Comments Sets the period during which CNG is detected after the TAD begins recording incoming message. Switch 7 6 5 4 Time 0000 0 sec 0001 10 sec 0010 20 sec 0011 30 sec Initial setting 0100 40 sec 0101 50 sec 0110 60 sec 0111 70 sec 1000 80 sec 1001 90 sec 1 0 1 0 100 sec 1 0 1 1 110 sec 1 1 0 0 120 sec 1 1 0 1 130 sec 1 1 1 0 140 sec 1 1 1 1 150 sec Sets the period during which CNG is detected after the TAD answers an incoming call. Switch 3 2 1 0 Time 0000 0 sec 0001 10 sec Initial setting 0010 20 sec 0011 30 sec 0100 40 sec 0101 50 sec 0110 60 sec 0111 70 sec 1000 80 sec 1001 90 sec 1 0 1 0 100 sec 1 0 1 1 110 sec 1 1 0 0 120 sec 1 1 0 1 130 sec 1 1 1 0 140 sec 1 1 1 1 150 sec
CNG detect period after TAD answers
Eingehende Anrufe
TAD zeigt ausgehende Meldung an
TAD zeichnet eingehende Meldung auf CNG-Erkennung ist aktiv

(eingestellt durch Speicherschalter 64, Bit 4-7)
CNG-Erkennung ist aktiv

(eingestellt durch Speicherschalter 64, Bit 0-3)
3-101

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Adjustment of CI detect time Usage/Comments Sets the time added to or reduced from the CI detect time. Switch 7 6 5 4 3 11111 11101 : 01001 00111 00101 00011 00000 00010 00100 00110 01000 : 11100 11110 Factory use only Factory use only Beep if fax handset hang up 0: Yes 1: No Time 150 msec 140 msec : 40 msec 30 msec 20 msec 10 msec 0 msec -10 msec -20 msec -30 msec -40 msec : -140 msec -150 msec
Initial setting
2 1 0
0 0 0
Determines if your machine beeps when having left the faxs handset hanging up after communication.
3-102
Memory Switch 070 Operation

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 1 Adjust Display error line 0: No 1: Yes Tonal line monitor 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Sort autodialer printout 0: Sort by autodialer location 1: Sort by location ID Print check message if power is lost 0: No 1: Yes Print page if error occurs during memory transmission 0: No 1: Yes Print check message 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Usage/Comments The number of error lines contained in the received data will be shown in the LCD. Allows fax communication to be heard through the monitor speaker.
Specifies how entries on autodialer printouts are sorted. In the event of two power losses in a 40-hour period, documents will be lost. When power is restored, a check message will print. For easy identification, the first page of a document stored for memory transmission will print along a check message if an error occurs during memory transmission. To notify the user of an error, a check message can be printed if a communication error occurs.
1 0
1 0
3-103

Switch 7 6 5 Initial Setting 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Print TCR with the original page during memory transmission when the result is NG 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Print TCR with the original page during memory transmission when the result is OK 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Display modem speed 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments
For easy identification, the first page of a document stored for memory transmission will print along a TCR when the transmission result is NG.
4 3
0 1
For easy identification, the first page of a document stored for memory transmission will print along a TCR when the transmission result is OK.
2 1 0
0 0 0
The transmit/receive speed is displayed in the LCD.
Memory switch071 Print TCR with the original page Switch 3 Switch 5 When Memory transmission was OK, When Memory transmission was NG, When all broadcast transmissions were OK, When some broadcast transmissions were NG,
0 0 No No No No 1 No Yes No Yes 0 Yes No Yes No
1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Erase polled document 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Usage/Comments
Determines if a document stored for polling is erased after being polled.
Memory Switch 077 ~ 096 --- Factory use only
3-104
Memory Switch 097 --- Other functions

Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 0 1 1 Adjust Day light saving time (Summer time) start month Usage/Comments This switch sets the month when the day light saving time (summer time) begins. Switch 7 6 5 4 Time 0000 March 0001 January 0010 February 0011 March Initial setting 0100 April 0101 May 0110 June 0111 July 1000 August 1001 September 1010 October 1011 November 1011 December This switch sets the month when the day light saving time (summer time) begins. Switch 3 2 1 0 Time 0 0 0 0 Sunday 1:00 of the last week 0 0 0 1 Sunday 1:00 of the first week 0 0 1 0 Sunday 1:00 of the second week 0 0 1 1 Sunday 1:00 of the third week 0 1 0 0 Sunday 1:00 of the fourth week 0 1 0 1 Sunday 1:00 of the last week of the month Initial setting
Day light saving time (Summer time) start week
2 1 0
1 0 1
3-105
Memory Switch 098 --- Other functions

Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 1 0 1 0 Adjust Day light saving time (Summer time) end month Usage/Comments This switch sets the month when the day light saving time (summer time) ends. Switch 7 6 5 4 Time 0000 October 0001 January 0010 February 0011 March 0100 April 0101 May 0110 June 0111 July 1000 August 1001 September 1010 October Initial setting 1011 November 1011 December This switch sets the month when the day light saving time (summer time) ends. Switch 3 2 1 0 Time 0 0 0 0 Sunday 1:00 of the last week 0 0 0 1 Sunday 1:00 of the first week 0 0 1 0 Sunday 1:00 of the second week 0 0 1 1 Sunday 1:00 of the third week 0 1 0 0 Sunday 1:00 of the fourth week 0 1 0 1 Sunday 1:00 of the last week of the month Initial setting
Day light saving time (Summer time) end week
2 1 0
1 0 1
Memory Switch 099 --- Factory use only
3-106
3.4 Setting Individual Autodialer Attributes

This function allows the user to configure an individual address book entry with the settings shown in Memory Switches 010, 011, 012 and 013.
To set the individual attributes:

1. Change memory switch 015, bit 7 to 1. (See setting 3.3.1 Setting the Memory Switches for more information on changing the switch.) 2. When the function is enabled, an Attribute option is added to the speed dial registration steps. The extra steps showing Attribute 1, Attribute 2, Attribute 3, and Attribute 4 are added as the last step.
3. Set the individual bit positions as shown in the following table. To change a setting, press < > or < > until the cursor is below the desired bit position then press 1 or 0 to make the change. 4. Press [Enter] to save the setting of the displayed attribute and advance to the next attribute. 5. To set the other attribute, repeat steps 3 and 4. 6. To finish the registration, press [Close].
3-107
Attribute 1 - Individual Autodialer Setting (Equivalent to Memory Switch 010)

Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 1 0 Adjust Usage/Comments Busy tone detection Sets this switch to 0 if the ring tone of remote unit 0: No is mistaken for a busy signal. 1: Yes Fallback pattern (bps) 2400 4800 7200 9600 14400 Set at 0: 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times Set at 1: 4 times 1 times 1 times 1 times 1 times Overseas mode Re-enables echo suppression that is disabled by 0: No the CED signal (2100 Hz). Also ignores the first DIS 1: Yes signal and transmits the DCS signal in response to the second DIS signal. V.29 Echo Protect tone International telephone lines equipped with echo 0: No suppression will cut the beginning portion of the 1: Yes transmitted information which may cause the receiver not to receive the training and data. To protect the received image from degrading, a 0.5 second Echo Protect tone is placed prior to the training using G3 high-speed modem training (V.29). Maximum transmit speed (kbps) 2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 12 14.4 16.8 19.2 21.6 24 26.4 28.8 31.2 33.6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
3 2 1 0
1 1 0 1
3-108

Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Usage/Comments The time between reception of CFR and transmission of data When CFR and data overlap due to line echo, increase the interval between CFR and data transmission using this switch. 6 1 250 ms 500 ms 750 ms 1000 ms Switch 7 0 0 1 1 Switch 6 0 1 0 1 Interval between DCS and TCF When FTT is received after DCS and TCF signals due to line echo, increase the interval between DCS and TCF signals using this switch. 4 0 Switch 5 Switch 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 1 0 75 ms 300 ms 450 ms 600 ms 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 See table below. .
Output attenuation
Output attenuation when individual autodialer attributes are set.

3-109

Switch 7 6 5 Initial Setting 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Changing the date format of the transmitted TTI 0: No 1: Yes TTI transmit 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments
When set to 1, the machine changes the date format of the transmitted TTI from MM: DD: YY, or vice versa. When set at 0, transmission of the TTI is disabled. The TTI includes the followings: Sender name Senders fax number s s Data & time, and number of pages To set the individually transmission of them, see Memory SW 016. The time limit to receive the response signal for the ECM post message.
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
(Note: Turning TTI transmission off may violate local or federal regulations.) ECM response time 0: 3 sec 1: 4.8 sec ECM error retransmit time The time limit before the ECM error is retransmitted. 0: 200 ms 1: 400 ms Interval between DIS and DCS Switch 1 Switch 0 0 ms 500 ms 1000 ms 1500 ms 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1
3-110

Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust ANSam detection 0: Yes 1: No V.34 transmission 0: Yes 1: No Factory use only ECM mode 0: On 1: Off Retransmit automatically when receiving RTN/PIN signals 0: Yes 1: No Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments During the V8 handshake, if some noise disturbs the handshake and an error occurs, set to 1. Individual setting for V.34 transmission.
5 4 3
0 0 0
Determines ECM mode. ECM mode reduces document memory and may lengthen transmission and reception times. When set to 1, retransmission disables automatically if receiving RTN/PIN signals.
2 1 0
1 0 0
3-111
3.5 Unique Switch Adjustment

3.5.1 Setting the Unique Switches
These switches are used to program internal machine parameters. The primary back up battery maintains these settings if power is lost. 1. From standby, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <4>. 2. Select Switch Edit and press [Enter].
4. Press [Enter].
5. Select the desired switch by pressing the box.5. To navigate through the unique switch settings: The bits are ranged from 7 (left) to 0 (right). Press < > or < > of the cursor key to move the cursor. Press <0> or <1> on the numeric keypad, or < > or < >, to change the bit value. Press [Enter] to save the setting of the displayed unique switch and return to the unique switch edit screen. Press [Close] not to save the setting of the displayed unique switch. 6. If you want to set other unique switches, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7. 7. Press <Reset>to return the machine to standby.
3.5.2 Clearing the Unique Switches

Resets the unique switches to factory defaults. 1. From standby, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <4>. 2. Select Switch Clear and press [Enter].
3. Press [Yes].The unique switches will reset to factory defaults. Note: To finish the operation without clearing the switches, press [No]. 4. Press <Reset> o return the machine to standby.
3-112
Unique Switch 000 Dialer

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Congestion tone detection 0: No 1: Yes Ring back tone wait time (seconds) 3.0 3.3 3.6 3.9 Switch 5: 0 0 1 1 Switch 4: 0 1 0 1 Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments Setting this switch to 0 ignores telephone line congestion tones. Sets the time until the ring back tone begins after answering an incoming call in the Fax/Tel Ready or Tel/Fax Ready mode.
Unique Switch 001 Dialer

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Enable the 1st tone key 0: No 1: Yes Enable the 2nd tone key 0: No 1: Yes Enable the dial prefix key 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Usage/Comments
Unique Switch 002 Factory use only Unique Switch 003 Dialer
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only The period before detecting busytone after dialing Usage/Comments
Switch 3 2 1 0 1111 1110 1000 0111 0110 0101 0100 0011 0010 0001 0000
Time 1500 ms 1400 ms 800 ms 700 ms 600 ms 500 ms 400 ms (Initial setting) 300 ms 200 ms 100 ms 0 ms
Unique Switch 004 ~ 009 Factory use only

3-113
Unique Switch 010 Transmission

Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 1 0 1 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only TTI reduction in normal mode 0: No 1: Yes TTI reduction in fine and superfine mode 0: No 1: Yes Including TTI inside the document 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments
Determine whether to transmit the TTI information reduced 50 in vertical direction. Determine whether to transmit the TTI information reduced 50 in vertical direction. Setting this switch to 0 transmit the document length added with the TTI. Setting it to 1 transmit the length including TTI inside the document. However in this case, the image at the top of the document might be overlapped with TTI. (TTI length: 4.2 mm)
2 1 0
0 1 1
Factory use only The number of times PPR is detected during ECM transmission 1 time 2 times 3 times 4 times 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1
3-114

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 Adjust Factory use only Send result to the sender in relayed reception 0: No 1: Yes Not used Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only V.8 handshake in real time Tx 0: No 1: Yes Note: This setting takes effect only when Unique Switch 016 -2 is set to 1. Determine whether to send the result of reception to the sender in relayed reception and F-code relay reception. Usage/Comments
Determine whether the to do handshaking with V.8 recommendation if real time transmission.

Switch 7 Initial Setting 1 Adjust Available *, # and space upon F-code box registration 0: No 1: Yes Available *, # and space upon F-code communicating 0: No 1: Yes Ignore space in F-code ID 0: Yes 1: No F-code sub-frame off 0: Send 1: Not send Send F-code boxs TTI 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Retrieve document 0: No 1: Yes Ignore F-code bit 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments Determines if the * (asterisk), # (sharp) and space are available upon F-code box registration. Determines if the * (asterisk), # (sharp) and space are available upon F-code communicating. Determines if checking the space stored in the F-code ID. Do not send the sub-address and password of F-code box when a point of sending DCS signal after EOM signal. Transmit the sub-address and box name of F-code box with F-code polling document.
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 1 0 0 0 1
Retrieve the document received in F-code SecureMail box by polling transmission. Neglect SEP bit of DTC signal or SUB bit of DCS signal at F-code polled transmission.
Note: The F-code communication is possible the SecureMail and Polling operation using the F-code (SUB/SEP/PWD/SID). However, it is not based on T.33 recommendation.
3-115

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only JBIG transmission 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Usage/Comments
Determines if the JBIG transmission is available.

Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 0 1 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Disconnect the line when the transmission speed falls down under 7200 bps 0: No 1: Yes Disconnect the line when the transmission speed falls down under 4800 bps 0: No 1: Yes Not used Not used Transmission when disable to detect first NSF in real time transmission. 0: Retry to detect NSF 1: Transmit with the standard protocol Usage/Comments
Determine if the machine disconnect the phone line when the transmission speed fall down under 7200 bps. Determine if the machine disconnect the phone line when the transmission speed fall down under 4800 bps.
2 1 0
0 0 0
Determines the action when disable to detect first NSF in real time transmission.
Unique Switch 019 Factory use only
3-116
Unique Switch 020 Reception

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Initial Setting 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only No use Transmit CED signal 0: No 1: Yes Pseudo-ring start time (seconds) 5 6 8 10 Switch 3: 0 0 1 1 Switch 2: 0 1 0 1 Printout the pages completed to receive during receiving into memory 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Usage/Comments
Determines if sending CED signal. Sets the time the pseudo-ring begins after answering an incoming call. (Fax/Tel Ready or Tel/Fax Ready mode only.)
Determines if whether to printout the page which data is completed to receive during receiving it into faxs memory.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Initial Setting 0 1 1 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only TCF check time (in 100 ms units) Usage/Comments
If the TCF time is such that poor image quality is the result, lengthen the TCF check time. Switch 3 2 1 0 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Time 0 ms 100 ms 200 ms 300 ms 400 ms 500 ms 600 ms 700 ms 800 ms Initial setting 900 ms 1000 ms 1100 ms 1200 ms 1300 ms 1400 ms 1500 ms
3-117

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 Initial Setting 0 1 1 0 1 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only JBIG reception 0: No 1: Yes Receive the junk fax 0: Yes 1: No Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments
Determines how documents from the remote fax are received. When the block junk fax feature is set to Mode 2 and the fax does not receive the TSI signal from the remote fax, determine if receiving the fax other than the remote fax number set to the block junk dial list.
1 0
0 0

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 Initial Setting 0 0 1 1 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Not used Receiving fax in 600 dpi (S-fine) 0: No : 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments
Sets whether to receive fax in 600 dpi.
1 0
0 0
3-118
Unique Switch 030 Modem

Switch 7 6 5 Initial Setting 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only 3429 baud symbol rate when communicating at V.34 0: No 1: Yes 3200 baud symbol rate when communicating at V.34 0: No 1: Yes 3000 baud symbol rate when communicating at V.34 0: No 1: Yes 2800 baud symbol rate when communicating at V.34 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only 2400 baud symbol rate when communicating at V.34 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments
If the error frame often occurs because of the symbol rate is too high, setting this switch to 1 mask that symbol rate and keep down the occurrence of error frame.
1 0
0 1
See above (switch 5 to 2).
Unique Switch 031 Factory use only Unique Switch 032 Modem
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only ANSam output time 0: 3 sec 1: 4 sec Factory use only Usage/Comments
The time limit to output the ANSam (A sinewave signal at 2100 Hz amplitude-modulated). Sets to 1 when the V.8 handshake is hard to achieve.
3-119
Unique Switch 040 Scanner

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 Adjust Factiory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Resolution in Photo mode transmission 0: Superfine 1: Hyperfine Usage/Comments
Superfine: 8x15.4dot/mm Hyperfine: 16x15.4dot/mm

Switch 7 Initial Setting 1 Adjust Set the fixed ratio for copy and the auto ratio in detail 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Rotate and store in memory 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments When set to 1, the ratio will be calculated in detail automatically according to the document size and the recording paper size.
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1
Note:This setting takes effect only when the totate reception is activated. Rotate an A4 and store it as A4 document in memory.
Unique Switch 042 Factory use only Unique Switch 043 Scanner
Switch 7 6 5 Initial Setting 0 0 0 Adjust Confirmation stamp stamping time Adjustment Usage/Comments Adjust the time length to stamp. Switch 7 6 5 111 110 101 100 010 001 000 Time 700 ms 600 ms 500 ms 400 ms 200 ms 100 ms 300 ms (Initial setting)
4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0
Scanner heater 0: On 1: Off Stop scanning by each page 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only
The optional scanner heater turns on / off. Turn this switch on, when document jam occurs frequently in time-consuming scanning such as enlarge scanning.
3-120

Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 0 0 Adjust Black spots measures for Tx documents with ground color Usage/Comments Adjust this switch when black spots are printed on Tx documents with ground color (normal resolution). Switch 7 6 Settings 0 0 Normal 0 1 Measures (Half tone priority) 1 0 Measures (Ruled lines priority)
5 4 3 2 1
0 0 0 0 0
Factory use only Factory use only Motor stopping period for Confirmation stamp
This determines the period from ADF motor stop to stamping the confirmation stamp. Switch 3 2 1 Settings 111 700 ms 110 600 ms 101 500 ms 100 400 ms 011 300 ms 010 200 ms 001 100 ms 000 0 ms
Factory use only
Unique Switch 045 Factory use only Unique Switch 046 Scanner
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Left side edge document margin adjustment Each setting changes by 0.4233 mm. Left side means the side of the scanning position. Usage/Comments
Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0 111111 : 111100 : 110010 : 101000 : 011110 : 010101 : 000101 : 000001 000000
Settings 26.67 mm 25.40 mm 21.17 mm 16.93 mm 12.70 mm 8.47 mm 4.23 mm 0.42 mm 0.0 mm
3-121

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Right side edge document margin adjustment Each setting changes by 0.4233 mm. Right side means the opposite side of the scanning position. Usage/Comments
Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0 111111 : 111100 : 110010 : 101000 : 011110 : 010101 : 000101 : 000001 000000
Settings 26.67 mm 25.40 mm 21.17 mm 16.93 mm 12.70 mm 8.47 mm 4.23 mm 0.42 mm 0.0 mm
3-122

Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Receive the call then machine cannot print 0: Yes 1: No Factory use only Leading edge document margin adjustment upon scanning using FBS. . Adjusts the leading edge margin when scanning document by FBS. Each setting changes by 1 mm. Usage/Comments When this switch is set to 1, out-of paper reception function is not available.
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0 000000 000001 000010 000011 000100 000101 000110 000111 001000 001001 001010 001011 001100 001101 001110 001111 010000 010001 010010 010011 010100 010101 010110 010111 011000 011001 : 111111
Settings 0 mm 1 mm 2 mm 3 mm 4 mm 5 mm 6 mm 7 mm 8 mm 9 mm 10 mm 11 mm 12 mm 13 mm 14 mm 15 mm 16 mm 17 mm 18 mm 19 mm 20 mm 21 mm 22 mm 23 mm 24 mm 25 mm 63 mm
3-123

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Trailing edge document margin adjustment upon scanning using FBS Adjusts the trailing edge margin when scanning document by FBS. Each setting changes by 1 mm. Usage/Comments
Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0 000000 000001 000010 000011 000100 000101 000110 000111 001000 001001 001010 001011 001100 001101 001110 001111 010000 010001 010010 010011 010100 010101 010110 010111 011000 011001 : : 111111
Settings 0 mm 1 mm 2 mm 3 mm 4 mm 5 mm 6 mm 7 mm 8 mm 9 mm 10 mm 11 mm 12 mm 13 mm 14 mm 15 mm 16 mm 17 mm 18 mm 19 mm 20 mm 21 mm 22 mm 23 mm 24 mm 25 mm 63 mm
3-124
Unique Switch 050 Printer

Switch 7 6 5 Initial Setting 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Smoothing in list printing 0: No 1: Yes Smoothing S-Fine mode (200 x 400 dpi) mode Rotate reception 0: No 1: Yes Smoothing in Normal mode Rotate reception 0: No 1: Yes Smoothing in H-Fine (400 x 400 dpi) mode 0: No 1: Yes Smoothing in S-Fine (200 x 400 dpi) mode 0: No 1: Yes Smoothing in Fine mode 0: No 1: Yes Smoothing in Normal mode 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments Smooths the data scanned in each resolution mode.
1 0
0 1

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Reduce print 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments
If the received fax is larger than the paper in the cassettes, setting this switch to 1 means the document will be printed on one page by reduction.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Printing margin adjustment 0: Normal 1: No margin Usage/Comments
3-125

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Adjust Printer density adjustment. Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 00000000 00000001 00000010 00000011 00000100 00000011 00000110 00001001 00001011 : Settings Not available Lightest : : Normal Initial setting : Darkest Not available
Unique Switch 054 ~ 056 Factory use only Unique Switch 057 Remote reception
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Paper selection priority 0: Less margin 1: Same paper width Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments
e.g. B5 size is received: 0 will print them on to A4 papers 1 will print them on to B4 papers
Unique Switch 058 Remote reception

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 Adjust Printable pages after Replace Toner has appeared Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 11111111 : 11001000 : 10010110 : 01100100 : 00110010 : 00000001 00000000 Toner 255 pages 200 pages 150 pages 100 pages 50 pages 1 page 0 page
3-126
Unique Switch 060 ~ 065 Factory use only Unique Switch 066 Remote reception and TAD interface
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Display the error message, Systemstatus instabil Strom aus- und ein. 0: Yes 1: No Usage/Comments
If this is set to 0, the machine does not display the error message, after it has recovered from a DAA NCU error.
Unique Switch 067 Remote reception and TAD interface

Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Start detecting the busy tone before pseudo-ring ringing starts 0: No 1: Yes Detect busy tone during pseudo-ring ringing 0: No 1: Yes No use CNG detection during OGM output in ANS Ready 0: Yes 1: No Number of detection DTMF Usage/Comments
5 4
0 0
Sets the number of detection the DTMF during Ans/Fax Ready mode. Switch 3 2 1 0 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1111 Number of detection Not detect 1 2 3 Initial setting 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15
Unique Switch 068 --- Factory use only
3-127
Unique Switch 069 Remote reception

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Initial Setting 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 Adjust The line voltage that TEL1 and TEL2 are regarded as off-hooked. Usage/Comments Switch 7654321 1111111 : 1100100 : 1010000 : 1 10010 : 0011110 : 0010100 : 0001010 : 0000101 : 0000010 0000001 0000000 Settings 127 volt 100 volt 80 volt 50 volt 30 volt 20 volt 10 volt 5 volt 2 volt 1 volt 0 volt
Fixing the service report fax number 0: No (able to edit) 1: Yes (unable to edit)
When set to 1, the fax number entered in service report setting Location 1 will be unable to edit by the user.
3-128
Unique Switch 070 Operation

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only LCD error message 0: Remains in LCD 1: Returns to standby Buzzer/keypad volume Factory use only Standby mode priority 0: Copy 1: Fax Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments After an error message has printed, the setting of this switch determines if the error message will remain in the display. Switch OFF Low Medium Maximum 5 0 0 1 1 4 0 1 0 1

Switch 7 Initial Setting 1 Adjust Line monitor in Quick memory transmission 0: Off 1: On Switch LCD language 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Rx document to polling document 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Usage/Comments
6 5 4 3 2 1
0 1 0 0 0 0
If this switch is set to on, the LCD language is available to switch from Chinese to English and Japanese, by pressing <Menu> and <#>.
Retrieve the document received in the memory by polling transmission.
3-129

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Initial Setting 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Send service report 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Transmit consumable order sheet 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments
If this switch is set to 1, the machine will transmit the consumable order sheet automatically when the drum cartridge is near end of its design life or the toner cartridge is near empty. Note: For this feature to work correctly, you must register several items. See 3.16 Consumable order sheet page 3-161.

Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Print consumable order sheet 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments If this switch is set to 1, the machine will print the consumable order sheet automatically when the drum cartridge is near end of its design life or the toner cartridge is near empty. Note: For this feature to work correctly, you must register several items. See 3.16 Consumable order sheet page 3-161. 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only
3-130

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Priority of consumable order sheet printing 0: Print after the current printing job is completed 1: Print immediately Print the transmission time on TCR 0: Print the transmit time 1: Blank When receive a fax message during Auto power off mode, the LCD will be in standby mode 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments
When the drum cartridge has reached its design life, or the toner cartridge is empty, the machine prints a consumable order sheet. When this switch is set at 0, the machine will not print consumable order sheet until the current printing job is finished. When set to 0, the transmission time will be printed on TCR.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Journal list printing order 0: From old history 1: From new history Period to press the <Energy Save> to go to sleep mode Usage/Comments
Switch 2 1 0 111 110 101 100 011 010 001
Time 7 seconds 6 seconds 5 seconds 4 seconds 3 seconds 2 seconds 1 second
3-131

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 1 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Double count up the scan counter for A3 0: No 1: Yes Double count up the print counter for A3 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Usage/Comments
If this is set to 1, the machine counts 2 pages for one A3 size document scanning. If this is set to 1, the machine counts 2 pages for one A3 size document printing.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 Initial Setting 0 1 1 1 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only The maximum enlarge ratio in RADF scan 0: 200 1: 400 Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments
If this is set to 1, the maximum scanning magnification of MFX-2325 and MFX-2725 will be 400.
1 0
0 0
3-132
Unique Switch 080 ~ 083 Factory use only Unique Switch 084 Miscellaneous
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Does not send the consumable order sheet in toner near empty condition. Usage/Comments The value set with this switch (printed pages) will be compared with the value counted up in life monitor (printed pages after the toner is replaced). If this value is larger than the value in life monitor when the machine goes to toner near empty condition, the installed toner is not considered as new toner and the consumable order sheet will not be printed. Switch 76543210 11111111 : 01100100 : 0110010 : 00010100 : 00001010 : 00000101 : 00000010 00000001 00000000 Settings 12750 pages 5000 pages 2500 pages 1000 pages 500 pages 250 pages (initial setting) 100 pages 50 pages 0
3-133
Unique Switch 085 Miscellaneous

Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Print/Send the consumable order sheet when the drum is near end 0: Yes 1: No Print/Send the consumable order sheet when toner is near empty 0: Yes 1: No Print the receive time stamp within the document 0: No 1: Yes Next doc default setting when scanning with ADF 0: No 1: Yes Next doc default setting when scanning with FBS 0: No 1: Yes Enlarging the 24 dot-fontcharacters 0: Yes 1: No Muti-T.30 monitor journal number 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments
Note: For this feature to work correctly, you must register several items. See 3.16 Consumable order sheet page 3-161. . Note: For this feature to work correctly, you must register several items. See 3.16 Consumable order sheet page 3-161. . Deterimine whether to print the receive time stamp within the document print area or not. Determine the default setting for Next doc scanning with ADF. If it is set to 0 the default setting for Next doc is No, if is 1 the setting is Yes. Determine the default setting for Next doc scanning with FBS. If it is set to 0 the default setting for Next doc is No, if is 1 the setting is Yes. Determine to print the characters on cover page or Tx report to 150 or not. If this setting is Yes, the journal report will be printed not in the consecuted number but in the table number to see the T.30 monitor.

Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Add TSI infromation to the receive time stamp 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments Determine to add the senders fax number to the receive stamp or not.
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3-134

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Print the sending document on the error massage sheet 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Shortcut the fax number on the journal list 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments
1 0
0 0
Determine whether to print only the last 25 characters of the fax number on the journal list and replace the rest with ....

Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 1 0 0 Adjust Reaction time to the keys on the touch screen Usage/Comments Switch 7 6 5 4 1111 1110 0101 0100 0010 0001 0000 Time 150 ms 140 ms 50 ms 40 ms (Initial setting) 20 ms 10 ms 0 ms
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only
3-135

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Multi line setting 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments This switch enables it to set the first and second line differently.
3-136
3.6 Clear Programmed Data / User Settings

User programmed information such as address book entries, date, time, Transmit Terminal Identifier (TTI), Subscriber ID, etc., are stored in the units Random Access Memory (RAM). A battery back up holds this information, when the power is lost. This function does not clear the machine parameters, memory switches and unique switches. Therefore, this setting is useful to reset the user-programmed information but leave specific parameters and switches configured for a particular telephone system, etc. To reset only each switch, see page 3-3, 3-85 and 3-112. Note: If desired, the All RAM Clear setting can be used to erase all users programmed information, all documents in memory, and reset the memory switches and unique switches to factory defaults. For information on the All RAM Clear setting, see below. 1. To clear programmed data and user settings, from standby, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <2>.
2. Press [Yes]. Note: To finish the operation without performing initialization, press [No].
3.7 All RAM Clear

The All RAM Clear setting will erase all user-programmed information, all documents in memory, and reset the memory switches and unique switches to factory defaults. This feature may also be used to try and clear a machine malfunction or lock up. If possible, when the All RAM Clear is used to reset a malfunction or lock up, it is advisable to print the machine settings, one-touch and speed dial listings to help in reprogramming this information. Note: The All RAM Clear does not clear the machine parameters, life monitor and consumable order sheet. If you need to clear them, see Clearing the machine parameters page 3-3, Clear Life Monitor page 3-165 or Clear consumable order sheet on page 3-164. 1. To perform an All RAM Clear, from standby, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <3>.
2. Press [Yes]. Note: To finish the operation without performing RAM clear, press [No].
3-137
3.8 T.30 Monitor

In all binary coded facsimile control procedures the HDLC frame structure is utilized. The basic HDLC structure is shown below.
Prambel Binr codierte Daten
NSF-Frame (Nicht-Standard-Funktionen)
CSI-Frame (ID des angerufenen Teilnehmers)
DIS-Frame (Digitales Identifizierungssignal)
Flag
Flag
Adresse
Steuerung
FaksimileSteuerfeld
FaksimileDatenfeld
Blockprfung (FCS)
Die Daten aus diesem Abschnitt werden im T.30-Monitor gedruckt.
The control signal is identified by FCF (Facsimile Control Field). Additional 8-bit octet information follows FIF (Facsimile Information Field) and FC (Facsimile Control Field) to further clarify facsimile procedures. This is added to DIS, DCS, DTC, CIS, CIG, TSI, NSC, NSF, and NSS signals.
3.8.1 Print T.30 Monitor

This mode causes the unit to print a G3 procedural summary of the last fax communication. 1. From standby, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <5>.
2. Press [Yes] to print the T.30 Monitor list.
3.8.2 Multi T.30 Monitor

The communications on the journal list are able to print. 1. Set the unique switch for Multi T.30 monitor to "1 (On)". (Unique switch 85 switch 0 ) 2. Print the journal list and check the communication number of which to print the T.30 Monitor. 3. From standby, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <5>.
4. Enter the communication number and press [Enter]. 5. Press [Yes] to print the T.30 Monitor list.
3-138
3.8.3 How to see the print out

(Example for fax transmission)
3-139
(Example for fax reception)
TxFrame : Signals sent by machine printing T.30 report RxFrame : Signals received from remote machine DATA: TCF : PIX : Additional 8-bit octet information to clarify facsimile procedures. In the list, the data are in hexadecimal digits. At the top of each data shows the type of the signal. TCF check sequence Image data Error Correction Mode (EECM on, pageEMC off) Mode (S8dot/mm x 15.4l/mm FFine NNormal) Receiver's minimum scan line time capability Recording width document size Compressing method Data signalling rate
[V17 MMR A3 0 F E]
3-140
NSF, NSC, NSS:

NSF, NSC, NSS are nonstandard unit frames. The first three bytes of the FIF are specified by T.30. The subsequent digits are individually determined by the manufacturers. The first byte refers to the country code. The second byte is a spare it is 00 (hex) presently. The third byte is the manufacturer code. TxFrame RxFrame NSF DATA 20 00 00 45 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 The third byte is the manufactures code The second byte is spare currently set at 00H The first byte indicates the country code Indicates the NSF code
CSI, CIG, TSI:

CSI, CIG, TSI is composed of a maximum 20-digit number comprising the country code, area code, and subscribers telephone number. In the printed results, printing starts from the least significant digit of the telephone number. The following code table lists the codes used to make the 20-digit number and their value. Below the code table is a CSI example. Code 20 30 31 Value Space 0 1 Code 32 33 34 Value 2 3 4 Code 35 36 37 Value 5 6 7 Code 38 39 2B Value 8 9 +
An example telephone number of 123-456-7890 is represented as: TxFrame CIS RxFrame DATA 30 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DIS, DTC, DCS:

DIS, DTC, DCS frames define the standard CCITT capabilities of the two units such as transmit and receive speeds, coding methods, printer speed, etc. TxFrame DIS RxFrame DATA 00 EF F9 C4 80 81 80 00
The bits are in the following order: ( 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1) (16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9) (24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17) (32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25) (40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33) (48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41) (56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49) (64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57) Table for hexadecimal digit to binary number: Hex Binary Hex Binary 0 0000 4 0100 1 0001 5 0101 2 0010 6 0110 3 0011 7 0111 Hex 8 9 A B Binary 1000 1001 1010 1011 Hex C D E F Binary 1100 1101 1110 1111
So in the above list the first "EF" is "11101111"(bit order 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1)
3-141
A transmission with PPR signal:

The error frame in fax reception is identified using the post-message signal and PPR signal. TxFrame RxFrame PPS MPS PPR DATA BF 4F 00 00 0F BC F0 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
In PPS signal FIF, the pages, blocks and frames are displayed one value less than the real value. So in the above case: Pages: 00 means one page Blocks: 00 means one block Frames: 0F means 16 frames In PPR signal FIF, the error frame will be displayed with "1". In the above case the fist frame is "F0" and it means there was an error from frame 4 to 7.
3-142
3.9 Printer maintenance mode

In case of followings, use this mode. When you have replaced the Fuser unit and/or Transfer roller. |When Call Service : XX message appear in the LCD, access this mode to determine the cause of the Call Service : XX error message.

When you replace the Fuser unit or Transfer roller, you must set the count of replacement manually
To access the printer maintenance mode: 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <6>. The mode is contained within two main menu levels.
2. Select Enter Replace Counter, and press [Enter]. 3. The LCD shows:
4. Select either Replace Fuser or Replace Transfer according to the parts you have replaced, and press [Enter]. If you have selected Replace Fuser, the LCD shows:
5. Press [YES]. The machine goes back to standby mode.

When Call Service message is displayed on the LCD n
To access the printer maintenance modes for determine the cause of the Call Service : XX error message. Note: See 4.5 Call Service Error page 4-8 for the printer error messages and an explanation of each are outlined.
3-143
3.10 Monitor speaker

If you need to monitor the signal of fax communication, turn this mode to on. You can hear the signal sound with machines speaker during fax transaction. 1. From standby mode, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <8>.
2. Select [On], and press [Enter] to turn the mode on. Note: To turn this mode off, perform step 1 and 2 by selecting [Off].
3-144
3.11 Test Modes

This mode offers the ability to print a test pattern and monitor certain unit output functions. Included are followings: Life monitor Printer Test Stamp test mode Port Status (Factory use only) Background level setting Roller Cleaning Image Quality Test (Factory use only) 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9> to enter the test mode.
3.11.1 Life Monitor

The life monitor displays the current software version, the total number of pages scanned, printed, and transmitted, the number of drums replaced and the total page count on the current drum. Note: The All RAM Clear setting does not clear the life monitor. To clear, see below. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select Life Monitor and press [Enter].
2. Pressing the cursor key up or down displays the following values:
3-145
ROM Ver.0 displays software version 01 to 02 displays software version of the optional kit Serial No. displays the machines serial number Installation Date displays the machines setup date Scan Pages displays total pages scanned Print Pages displays total pages printed Tx Pages displays total pages transmitted Drum Replaced # displays drum replaced times Drum Life Time displays total working seconds of current drum Drum Life displays total pages printed on current drum Toner Replaced # displays toner cartridge replaced count Toner Life displays total pages printed on current toner cartridge Fuser Replaced Co displays fuser replaced count Fuser Life displays total pages printed on fuser Transfer Rplcd Co displays transfer roller replaced count Transfer Life displays total pages printed on current transfer roller 3. Press [Close] to exit the display life monitor
3-146
3.11.2 Printer Test

The Printer Test mode offers seven different test patterns as shown below. Checkered Squares Paper Scum
Half-tone 1 D: Halftone :
Halft-tone 2 E: Halftone2 :
White F: White :
Black G: Black :
Ladder
Magin pattern
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select Test Pattern Print and press [Enter].
3-147
2. Select the desired pattern displayed and press [Enter]. 3. Select the paper size to test and press [Enter].
4. Press [Yes].
The selected pattern will be printed continuously. Note: Press <Stop> to stop printing. 5. To select another pattern, repeat the steps 1 to 4.
3.11.3 Stamp test mode

This mode tests the stamp. When it is set to on, the stamp will be stamped on the document at a regular interval. Note: The stamp is an option unit. 1. Load test documents into the automatic document feeder (ADF). 2. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select Stamp Test mode and press [Enter].
3. Press [Enter] to start the stamp test. 4. Press <Stop> to exit the stamp test mode.
3.11.4 Port Status

This test mode is not applicable to field service of this machine.
3-148
3.11.5 Set Background Level

The background level is an established threshold used to help measure the reflective ability of a scanned document. This threshold can change if the scanner lamp, CCD, or the ballast is replaced therefore this mode should be used to reset the threshold when these items are changed. The Set Background Level mode allows the level to be set without erasing memory contents. Note:The background seal at the inside of the scanner cover should be cleaned prior to setting the background level to ensure an accurate reading. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select Background level and press [Enter].
2. Press [Start] to start the background level setting. After the background level setting, the machine goes back to the standby mode.
3.11.6 Roller Cleaning

Note: The mode is available for MFX-2725 and MFX-2325 only. This mode rotates the platen roller so that you can clean the surface of it. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select Roller Cleaning and press [Enter].
2. Open the platen cover. 3. Every time you press [Start], the roller rotates one quarter. Alternately press [Start] and clean the roller until all the surface becomes clean.
4. Press <Stop> to exit the roller cleaning mode.
3.11.7 Image quality test

3-149
3.12 Print Machine Parameters, Memory Switch and Unique Switch Settings
This function instructs the unit to print a list of the machine parameter, memory switch and unique switch settings. The list shows the default and current settings for each. After printing, the unit returns to standby. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <0>.
2. Press [Yes] to start printing.
3-150
3.13 Factory Functions

This factory functions provide several machine testes including LED and LCD tests, a keypad test, memory tests, a RTC test, etc. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>.
2. To select the desired test mode, press <> or <> and scroll the list. Prints a list of the Factory Functions LED test LCD test Panel test SRAM check DRAM check RTC test Page memory check ATDC adjustment Generate bell test Toner supply mode Lamp measurement Thermistor Temperature Log
3.13.1 Function List

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>. 2. Select Function List and press [Enter]. 3. Press [Yes].
A list of the Factory Functions will be printed. After printing the unit will return to standby.
3.13.2 LED Test

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select LED Test. 2. Press [Enter].
Pressing <Start>, all green LEDs will turn on. Pressing <Start> again, all red LEDs will turn on. Pressing <Start> the third time, all LEDs will turn on. 3. Press <Stop> to exit the LED test mode. 3-151
3.13.3 LCD Test

This mode displays two test patterns in LCD. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select LCD Test. 2. Press [Enter].
Pressing <Start>, all dots will turn on.
Next pressing <Start>, all dots will turn off.
Next pressing <Start>, characters will be displayed.
3. Press <Stop> to exit the LCD test mode.
3-152
3.13.4 Panel Key Test

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select Panel Test. 2. Press [Enter].
3. As each button on the keypad is pressed, a representative name as show in the following table will be displayed. Key ENERGY SAVE COPY FAX SCAN CONTRAST FAX CANCEL / JOB CONFIRM. Panel key 1~4 ONLINE VOICE GUIDANCE RESET MENU Indication in LCD EnergySave Copy Fax Scanner LCD_Contrast Fax Stop/Conf Function 1~4 Online Voice guidance Reset Menu Key Numeric keys 0 through # START STOP INTERRUPT SPEED DIAL On-hook TTI LIST MACRO M1~ M3 One-touch dial 1 ~ 56 Indication in LCD Tenkey 1 to # Start Stop Interrupt Anykey 1 Anykey 2 Anykey 3 Anykey 4 Reg Key macro key macro 1 ~ 3 Speed dial 1 ~ 56
4. Press <Stop> twice to cancel the key panel test.
3.13.5 SRAM Check

This mode is used to test the SRAM memory where user programmed parameters such as date, time, TTI, etc are stored. Note: When this test is executed, the unit will perform an All RAM Clear. The All RAM Clear erases all user settings and resets all memory switches, machine parameters and unique switches to factory defaults. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select SRAM Check. 2. Press [Enter]. 3. Enter the HEX code (00 ~ FF) using numeric keypad, then press <Start>. The HEX code is written to, then read from memory. After that, the result (OK/NG) will be shown in the display. Then the machine will return to factory function. To enter A, B, C, D, E and F, see table below. A B C D E F Seped dial Macro 01 02 On-hook M1
The data are written to, then read from each address. The results are shown in the display. If the read/ write test is successful, the display will show OK. If some portion of the read/write test fails, the display will show NG with the address and the data name. 4. Upon completion, the machine returns to the test mode. 3-153
3.13.6 DRAM Check

This mode is used to test the DRAM memory, or document memory. Note: When this test is performed, an All DRAM Clear will be performed by the unit. The All RAM clear erases all user settings and resets all memory switches, machine parameters and unique switches to factory defaults. This is a read/write test that requires a few moments to complete. Note: Perform a DRAM test whenever a memory upgrade is added to the unit. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select DRAM Check. 2. Press [Enter].
3. Enter the HEX code (00 ~ FF) using numeric keypad and one-touch key [01] to [06], then press <Start>.
4. Depending on the amount of DRAM in the unit, press <0>, <1> or <2> on the numeric keypad. Please refer to the following table: Note: Usually, press <0>. Press 0 1 2 Check area All DRAMs The standard memory on the main control board The memory on the Optional Memory PCB
5. Press <Start>. The machine starts checking and the result (OK/NG) will be shown in the display. For example, if the check area is 0 and a 64MB expansion memory is attached, you will see:
The numbers displayed OK/NG means the following area Number 1 2 3 Check area The standard memory on the main control board The memory on the attached 32MB Memory PCB or The first half of the memory on the 64MB Optional Memory PCB The second half of the memory on the 64MB Optional Memory PCB
6. Press <Reset> to exit the test mode.
3.13.7 RTC(real time clock) Test

This test mode is not applicable to field service of this machine. 3-154
3.13.8 Page memory check

When the letters are not printed correctly, perform this test. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select Page Memory check. 2. Press [Enter].
3. Select the desired checking area and press [Enter]. 4. The machine starts checking and the result (OK/NG) will be shown in the display. If NG is shown, perform the DRAM clear (page 3-165), and then go back to step 1. 5. Press [Close] to exit the test mode.
3.13.9 ATDC adjustment

This mode adjusts the value of data read by the ATDC Sensor. When a reused drum is set to a different machine or in cased that the machine cannot memory the value, the former value must be inputted manually using this mode. Note: Before replacing the drum to other machine or replacing the PCB Main, first use this mode to write down the current ATDC value and the drum life time. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select ATDC adjustment. 2. Press [Enter].
3. Select ASTD and press [Enter]. 4. Enter the ASTD value, and press [Enter].
5. Select DeltaVCONT and press [Enter]. 6. Enter the DeltaVCONT value, and press [Enter].
7. Select Drum Life Time and press [Enter]. 8. Enter the drum life time, and press [Enter].
9. Press [Close] to exit the mode.
3-155
3.13.10 Generate bell test

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select Generate Bell Test. 2. Press [Enter]. 3. The bell starts ringing. 4. Press <Stop> to stop.
3.13.11 Toner supply mode

This mode forces to supply the toner to the prescribed standard ratio, when it goes down for an unexpected reason. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select Toner supply mode. 2. Press [Enter].
3. Select ON to activate this mode and press [Enter].
3.13.12 Lamp measurement

3.13.13 Thermistor Temperature Log

You can see and print 100 log of Thermistor temperature and Heater On/Off. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select Thermistor Temperature Log. 2. Press [Enter].
See the list below what the acronyms stand for. 3. To scroll the screen, press < >. 4. When you press <Start> the log will be printed. 5. Press <Reset> to go back to the test mode. Explanation for the LCD and list: Acronym LCD List G TG Meaning Target Temperature Explanation 125C: Standby 105C: Warm up starts 125C: Warm up ends 170C: Paper pickup 175C: Pringint The temperature of the thermistor. (C) Whether the heater is On or Off. Internal time counter (10ms/count) 3-156
P T M
TP HT TM
Thermistor Temperature Heater General Time
3.14 Line Tests

This mode offers several internal tests and ability to monitor certain unit output functions. Included are relay tests, modem signal output monitoring, and DTMF output monitoring.
3.14.1 Relay Test

This mode tests the on/off operation of various relays and switches. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <2>. 2. Select the line you want to test and press [Enter]. You can only test line1.
3. Select Relay Test and press [Enter].
4. Select the relay you want to test and press [Enter]. When it is selected, it will be highlighted.
OFHK_ON L_ON RI_ON
OFHK_ON L_OFF RI_OFF
H_ON CONT24_ON Hook key
H_OFF CONT24_OFF
5. Press [Close] to exit the relay test mode.
3-157
3.14.2 Tonal Signal Test

The tonal signal test permits the units output tones to be monitored. Note:To monitor the tones, an external monitoring device must be connected to the telephone line jack. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <2>. 2. Select the line you want to test and press [Enter]. You can only test line1. 3. Select Tonal and press [Enter].
4. Select your desired tonal signal test. When it is selected, it will be highlighted.
Refer to the table below. Note: It may take several moments for output signal to change. Signal Signal None (stop signal) V17_2400_7200_W1_B4 400 Hz tone V17_2400_7200_W0_B1 600 Hz tone V17_2400_7200_W4_B1 1100 Hz tone V17_2400_9600_W1_B0 1300 Hz tone V17_2400_9600_W1_B1 2100 Hz tone V17_2400_9600_W1_B4 3000 Hz tone V17_2400_9600_W0_B1 3400 Hz tone V17_2400_9600_W4_B1 FSK WHITE V17_2400_12000_W1_B0 FSK BLACK V17_2400_12000_W1_B1 FSK _W1_B1 V17_2400_12000_W1_B4 V27_1200_2400 V17_2400_12000_W0_B1 V27_1600_4800 V17_2400_12000_W4_B1 V29_2400_7200 V17_2400_14400_W1_B0 V29_2400_9600 V17_2400_14400_W1_B1 V17_2400_7200_W1_B0 V17_2400_14400_W1_B4 V17_2400_7200_W1_B1 V17_2400_14400_W0_B1 V17_2400_14400_W4_B1
Signal V34_2400_2400 ~ 21600 V34_2800_4800 ~ 26400 V34_3000_4800 ~ 28800 V34_3200_4800 ~ 31200 V34_34290_4800 ~ 33600 VOICE MELODY GRBT 5. Press [Close] to exit the relay test mode. 3-158
3.14.3 DTMF Output Test

The DTMF output test permits the units DTMF tones to be monitored. Note:To monitor the tones, an external monitoring device must be connected to the telephone line jack. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <2>. 2. Select the line you want to test and press [Enter]. You can only test line1. 3. Select DTMF and press [Enter].
4. Select your desired tonal DTMF tone and press [Enter]. When it is selected, it will be highlighted.
Refer to the table below. Note: It may take several moments for output signal to change. Display Signal Display 0 DTMF0 (941 Hz 1336 Hz) ROW1 1 DTMF1 (697 Hz 1209 Hz) ROW2 2 DTMF2 (697 Hz 1336 Hz) ROW3 3 DTMF3 (697 Hz 1477 Hz) ROW4 4 DTMF4 (770 Hz 1209 Hz) COL1 5 DTMF5 (770 Hz 1336 Hz) COL2 6 DTMF6 (770 Hz 1477 Hz) COL3 7 DTMF7 (852 Hz 1209 Hz) COL4 8 DTMF8 (852 Hz 1336 Hz) 9 DTMF9 (852 Hz 1477 Hz) AST DTMF6* (941 Hz 1209 Hz) SHARP DTMF# (941 Hz 1477 Hz) 5. To stop outputting the DTMF tone, press <Stop>. 6. To select another DTMF tone, repeat steps 4-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7. 7. Press [Close] to exit the DTMF output test mode under not tests. Signal ROW1 (697 Hz) ROW2 (770 Hz) ROW3 (852 Hz) ROW4 (941 Hz) COL1 (1209 Hz) COL2 (1336 Hz) COL3 (1447 Hz) COL4 (1633 Hz)
3-159
3.15 Mirror Carriage Transfer Mode

Important: The fax machine is shipped with mirror carriage locking plate for protecting the machine s mirror carriage during shipping. When installing the fax, slide the scanner locking knob back to its unlocking position. Then turn the power on and perform the following: 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <4>.
2. Select Off and press [Enter]. Important: If reshipping, turn this mode on to move the mirror carriage to the transport position. Then power off and slide the locking knob to its mirror carriage locking position.
3-160
3.16 Consumable order sheet

When the drum cartridge is near end of its design life or the toner cartridge is near empty, the machine prints (or transmit) the consumable sheet.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Dealers fax number Customers name Customers address Customers account Serial number of the unit Customers telephone number Customers fax number registered by Initial setting mode Order item Description of the order item Quantity of the order item Dealers name Dealers code
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Dealers telephone number Dealers fax number Comments Customaers siganuture Block letter of the signature Drum rotate time (x 10 seconds) Drum life time Drum used percentage Total print pages Number of pirnted pages after toner or drum was replaced ROM version
3-161
3.16.1 Set consumable order sheet

1. Clear the junk data, if necessary (see Clear consumable order sheet, page 3-164). 2. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <5>. 3. Select Consumable Order Sheet and press [Enter].
4. Press Dealer Name and press [Enter]. Enter the Dealers name. The code may be up to 30 characters in length.
5. Press [Enter] to save the dealers name. 6. Select Dealer Tel No and press [Enter]. Enter the distributors telephone number. The phone number may be up to 20 characters in length. To enter the numbers, use the numeric keypad.
7. Press [Enter] to save the dealers telephone number. 8. Select Dealer Fax No and press [Enter]. Enter the dealers fax number. The fax number may be up to 20 characters in length.
9. Press [Enter] to save the dealers fax number. 10. Select Cust Account # and press [Enter]. Enter the customers account number. The customers account number may be up to 10 characters in length.
11. Press [Enter] to save the customers code.
3-162
12. Select Cust Name and press [Enter]. Enter the customers account number. The customers account number may be up to 30 characters in length.
13. Press [Enter] to save the customers name. 14. Select Address 1 and press [Enter]. Enter the customers address for the upper row. The customers address may be up to 14 characters in length.
15. Press [Enter] to save the customers address for the upper row. 16. Select Address 2 and press [Enter]. Enter the customers address for the lower row. The customers address may be up to 14 characters in length.
17. Press [Enter] to save the customers address for the lower row. 18. Select Cust Tel. Enter the customers phone number. The phone number may be up to 20 characters in length.
19. Press [Enter] to save the customers phone number. 20. Select Unit Serial # and press [Enter]. Enter the MFPs serial number. The number may be up to 18 characters in length.
21. Press [Enter] to save the MFPs serial number.
3-163
22. Select Order Sheet Setting and press [Enter]. Determine if the machine prints or transmits the consumable order sheet when the printer consumable is near end of its designed life. If OFF is selected, the machine does not print or transmit the consumable order sheet even though the printer consumable is near end of its designed life.
23. Press [Enter] save the setting. 24. Press [Close] to go back to the Consumable Orders Sheet mode.
3.16.2 Clear consumable order sheet

The consumable order sheet keeps several items, these are not clear the all RAM clear function (Menu *, 0, 3). To clear the information of consumable order sheet: 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <5>. 2. Select Clear Order Sheet and press [Enter].
3. To clear the information of consumable order sheet, press [Yes]. To finish the operation without clearing, press [No].
3.16.3 Print consumable order sheet

To check the customers information has been registered correctly, print the consumable order sheet. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <5>. 2. Select Order Sheet List and press [Enter].
3. Press [Yes].
3-164
3.17 DRAM Clear

Note: Perform a DRAM clear whenever a memory upgrade is installed to the unit or the DRAM is replaced. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <6>.
2. Press [Yes]. The DRAM will be cleared. Note: To finish the operation without performing initialization, press [No]. 3. After clearing, turn the power OFF and ON.
3.18 Clear Life Monitor

The life monitor keeps a count of the pages scanned, printed, and transmitted, along with the drum replacement count and total pages printed on the current drum. This mode clears these counters. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <7>.
2. Press [Yes]. The counters will be reset. Note: To finish the operation without performing initialization, press [No].
3.19 Clear Optional Data

This mode clears all data and all activity journals for Printer controller. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <8>.
2. Press [Yes]. The optional data will be reset. Note: To finish the operation without performing initialization, press [No].
3-165
3.20 Set Service Code

This is the code to protect the life monitor clear operation. If it is not necessary to protect to the life monitor clear operation, abort this operation without entering the service code. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <9>. 2. Your next mode depends on whether youre creating or modifying the service code: If creating --- Go to step 3. If modifying --- Use the numeric keypad to enter the proper service code and press [Enter]. If you enter an invalid code, the fax will reject the attempt and abort this operation.
3. Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit service code.
4. Press [Enter]. Note: To turn off the service code and return to normal life monitor clear (not protected), change the code to 0000 by repeating steps 1-4 and entering 0000 in step 3.
3-166
3.21 Life monitor maintenance

When you replace the main control PCB, you should register the previous several counter values of the life monitor. 1. Before updating the software or replacing the main control PCB, write down the counter values of the life monitor. 2. To confirm the life monitor, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, <Enter>. Then scroll down the list. (See 3.11.1 Life Monitor, page 3-145.) 3. After you write down the counter values of the life monitor, update the software or replace the main control PCB. 4. Then, press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <0>.
5. Select Printed pages and press [Enter].
6. Enter previous values of the printed pages using the current toner cartridge, then press [Enter]. 7. Select # of Printed Page after warning and press [Enter].
8. Enter previous value of the drum replaced count, then press [Enter]. 9. Select Drum Life and press [Enter].
10. Enter previous value of the drum life, then press [Enter]. 11. Select Drum Life pages, and press [Enter].
12. Enter previous value of the drum life pages, then press [Enter]. 13. Select Drum Replaced Count, and press [Enter].
3-167
14. Enter previous value of the drum replaced count, and press [Enter]. 15. Select Toner Replaced Count, and press [Enter].
16. Enter previous value of the toner replaced count, then press [Enter]. 17. Select Fuser Replaced Count, and press [Enter].
18. Enter previous value of the fuser replaced count, then press [Enter]. 19. Select Fuser Life, and press [Enter].
20. Enter previous value of the fuser life, then press [Enter]. 21. Select Transfer Rplcd Count, and press [Enter].
22. Enter previous value of the transfer roller replaced count, then press [Enter]. 23. Select Transfer Life, and press [Enter].
24. Enter previous value of the transfer roller life, then press [Enter]. 25. Press <Reset> to go to the standby screen.
3-168
3.22 Sensor input test

This mode can confirm the sensor status. When the sensor operates, the value next to sensor name changes 0 to 1. For example, when open the 1st paper cassette, the CAS1:0 change to CAS1: 1. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <2>.
2. Press < > or < > to display the desired sensor. Code Status Code DS1 0: No document DS2 1: Document existing DRS Sensor for resist EXIT*1 0: No document 1: Document existing DL1 DW1 Document width detection DW2 DW1 DW2 Width 0 0 Minimum 1 0 A4 0 1 A3 1 1 B4 *1 DL2 Document Length Sensor for LAST*1 ADF 0: No document 1: Document existing TXIL 0: Scanner cover is close 1: Scanner cover is open APS 0: Platen cover is open BIS 1: Platen cover is closed HS (Home Sensor) PSS SWBK FEED2 FEED4 DSW1 CART LOCK_P 0: Mirror is other than the BSS home position 1: Mirror in the home position 0: No paper 1: Detect paper Switchback sensor for printer 0: No 1: Yes Second cassette feed sensor 0: No 1: Yes Third cassette feed sensor 0: No 1: Yes Drum sensor 0: Used 1: New Cartridge sensor 0: No cartridge 1: Cardtridge Power unit fan lock 0: Turning 1: Locked PDS DUP FEED3 DUPU
Status 0: No document 1: Document existing Switchback sensor for RADF 0: No 1: Yes Document Length Sensor for ADF 0: No document 1: Document existing
0: No document on the tray 1: Document on the tray
Start scanning the document on FBS 0: On 1: Off Document Length Sensor for FBS 0: No document 1: Document existing Paper sensor for exit area 0: No paper 1: Detect paper Duplex sensor 0: No 1: Yes Third cassette feed sensor 0: No 1: Yes Duplex unit detection 0: No duplex unit 1: Duplex unit
DEV LOCK_F
Developing unit detection 0: No unit 1: Developing unit Fusing unit fan lock 0: Turning 1: Locked
3-169
Code LOCK1M HYDRO VCON TOS PES
J1_OP PSIZE2
PES3
Status Main motor lock 0: Turning 1: Locked Shows the humidity outside the machine Shows the Anst value and Vcont value of toner Toner in toner buffer 0: Yes 1: No Paper Empty Sensor 0: Detect paper is 1st cassette 1: No paper in 1st cassette 1st cassette side cover 0: Closed 1: Open Paper size for 2nd cassette 1:A5R 2:A5 3:OTHER 4:A4 5:F4 6:A3 8:B5R 9:B5 A:B4 C:A4R 0: Detect paper is 3rd cassette 0: No paper in 3rd cassette 3rd cassette side cover 0: Closed 1: Open 0: Detect paper is 4th cassette 1: No paper in 4th cassette
Code LOCK2M THRM ATDC TEMP PSIZE
Status Second motor lock 0: Turning 1: Locked Shows the temperature outside the machine Shows the ATDC value of the sensor Show the internal temperature of heat roller. Paper size for 1st cassette 1:A5R 2:A5 3:OTHER 4:A4 5:F4 6:A3 8:B5R 9:B5 A:B4 C:A4R 0: Detect paper is 2nd cassette 1: No paper in 2nd cassette 2nd cassette side cover 0: Closed 1: Open Paper size for 3rd cassette 1:A5R 2:A5 3:OTHER 4:A4 5:F4 6:A3 8:B5R 9:B5 A:B4 C:A4R
PES2 J2_OP
PSIZE3
J3_OP PES4
PSIZE4
J4_OP PSIZEM
LFTUP1 LFETUP3 LEFTUP4
4th cassette side cover PES_BS 0: Closed 1: Open Paper size for bypass tray FR_OP 0:A4R 1:A4 2:B5R 3:B5 4:A5R 5:A5 6:OTHER 7:POSTCARD 8:A3 9:B4 1st cassette liftup sensor LFTUP2 0: No 1: Yes 3rd cassette liftup sensor 0: No 1: Yes 4th cassette liftup sensor 0: No 1: Yes
Paper size for 3rd cassette 1:A5R 2:A5 3:OTHER 4:A4 5:F4 6:A3 8:B5R 9:B5 A:B4 C:A4R 0: Detect paper on bypass tray 1: No paper on bypass tray Front cover 0: Closed 1: Open 2nd cassette liftup sensor 0: No 1: Yes
*1 : Displayed only on MFX-2725, MFX-2225.
3-170
Note: CAS2, JAM2 and PES2 do not change, when there is no second cassette attached. SWBK does not change, when the machine has no duplex printing unit. We have described the sensors of the RADF model in section 2 by names begining with PI. See the table below which sensor correspond to which. Display The sensor names in section 2 TXIL PI10 DS1 PI11 DS2 PI7 DRS PI8 DW1 PI2 DW2 DL1 DL2 PI1 PI4 PI5 PI6 PI3
3. Press [Close] to return to standby mode.
3-171
3.23 Printer diagnostic mode

This mode can confirm the operation of each parts of the printer section. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <3>.
2. Press < > or < > to select the device you want to set to ON. Fan Rx Motor Lamp Clutch 1 Clutch 2 Clutch 3 Clutch 4 R Clutch Clutch M ALL OFF 3. Press [Enter]. 4. Press [Enter] again to exit. :Turns the cooling fan motor :Turns the Rx motor :Turns the lamp on :Turns the clutch of 1st cassette :Turns the clutch of 2nd cassette :Turns the clutch of 3rd cassette :Turns the clutch of 4th cassette :Turns the clutch of the resist roller :Turns the clutch of the bypass tray :Turns the all device to off
Dup Clutch :Turns the duplex clutch
3-172
3.24 Network service mode

This mode provides the following four items: Display the sum-check of internet fax board Delete the Manager (Admisitrator) All clear the registered parameters of the optional Internet fax board
3.24.1 Display the server sum-check

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <4>. 2. Select Show Server Sumcheck and press [Enter].
3. Press [Close] to close the server sumcheck display.
3.24.2 Delete Manager

Clear the administrator information, when the administrator passward is missing and no one can manage the network setting. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <4>. 2. Select Delete Manager and press [Enter].
3. Press [Yes].
3-173
3.24.3 All clear the registered parameters of the network board

You can clear all the data of network settings like IP address, Subnet Mask or Default Gateway. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <4>. 2. Select Server data clear and press [Enter].
3. Press [Yes]. The information will be cleared.
Note: To finish the operation without performing initialization, press [No].
3.25 Flash Rom Sum Check

This mode allows you to check Sum after the Flash ROM version is updated. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <9>.
2. Press [Close] to return to standby mode.
3.26 Printer registration adjustment

This mode can adjust the print registration for each paper source. For more detail, see 5.3 Adjustment in section 5.
3-174
3.27 Set Service Report

3.27.1 Set the service report
If using this feature, you should be enter following items: Report location 1 and 2 Where to send the service report. Period The report can be send either once in a determined month(s) or once in a month on a determined date and time. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <2>.
2. Select Setting and press [Enter]. 3. Select Send Service Report and press [Enter].
3. To activate the Service Report mode, select On and press [Enter].
4. Now you can enter the detail for the report. Press Report Location 1 and press [Enter].
5. To send the service report to the customer service, select On and press [Enter].
6. Enter the fax number where to send the report. Press [Enter].
3-175
7. Press Report Location 2 to enter another location. Otherwise, skip to step 9.
8. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to enter the location. 9. Select Interval Months and press [Enter].
10. Enter the interval for service report auto transmission from 1 to 12 months and press [Enter].
11. Press <Reset> to go back to standby mode.
3.27.2 Clear service report

To clear the information of service report: 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <2>. 2. Select Delete and press [Enter].
3. To clear the information of service report setting, select yes and press [Enter]. To finish the operation without clearing, select No and press [Enter].
3-176
3.28 Reset Printer Trouble

This mode clears the service call. Note: Perform this operation after solved the trouble. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <5>.
2. Press [Yes].
3.29 Cleaning mode

This mode rotate the feed roller and registration roller automatically so that you can clean the surface of them. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <6>.
2. To rotate the feed roller, select Feed Roller ON and press [Enter]. 3. Open the feeder cover and clean the feed roller. To stop rotating the roller, select Feed Roller OFF and press [Enter]. 4. To rotate the pickup roller, select Pickup Roller ON and press [Enter]. 5. Clean the pickup roller. The pickup roller is able to clean without opening the feeder cover. To stop rotating the roller, select Pickup Roller OFF and press [Enter].
3.30 Voice test

This mode makes it possible to hear all the voice guidance in order. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <7>.
2. The voice guidance comes from the speaker one after another. 3. Press <Reset> to go back to the standby mode.
3-177
3.31 Network Switch

When an e-mail address is registered as the archive destination, you can set the reroute function on or off. (For this MFP, only this function is available in the network switch.) 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <5>, <1>. 2. Select Set Network Switch and press [Enter].
3. Press <0>, <0>, <7>, and then [Enter].
4. Move to the cursor to the right switch and change it either to 0 or 1 using the numeric key. (0 is for Off. 1 is for On. The default setting is 0, on.) 5. Press [Enter] to save the setting. 6. Press <Reset> to go back to the standby mode.
3.32 Security function maintenance

The security function is available regardless of the registered protect passcode. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <5>, <2>.
2. Select the desired function and press [Enter]. 3. Edit the function and press [Enter].
3-178
3.33 Measuring the black ratio

The black ratio of the scanned document can be measured. The maximum document size is A3 (600 dpi). 1. Set the document to measure. 2. Press <Menu>, <*>, <5>, <4>.
3. Press [Yes]. 4. When the measure is finished, the black ratio will be displayed on the LCD. 5. Press <Reset> to go back to the standby mode.
3.34 Service function menu

All the field service program modes are available from the menu. 1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <7>, <7>.
2. Select the mode you want to enter and press [Yes]. See this chapter how to operate each service function.
3-179
3.35 Quick Initial settings

At installation of this machine, you should set some parameters according to the following procedures. You can do the following setting with continuously. 1. Initial settings 2. Consumable order sheet settings 3. Service Report settings. Note: Before starting the installation settings, clear the memory by pressing <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <2>, [Enter].
Entering initial settings

1. To start Initial setting mode, press <Menu>, <*>, <9>, <9>. The LCD shows:
2. Follow the display and enter the items. See the Uses Guide for detailed instructions. 3. After you have entered all the setting, press [Close]. The LCD now shows the Consumable order sheet setting menu.
To set, clear or print the consumable order sheet, see page 3-161, "3.16 Consumable order sheet" how to operate these functions. 4. After you have entered all the setting, press [Close]. The LCD now shows the service report setting menu.
To skip to the service report settings, press [Close]. See page 3-175, "3.27 Set Service Report" how to operate the functions. 5. Press [Close] to go back to the standby screen.
3-180
3.36 Update the software

The software on the MFP are written on a flash ROM. Use a compact flash memory card (CF), to update the software. The are two ways to update the software: Automatic ROM update Manual ROM update
3.36.1 Before updating the flash ROM

The machine does not detect the CF memory card when you insert it while power on. A malfunction may occur. Turn the MFP to OFF before inserting the CF memory card, and then turn the machine to on. Do not pull out the CF memory card while overwriting, because the system may get unstable. A CF memory card is not available for both automatic and manual update. Boot folder and ROM folder can exist on one CF memory card, however either the boot or Both the ROM folder can hold an update ROM file. You can not update the machine while it is in use or the memory is in use. sure that the machine is not in use, and the remaining memory is 100 before updating the Be ROM. When you perform the automatic ROM update, be sure the power is charged enough. Do not turn the power off during updating. Doing this will not recover the machine. In case the machine is unable to recover, replace the main control PCB.
3-181
3.36.2 Automatic ROM update

The machine will update the ROM automaticary using the ROM date on the CF memory card. To perform the ROM update, the follwing conditions should all be filled: One ROM data file is save on \Boot folder. Model code of machine ROM data *1 matches with Model code on the CF memory card *1. Model name of the machine ROM data matches with Model name on the CF memory card. Distribution country of the machine ROM data matches with Distribution country name on the CF memory card. ROM version of the machine differs with ROM version on the CF memory card. *1 : The model code for MFX-2725, MFX-2700, MFX-2225 and MFX-2200 are DB2.
Operation
1. Power off the machine. 2. Open the access cover, and insert the CF memory card to the main control PCB.
CF
3. Turn the machine to on. The ROM update starts. 4. When the conditions are filled, the message bellow will be displayed on the LCD and the ROM data on the CF memory card will be copied on the SDRAM. While the data is copied, the ROM version and the coping data volume will be displayed. (The transferring value displayed goes from 0 KB to the data size on the ROM) CF ROM Upgrade MainBoardROM Ver. 2725 EUR A2A0A0 DB2 Receiving 4092KB Do not remove CF card (Sample) 5. When copy is finished, the update of flash ROM begins. While updating the flash ROM, the panel LEDs will turned on in order. When the ROM update is finished, the machine reboots automatically. 6. When the machine is rebooted check the ROM version. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, and select Life Monitor then [Enter].) 7. Power off the machine. 8. Pull out the CF memory card. Close the access cover. 9. Turn on the machine.
3-182
3.36.3 Manual ROM update

You can choose the ROM data on the CF memory card for Main control board or OP550. To perform the ROM update all the following conditions should be filled: For main control board One or more ROM data files are saved on \ROM\(model code)*1 folder. Model code of machine ROM data *1 matches with Model code on the CF memory card *1. No ROM data with the same model code is saved on \Boot folder. *1 : The model code for MFX-2725, MFX-2700, MFX-2225 and MFX-2200 are DB2. For PCL print (OP550) board One or more ROM data files are saved on \ROM\OP500 folder. Model name of the machine ROM data matches with Model name on the CF memory card. The ROM is able to overwrite with a new, old or same version ROM. The display shows to which version the CF memory card is overwriting the machine. However the machine does not judge the version.
Operation
1. Power off the machine. 2. Open the access cover, and insert the CF memory card to the main control PCB.
CF
3. Turn the machine to on. The ROM update starts. 4. Be sure that the machine is in standby mode and press <Menu>, <*>, <9>, <6>. 5. Select the PCB board to update and press [Enter].
6. If there are many ROM versions saved on the card, choose to which version to update, and press [Enter].
3-183
7. Confirm the ROM version and press [Enter]. If the model code of the machine ROM and the model code of the CF memory card matches the ROM update starts. CF ROM Upgrade File name 2725__A2AA0 EUR
[Close]
[Enter]
8. When the copy is finished, Sum Check will be displayed. CF ROM Upgrade Sum Check 16BIT[N] : 41BD [Close] [Enter]
9. When you updating the ROM of the Main control board, press [Update] to start to update the flash ROM. While updating the flash ROM, the panel LEDs will turned on in order. When the ROM update is finished, the machine reboots automatically. When you updating the ROM of the OP550, pressing [Update] will start to copy the ROM date from the machine SDRAM to PCL print board. While the data is copied, the ROM version and the coping data volume will be displayed. (The transferring value displayed goes from 0 KB to the data size on the ROM) When the copy is over, the PCL print board updates the ROM. When the ROM update is finished, the machine reboots automatically. 10. When the machine is rebooted check the ROM version. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, and select Life Monitor then [Enter].) 11. Power off the machine. 12. Pull out the CF memory card. Close the access cover. 13. Turn on the machine. Improtant: DO NOT power off the machine while updating. Doing this will not recover the machine. In case the machine is unable to recover, replace the main control PCB. When you try to perform ROM update while the SDRAM is in use (out-of-paper-reception etc.), the following message will be displayed and the machine reboots without updating the ROM. CF ROM Upgrade Memory in use
3-184
3.36.4 How to save the ROM data on the CF memory card

For manual ROM update Main control boad ROM
Create a folder "\ROM\(oder cord)", save the ROM data on that root directory. One or more ROM data should be saved in the folder. No "\Boot" folder should be saved in the root directory.
3-185
PCL ROM
Create a folder "\ROM\OP500", save the ROM data on that root directory.. One or more ROM data should be saved in the folder.
3-186
For automatic ROM update

Create "\Boot" folder and save just one ROM data on that root directory.
3-187
4 Troubleshooting Procedures
4.1 Troubleshooting Outline
Before troubleshooting a unit check the following: Is the power cord correctly connected to the machine? Are the telephone handset and the telephone line cord connected correctly? Is the telephone dial type set correctly? Is there paper in the paper cassette? Are the toner and drum cartridges set correctly? Are all covers closed correctly? Before removing any portions of the machine or making any adjustments be sure the power cord is disconnected from the unit. Check the following: The power source should be rated according to unit specifications. The unit should not be connected to an electrical circuit with other equipment or where voltages may vary. The unit should be installed on a flat, level surface. The ambient temperature and relative humidity surrounding the unit should be 10C to 32C (50F to 89.6F) at 20 to 80 humidity with no condensation. The unit should be located in a well ventilate area. The unit should receive necessary cleaning and maintenance.
The unit should be installed: Away from heat sources and heating or cooling vents. Away from water heaters, steam generators, humidifiers or other areas of high humidity. Away from dusty areas. Away from areas where chemical fumes or gasses are generated or may collect. Away from areas exposed to direct sunlight. Check the consumable: Verify that the recording paper supply is adequate and that it conforms to the type specified for use in the machine. Verify that the recording paper has been stored away from moisture and damp areas. Verify that the recording paper has not been damaged in any way.
4.2 Mirror Carriage Error

Symptom: The mirror carriage doesnt move. Suggested corrective action: 1. Verify that the scanner unit locking pins have been released. Release the scanner unit locking pins if they are not released. Then press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <4> to turn off the mirror carriage carry mode. 2. Verify that the timing belt is not out of joint. 3. Check the operation of HOME sensor at connector P143, on the Scanner PCB.
4-1
4.3 Recording Paper Jam

After removing the jammed paper, please close the top cover once. Mechanical errors
Symptom Possible cause Countermeasure Recommend customer to use suitable paper. Replace it with the new paper. Reload the paper by using the paper guides properly.
Jam in the paper The selected paper is not suitable. supply area Wrinkled /bent /torn paper has been set in the cassette. Paper is not loaded properly.
* The cassette has not been installed Instruct the user how to set the paper settings into the machine properly properly. * The side paper guides have not been slid up against the edges of paper properly. * The paper cassette setting is wrong. Faulty movement of some cassette parts. Paper is stuck in the recording area. The paper feed roller is worn out. Jam in the feed area Jam in the fuser or the paper exit area Paper is stuck in the feed area. Paper is stuck in the fuser or paper exit area. The fuser roller is not clean. Check each movement of a cassette part. Replace the faulty part. Remove the stuck paper. Replace the roller. Remove the jammed paper. Remove the jammed paper. Replace the fuser roller.
Electrical errors
Symptom Possible cause Countermeasure * Check the wiring. * Replace the paper supply electromagnetic clutch. * Replace the PRT PCB. * Replace the Main PCB. Check that the wiring and actuator are working properly. If confirmed OK, then replace the PSS or Main PCB. Check that the wiring and actuator are working properly. If confirmed OK, then replace the PSS or Main PCB. Check that the paper, paper size settings, sensor, and wiring (including the operation.) Replace the PRT PCB. Check that the wiring and actuator are working properly. If confirmed OK, then replace the PDS or Scanner PCB.
Jam in the feed The paper supply electromagnetic area clutch does not work. Please close the blinking cover. The paper supply sensor (PSS) does not work. Jam in the feed The malfunction of the PPS. area Please close the blinking cover. Jam in the feed area Check paper size..... Jam in the fuser or paper exit area The paper size is not correct.
The paper discharge sensor (PDS) does not work.
4-2
4.4 Document Feeder Jam

ADF/RADF section
Mechanical Errors
Symptom While The ADF/RADF does not feeding a feed the document. document Possible Cause The pickup roller is dirty or worn out. The power of the separation roller is getting decrease. The separation pressure does not match the paper source. The motor is not rotating. While scanning a document The feeder stops the feeding job while the document is taken into the feeder. The malfunction of the sensor.. The motor power is not working properly. The roller is dirty. The roller is worn out. The document is stuck and gets damaged while taken into the feeder. A foreign object entered the feed area. Countermeasure Clean the roller. Replace the roller. Adjust the separation pressure. Clean the roller.
Replace the motor, the ADF PCB or the scanner PCB. Replace the sensor. Replace the motor, the ADF PCB or the scanner PCB. Replace the roller. Replace the roller. Remove the object.
The paper quality is not acceptable. Recommend the customer to use The paper shape is not acceptable. the book scanner.
Sensor Malfunctions
Symptom While No beep sound when you feeding a place the document. . document (The beep sound volume setting could be OFF.) Possible Cause DS1 or PI11(EMPTY) sensor defect Countermeasure 0) Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <2> to display the sensor job confirmation mode. 1) Confirm the LCD indication changes by moving the DS1 sensor. 0: No document / 1: Document 2) If the does not change, replace the DS1 sensor or the PI11 (EMPTY) sensor. 3) Replace the sensor harness. 4) Replace the ADF PCB. 5) Replace the harness between the scanner and the ADF PCB. 6) Replace the scanner PCB. 7) Replace the harness between the scanner PCB and the Main PCB. 0) Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <2> to display the sensor job confirmation mode. 1) Confirm that the LCD indication changes by opening and closing the book cover. 0: Cover Open / 1: Document 2) If the LCD indication does not change, replace the APS sensor. 3) Replace the sensor harness. 4) Replace the scanner PCB. 5) Replace the harness between the scanner PCB and the Main PCB.
APS sensor defect
* The FBS does not work correctly while displaying the ADF sensor status. Please do not open or close the FBS cover while displaying the ADF sensor status. 4-3
Symptom While feeding a document The machine feeds the document through the ADF/RADF without scanning.
Possible Cause DRS or PI8(REG) sensor defect
Countermeasure 0) Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <2> to display the sensor job confirmation mode. 1) Confirm that the LCD indication changes by opening the ADF cover and pressing the filler. 0: No document /1: Document 2) If the display indication does not change, replace the DRS PI8(REG) sensor. 3) Replace the sensor harness. 4) Replace the ADF PCB. 5) Replace the scanner PCB. 6) Replace the harness between the ADF PCB and scanner PCB. 7) Replace the harness between the scanner PCB and Main PCB. 0) Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <2> to display the sensor job confirmation mode. 1) Confirm that the LCD indication changes by opening the ADF cover and inserting the document from above. 0: No document /1: Document 2) If the LCD indication does not change, replace the DRS or PI7(READ) sensor. 3) Replace the sensor harness. 4) Replace the ADF PCB. 5) Replace the scanner PCB. 6) Replace the harness between the ADF PCB and scanner PCB. 7) Replace the harness between the scanner PCB and Main PCB. 0) Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <2> to display the sensor job confirmation mode. 1) Confirm that the LCD indication changes by moving the document guides. Width DW1 DW2 Minimum 0 0 A4 1 0 A3 0 1 B4 1 1 2) If the LCD indication does not change, replace the DW1 or PI2(SIZE_W1), or the DW2 or PI1(SIZE_W2) sensor. 3) Replace the sensor harness. 4) Replace the ADF PCB . 5) Replace the scanner PCB. 6) Replace the harness between the ADF PCB and scanner PCB. . 7) Replace the harness between the scanner PCB and the Main PCB.
DS2 or PI7(READ) sensor defect While scanning a document The scan starting and ending area are not correct.
The scanning size is not correct.
DW1 or PI2(SIZE_ W1), or DW2 or PI1(SIZE_W2) sensor defect
While a document exits
The LCD shows a warning while a document exits after scanning. The LCD shows a warning after a document exits.
DS1 PI11(EMPTY), or DS2 or PI7(READ) sensor defect
Check DS1 or PI11(EMPTY) sensor defect first, then DS2 or PI7(READ) sensor defect.
4-4
Symptom Others
Possible Cause
Countermeasure
The message, Please TXIL or 0) Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <2> to display the close the blinking cover. PI10(COVER) sensensor job confirmation mode. appear on the LCD. sor defect 1) Confirm that the LCD indication changes by opening and closing the ADF cover. The blinking cover: The 0: Cover Open / 1: Cover Close ADF cover 2) If the LCD indication does not change, replace the TXIL or PI10(COVER) sensor. 3) Replace the sensor harness. 4) Replace the ADF PCB. 5) Replace the scanner PCB. 6) Replace the harness between the ADF PCB and scanner PCB 7) Replace the harness between the scanner PCB and the Main PCB. The length of the document has not been scanned properly. DL1 or PI4(SIZE_ L1), or DL2 or PI5(SIZE_L2) sensor defect 0) Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <2> to display the sensor job confirmation mode. 1) Confirm that the LCD indication changes by placing B4 or A3 document on the document tray. 0: No document / 1: Document 2) If the LCD indication does not change, replace the DL1 or PI4(SIZE_L1), or DL2 or PI5(SIZE_ L2) sensor. 3) Replace the sensor harness. 4) Replace the ADF PCB. 5) Replace the scanner PCB. 6) Replace the harness between the ADF and scanner. 7) Replace the harness between the scanner PCB and the Main PCB.
4-5
FBS section
Mecannical Errors
Symptom An unusual noise occurs. Possible Cause The belt has not been firmly inserted into the belt holder. The FBS motor gear is interfering with the film. The motor actuation belt is getting too slack. Countermeasure Check the belt. Check the interfering area Check the timing belt
Sensor Malfunctions
Symptom While placing The docua document ment size can not be scanned properly. Possible Cause BIS sensor defect Countermeasure 0) Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <2> to display the sensor job confirmation mode. 1) Confirm that the LCD indication changes by opening and closing the book cover. 0: Cover Open / 1: Cover Close 2) If the LCD indication does not change, replace the BIS sensor. 3) Replace the sensor harness. 4) Replace the scanner PCB. 5) Replace the harness between the scanner PCB and the Main PCB. 0) Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <2> to display the sensor job confirmation mode. 1) Confirm that the LCD indication changes by placing A3 on the book scanner area. 0: No document / 1: Document 2) If the LCD indication does not change, replace the BSS sensor. 3) Replace the sensor harness. 4) Replace the scanner PCB. 5) Replace the harness between the scanner PCB and the Main PCB. Replace it. Replace it. Replace it Replace it. Replace it. 0) Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <2> to display the sensor job confirmation mode. 1) Confirm that the LCD indication changes by opening and closing the book cover. 0: Not home position (The cover has been opened.) 1: Home position (The cover has been closed.) 2) If the LCD indication does not change, replace the HS sensor. 3) Replace the sensor harness. 4) Replace the scanner PCB. 5) Replace the harness between the scanner PCB and the Main PCB.
BSS sensor defect
While scanning a document
The lamp is not illuminated.
Lamp defect Lamp FPC defect Lamp inverter defect Harness for inverter controller defect Scanner PCB defect
The mirror carriage is touching the home side (on the left toward the front)
HS sensor defect
4-6
Symptom While scanning a document The mirror carriage does not work.
Possible Cause FBS motor defect Scanner PCB defect Replace it. Replace it.
Countermeasure
4-7
4.5 Service Call Error

The errors messages and an explanation of each are outlined below.
Code 04: 06: 07: 08: 0B: 0D: 0E: 11: 12: 15: 16: 18: 1E: 46: 47: 49: 4A: 4B: 4D:
Error Message Second Rx motor Error Cassette Liftup Error (First cassette) Cassette Liftup Error (Optional second cassette) Rx motor Error Fan Error Temperature / Humid Sensor Error Fan Control Thermistor Error) ATDC Error (Vcont value abnormal error) ATDC Error (Astd value abnormal error) Cassette Liftup Error (Optional third cassette) Cassette Liftup Error (Optional fourth cassette) Fuser Error Drum fuse Error ATDC Error (Initialize time-up error) ATDC Error (Disconnection error) ATDC Error (Toner density control time-up error) ATDC Error (Toner density high concentration error) ATDC Error (Toner density low concentration error) Toner Empty Sensor Error
4.5.1 Check the error message
When certain machine problems occur a Service call message will appear on the LCD. When this message appears, access the printer maintenance mode to determine the cause of the error. If there are detail numbers to that error, the numbers are also available to see on this mode. The error message will be displayed on the LCD:
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <6>, and select Service Call and press [Enter].
2. The detail of printer error will be displayed.
3. If two or more errors have occurred at the same time, press < > or < > of the cursor key to see all the messages. 4. Press <Reset> to go back to the standby screen.
4-8
04: Second Rx motor error

Causes: The machine checks the motor error signal from two minutes after the second Rx motor starts driving. When the error signal is detected for 100 ms, this messages will be displayed. Suggested corrective action: 1. Check the connection between RX Motor2 and the PRT PCB. 2. Verify the RX Motor2 rotates when the Power is ON. 3. Check the Power is supplied to the RX Motor2. 4. Replace the RX Motor1 if it doesn't rotate. 5. Replace the PRT PCB. 6. Replace the Main Control board.
06: Cassette Liftup Error (First cassette) 07: Cassette Liftup Error (Optional second cassette) 15: Cassette Liftup Error (Optional third cassette) 16: Cassette Liftup Error (Optional fourth cassette)
Causes: The liftup sensor does not switch on within 10 seconds, after the cassette starts to lift up the paper. Suggested corrective action: 1. In error 06 (cassette 1), check the connection between the Lift up motor and the PRT PCB. In error 07, 15 or 16 (cassette 2, 3 or 4), check the connection between the Lift up motor and the Casette PCB, and the connection between the cassette PCB and Main PCB. 2. Verify the Lift up motor rotates when the cassette close. 3. Replace the Lift up motor. 4. In error 06 (cassette 1), replace the PRT PCB. In error 07, 15 or 16 (cassette 2, 3 or 4), replace the cassette. 5. Replace the Main Control board.
08: Rx motor error

Causes: The machine checks the motor error signal from two minutes after the Rx motor starts driving. When the error signal is detected for 100 ms, this messages will be displayed. Suggested corrective action: 1. Check the connection between RX Motor1 and the PRT PCB. 2. Verify the RX Motor1 rotates when the Power is ON. 3. Check the Power is supplied to the RX Motor1. 4. Replace the RX Motor1 if it doesn't rotate. 5. Replace the PRT PCB. 6. Replace the Main Control board.
4-9
0B: Fan Error

Causes: The machine checks the fan error signal after two seconds from the time when the Rx motor starts driving. When the error signal is detected for 100 ms, this message will be displayed. Suggested corrective action: 1. Verify the inside FAN rotates when the Power is ON. 2. Check the connection between the FAN and the PRT PCB. 3. Replace the FAN if it doesn't rotate. 4. Replace the PRT PCB. 5. Replace the Main Control board.
0D: Temperature / Humid Sensor Error

Suggested corrective action: 1. Check the connection between the Temp/Humid Sensor and the PRT PCB. 2. Replace the Temp/Humid Sensor. 3. Replace the PRT PCB. 4. Replace the Main Control board.
0E: Fan Control Thermistor Error

Suggested corrective action: 1. Check the connection between the Thermistor PCB and the LPH PCB. 2. Check the connection between the LPH PCBand the Main Contorl PCB. 3. Replace the Thermistor PCB. 4. Replace the Main Control board. 5. Replace the LPH PCB.
11: ATDC Error (Vcont value abnormal error) 12: ATDC Error (Astd value abnormal error) 46: ATDC Error (Initialize time-up error) 47: ATDC Error (Disconnection error)
Vcont (Vlotage control) : This is the voltage that controls the ATDC sensor. Astd (Answer standard) : This is target value of the toner density on the drum surface. Suggested corrective action: 1. Check the connection between the Drum Cartridge and the PRT PCB. 2. Check the connection between the PRT PCB and the Main Control board. 3. Replace the Drum Cartridge. 4. Replace the PRT PCB. 5. Replace the Main Control board.
4-10
18: Fuser error

Causes: When the fuser miss to fill out the following conditions: (The number indicates the detailed error code on the LCD) 1 The fuser detected a temperature between 40 C and 90 for 100ms at standby. 2 The fuser does not become to 170 C within 60 seconds while picking up paper. 3 The fuser does not become to 125 C within 25 seconds while start printing. 4 The fuser does not become 105 C within 25 seconds when warming up has started. Or, the fuser does not become 125 C within 30 seconds when warming up has finished. 5 The fuser detected a temperature higher than 250 C. 6 The fuser does not become warmer more than 8 seconds during printing. 7 The fuser detected a lower temperature than 35 C after the heater is set to ON for four seconds. 8 The fuser detected a higher temperature than 190 C for 50 ms when sleep mode temperature (35 C ) and standby mode temperature (145 C ) is set up. Suggested corrective action: 1. Turn on the power again, and verify the fuser warms up. 2. Check the connection between Fusing thermistor and Main Control board. 3. Check the connection between Main Control board and LVPS. 4. Check the connection between Fuser and LVPS. 5. Replace the Fuser. 6. After Replace the fuser, verify the fuser warms up when the power is ON. 7. Replace the Main Control board. 8. After Replace the Main Control board, verify the fuser warms up when the power is ON. 9. Replace the LVPS.
1E: Drum fuse error

Causes: The machine could not blowout of the fuse. Suggested corrective action: 1. Check the connection between the Drum Cartridge and the PRT PCB. 2. Check the connection between the PRT PCB and Main Control board. 3. Replace the PRT PCB. 4. Replace the Drum Cartridge.
49: ATDC Error (Toner density control time-up) 4A: ATDC Error (Toner density high concentration error) 4B: ATDC Error (Toner density low concentration error)
Suggested corrective action: 1. Check the connection between the Drum Cartridge and the PRT PCB. 2. Check the connection between the PRT PCB and the Main Control board. 3. Replace the Drum Cartridge. 4. Replace the PRT PCB. 5. Replace the Main Control board. 6. Replace the Screw Clutch. 4-11
4D:Toner Empty Sensor Error

Suggested corrective action:
1. Check the connection between the Toner Empty Sensor and the PRT PCB. 2. Check the connenction between the PRT PCB and Main Control board. 3. Replace the Toner Empty Sensor. 4. Replace the PRT PCB. 5. Replace the Main Control board.
4-12
4.6 Error Codes

If an error occurs during a communication, a check message will be printed. The following provides an explanation of the information found on check messages. A possible solution to the problem The date and time of the attempted communication The sending location (if the remote fax has a Location ID) The number of pages which got through before the error terminated the call The error code The sample document.
You will also see a code listed in the Result column of the report. Result codes indicate the specific problem encountered: D codes occur while dialing R codes occur during reception T codes occur during transmission
Here is a list of error codes the fax machine may print.
4.6.1 Dialing errors

D.0.2 D.0.3, D.0.8 D.0.6, D.0.7 The remote unit is busy. Try the call again. The remote unit didnt respond, the call couldnt be completed or stop was pressed during dialing. Retry the call. If your machine repeats the message, call the remote fax units operator and verify that unit is operating properly. Either the remote unit didnt respond, the call somehow didnt go through or <Stop> was pressed during dialing. Try the call again.
4-13
4.6.2 Transmission errors

T.1.1 T1 time-out. The remote fax machine didnt respond to your machine. This usually occurs during a manual transmission or when an incorrect number was dialed. Call someone at the remote machine. Someone pressed <Stop> during fax transmission. CFR or FTT was not received from the remote machine. Either the phone line disconnected during fax communication or transmission became impossible due to bad phone line conditions. Try the call again. It may be necessary to increase the output levels on Machine Parameter 001. The receive machine may also have closed network or block junk fax enabled. The two fax machines were incompatible. No mailbox at receiver or security transmission is enabled. FTT was received from the remote machine at 2400 bps. Bad phone line conditions made fax communication impossible. Conditions can change rapidly, so try the call later. Turn on the echo protect tone on Memory Switch 010. Also adjust the interval between DCS and TCF on Memory Switch 011. If the problem persists, try increasing the output levels on Machine Parameter 001. The page counter in the fax machine detected a document feeder error during transmission. Carefully re-insert the document into the feeder and re-try the call. No response to MPS/EOP/EOM. Poor phone lines caused the receiving unit to disconnect. Adjust the interval between CFR and data on Memory Switch 011. Try increasing the output levels on Machine Parameter 001. It may also be necessary to adjust the transmit speed on Machine Parameter 001. RTN was received from the remote machine. After transmission began, poor line conditions developed. Try the call again. Attempt the solutions described for the T.4.1 error. Poor line conditions prevented transmission. PIP was received. The transmission was interrupted by the call mode. The receiving unit may be experiencing problems. Try the call again. No response to RR from the remote machine. Line noise or other problems prevented ECM transmission. Increase the ECM response time on Memory Switch 012. No response to CTC. Line noise or other problems prevented ECM transmission. Increase the ECM response time on Memory Switch 012. EOR was received from the remote unit but further transmission was not possible. Adjust Memory Switch 015 for this problem. A compatibility error occurred. Line noise or other problems prevented line probing. The remote fax machine didnt complete the equalizer training phase.
T.1.4 T.2.1
T.2.2 T.2.3
T.3.1 T.4.1
T.4.2
T.4.4
T.5.1 T.5.2 T.5.3 T.8.1 T.8.10 T.8.11
4-14
4.6.3 Reception errors

R.1.1 R.1.2 R.1.4 R.2.3 T1 time-out. The calling unit was not a fax machine or the transmitting unit is having difficulties. The two fax machines were incompatible. Your machine sends and receives only ITU-T Group 3 fax communication, the industry standard since the early 1980s. Someone pressed <Stop> during fax reception. Poor phone line conditions made fax communication impossible. Enable the one second pause after CED on Memory Switch 020. Also try increasing the echo wait time on Memory Switch 021 if echo is on the line. No response to CFR. DCN was received from the transmitter. Poor line conditions made communication impossible. Adjust the echo wait time on Memory Switch 021. Try increasing the output levels via Machine Parameter 001. Too many errors were detected during data reception. The carrier was interrupted. Increase the data error rate on Memory Switch 020. DCN was received after FTT. Communication was not possible at 2400 bps. Poor phone line conditions prevented fax communication. Enable the Eye Quality Check on Memory Switch 031 and 032. The machine received too large length data that over your machines limit. MPS/EOM/EOP was not received. Either the line disconnected before reception was completed or too many errors were detected by the receiving unit. Adjust the data error rate on Memory Switch 020. It may also be necessary to decrease the receive communication speed via Memory Switch 020. The receiving fax machine has reached its memory capacity. DCN was received instead of RR during ECM communication. Line noise or other problems prevented ECM reception. A compatibility error occurred. Line noise or other problems prevented line probing. The fax machine timed out while waiting for the retrain signal.
R.3.1
R.3.3 R.3.4
R.4.1 R.4.2
R.4.4 R.5.1 R.5.2 R.8.1 R.8.10 R.8.11
4-15
4.7 LCD Failure

Symptom 1 The LCD shows nothing. What to confirm 1. Is the power switch turned on?. 2. Does the electrical outlet have access to power? 3. Is the auto power off mode ON? (Is the Energy Save Mode lamp illuminated?) 4. Has the power supply fuse blown out? 5. Do CN2-13 and 14 of the power supply have +3.3V output? Yes No Yes No Yes No Yew No Yes No Countermeasure Check No.2. Turn on the power switch. Check No.3. Check the power routing to the outlet. Press the Energy Save Mode button to reset the mode. Check No.4. Check No.4. Check No.5. Check No.6. Replace the power supply. Check No.7 Check the harness between the power and Main PCB. Check No.8. Check the harness between the power and Main PCB. Replace the LCD. Check No.9. Replace the Panel A PCB. Check No.10. Replace the Main PCB. Replace the machine.
6. Do P12-13 and 14 on the Main PCB Yes have +3.3V output? No 7. Do P110-1 and 2 on the PANEL A PCB have +3.3V? 8. If you replace the LCD, the symptom will be fixed. 9. If you replace the Panel A PCB, the symptom will be fixed. 10. If you replace the Main PCB, the symptom will be fixed. Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No
* If none of the solutions work, then replace the machine.
4-16
4.8 Machine malfunction

No. 1 Symptom The LCD shows Please close the blinking cover. What to confirm 1. If you close the blinking cover, the symptom will be fixed. 2. Is the cover secured firmly by screws? 3. 1) Open the front cover or the side cover. If you press INTERLOCK, the PRT PCB P152-3 will change to +24V through 0V. 2) Open the ADF/RADF cover. ADF model If you press the TXIL, the ADF PCB P1482-5 will change to +3V through 0V. RADF model If you press the PI10(COVER), the ADF driver PCB CN9-6 will change to +3V through 0V. 3) Open the side cover 1. If you press the J1COP, the PRT PCB P165-7 will change to +3V through 0V. 4) Open the side cover 2, 3 and 4. If you press the J2COP, J3COP or J4COP, the cassette PCB P4-1 will change to +3V through 0V. 4. If you replace the harness between the Main PCB and the casette PCB, the message will disappear. 5. If you replace the Main PCB, the message will disappear. Yes No Replace the J1COP. Check No.4 Yes No Yes No No Yes Countermeasure Solved. Check No.2. Check No.3. Secure the cover properly. Replace the INTERLOCK. Check No.4.
No Yes
Replace the TXIL or the PI10(COVER). Check No.4
Yes No
Replace the J2COP, J3COP or J4COP. Check No.4 Replace the harness. Check No.5. Replace the Main PCB. Replace the machine.
Yes No Yes No
* If none of the solutions work, then replace the machine.
4-17
No. 2
Symptom
What to confirm Yes No
Countermeasure Check No. 2. Check No. 3
Documents jam 1. Did you feed a single document? frequently. The LCD shows Please reset the document. 2. Did you use thin paper or converted paper? 3. Did you set documents more than the capacity? 4. If you set documents within the capacity, the symptom be fixed. 5. Did you use wrinkled or curled documents? 6. Does the machine still feed documents? 7. Does the machine still discharge documents? 8. Does the clutch rotate properly? 9. Does the separate roller work properly? 10. Does the transfer gear work properly? 11. (ADF model) Does the ADF motor, lead motor and paper supply motor rotate properly? (RADF model) Does the feed motor (M1) and pickup motor (M2) rotate properly? 12. Is the separation pressure appropriate? 13. Do CN2-3, 4, 5 and 6 of the power supply have +24V output? 14. If you replace the harness between the power supply and the Main PCB, the message will disappear. 15. Do P12-3, 4 and 5, and P6 on the Main PCB have +24V output ? 16. Has the DS1 or PI10 (EMPTY) sensor been installed properly? 17. Does the feeler for the DS1 or PI10 (EMPTY) sensor work properly? 18. Does the feeler for the DS2 or PI7(READ) sensor work properly? 19. Are there any foreign objects stuck around paper guides?
Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No
Recommend the customer to use the book scanner. Check No. 8. Check No. 4. Check No. 5. Solved. Check No. 5. Recommend the customer to use the book scanner. Check No. 6. Check No. 7. Check No. 8. Check No. 23. Check No. 24. Check No. 9. Check the clutch condition. Check No. 11. Check No. 9. Check No. 10. Adjust the gear.
Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No
Check No. 12. Replace the ADF motor, lead motor or the paper supply motor. Check No. 12. Replace the feed motor (M1) or pickup motor (M2). Check No. 18. Adjust the separation pressure. Check No. 13. Replace the power supply. Replace the harness between the power supply and Main PCB . Check No. 15. Check No. 16. Replace the Main PCB. Check No. 17. Re-install it properly. Check No. 18. Replace the DS1 or PI10 (EMPTY) sensor. Check No. 19. Replace the DS2 or PI7(READ) sensor. Remove the objects. Check No. 20.
4-18
No. 2
Symptom Documents jam frequently. The LCD shows Please reset the document.
What to confirm 20. (ADF model) Does the voltage level of P1487-1 on the ADF PCB change to +0V when the DS1 is ON, and to +3V when the DS1 is OFF? (RADF model) Does the voltage level of CN9 pin 3 on the ADF driver PCB change to +0V when the PI10 (EMPTY) is ON, and to +3V when the PI10 (EMPTY) is OFF? 21. If you replace the DS1 or PI10 (EMPTY) sensor, the symptom will be fixed. 22. (ADF model) Does the voltage level of P1486-1 on the ADF PCB change to +0V when the DS2 is ON, and to +3V when the DS2 is OFF? (RADF model) Does the voltage level of CN8 pin 6 on the ADF driver PCB change to +0V when the PI7(READ) is ON, and to +3V when the PI7(READ) is OFF? 23. If you replace the DS2 or PI7(READ) sensor, the symptom will be fixed. 24. Is the separation roller dirty? 25. Is the pad separator dirty?
Countermeasure
Yes No
Check No. 22. Check No. 21.
Yes No
Yes No
Replace the DS1 or PI10 (EMPTY). Replace the PRT PCB.
Yes No
Yes No
Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No
Replace the DS2 or PI7(READ) Replace the PRT PCB. Replace the separation roller. Check No. 25. Replace the pad separator. Replace the machine. Check No. 2. Turn it ON. Check No. 3. Replace the ink pad. Replace the solenoid. Check No. 4. Check No. 5. Replace the power supply.
Complete mark is not stamped.
1. Is the stamp setting ON? 2. Does the stamp has ink? 3. If you replace the solenoid, the symptom will be fixed. 4. Do CN2 pin 3,4,5 and 6 of the power supply have +24V output? 5. (ADF model) Does P1484 pin 1 on the ADF PCB have +24V output? (RADF model) Does CN10 pin 1 and 2 on the ADF drive PCB have +24V output? 6. If you replace the ADF PCB or ADF drive PCB, the symptom will be fixed. 7. If you replace the harness between the ADF PCB and scanner PCB, ADF driver PCB and scanner PCB the symptom will be fixed. 8. If you replace the scanner PCB, the symptom will be fixed.
Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No
Check No. 7. Check No. 6. Check No. 7. Check No. 6. Replace the PCB. Check No. 7. Replace the harness. Check No. 8.
Replace the PCB. Replace the machine.
4-19
No. 4
Symptom
What to confirm Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No
Countermeasure Check No. 2. Re-adjust the guides properly. Set only the same size documents. Check No. 3. Remove the objects. Check No. 4. Replace them. Check No. 5. Check their operations. Check No. 6.
Documents skew 1. Have the document guides been adjusted properly? 2. Did you place different size documents at the same time? 3. Are there any foreign objects on the paper pass? 4. Have the separator roller and the pad separator been worn out? 5. Are there any problems with on the installations and operations of the separator roller and the pad separator? 6. Is the outer guide A deformed?
Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No
Fix or replace it. Replace the machine. Recommend customer to use the book scanner. Check No. 2. Remove the objects. Check No. 3. Check No. 5. Check No. 7. Repair or replace it. Check No. 7. Replace the roller. Replace the machine. Remove the objects. Check No. 2. Check No. 3. Check No. 14. Check No. 4. Re-attach the sheet document press. Clean the sheet document press. Check No. 5. Clean the glasses. Check No. 6. Clean the mirror. Check No. 7. Connect the harness. Check No. 8. Check the sensor. Check No. 9. Replace the sensor. Check No. 10. Secure the belt properly. Replace the machine.
Documents get wrinkled or torn frequently.
1. Are they thin documents?
2. Are there any foreign objects on the document tray? 3. Do the documents get wrinkled or torn around the feeding entry area? 4. Has the entry area of the outer guide A been deformed? 5. Is the roller separator dirty. 6 The warning 1. Are there any foreign objects message Lamp (including documents) on the docuerror. Call for serment glass? vice. appears. 2. Has the lamp been illuminated? 3. Has the sheet document press been properly attached to the back side of the platen cover? 4. Is the sheet document press dirty? 5. Are the contact glass and the document glass dirty? 6. Is the mirror dirty? 7. Has the CCD harness come off? 8. Is the home sensor getting loose? 9. If you replace the home sensor, the symptom will be fixed. 10. Has the mirror carriage drive belt been secured properly?
4-20
No.
Symptom
What to confirm
Countermeasure
The message Paper supply empty. appears.
1. Did you load paper in the cassette properly? 2. Is there electrical continuity in the harness between the PES sensor and the PRT PCB? 3. Is there electrical continuity in the harness between the Main PCB and the PRT PCB? 4. If you replace the PES sensor, the message will disappear. 5. If you replace the PRT PCB, the message will disappear. 6. If you replace the Main PCB, the message will disappear.
Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No
Check No.2. Re-load paper. Check No. 3. Replace the harness between the PES sensor and the PRT PCB. Replace the harness between the Main PCB and the cassette PCB. Check No. 4. Replace the PES sensor. Check No. 5. Replace the PRT PCB. Checak No. 6. Replace the Main PCB. Replace the machine. Remove the paper. Check No. 2. Check No. 3, and the PSS sensor. Replace the PSS sensor or the PRT PCB. Replace the harness between the PDS sensor and the Main PCB. Replace the PSS sensor or the PDS sensor. Check No. 5. Replace the PRT PCB. Check No. 6. Replace the Main PCB. Replace the machine. Check No. 2. Solved Check No. 3. Re-install it properly. Replace the casette. Replace the machine. Check No. 2. The senders problem. (It might be caused by using unsuitable documents, or sender transmission problems.)
Paper jams or the message Open the blinking cover and check...... appears.
1. Is there any paper jam on the paper pass? 2. Is there electrical continuity in the harness between the PSS sensor and the PRT PCB? 3. Is there electrical continuity in the harness between the PDS sensor and the Main PCB? 4. If you replace the PSS sensor or the PDS sensor, the message will disappear. 5. If you replace the PRT PCB, the message will disappear. 6. If you replace the Main PCB, the message will disappear.
Documents skew
1. If you re-load the document and make more than 10 copies, a document skew still occurs. 2. Has the paper cassette been installed properly? 3. Does the cassette have any malfunctions?
10 When using the auto feeder, the reception image expanded.
1. If you print Checkered Pattern, the image will expands more vertically than horizontally. Note: The following causes are also possible. The sender sent the document data using unsuitable documents like excessively thick paper, no carbon paper, rear carbon paper, and so on. 2. Is the drawing force of the feed roller B and the heat roller correct?
Yes No
Check No. 3. Clean the feed roller B. Replace the feed roller B and the fuser. Solved. Replace the machine.
3. If you replace the Main PCB, the symptom will be fixed.
Yes No
4-21
No.
Symptom
What to confirm 1. If you print Checkered Pattern, the image is more compressed vertically than horizontally. 2. If you replace the feed roller B and the fuser, the symptom will be fixed. 3. If you replace the Main PCB, the symptom will be fixed. Yes No
Countermeasure Check No. 2. The senders problem. (It might be caused by sender transmission problems.) Solved. Check No. 3. Solved. Replace the machine. Check No. 2. The senders problem. (Possible causes are inappropriate contrast setting, using colored documents, poor line connection, using unsuitable documents, or sender transmission problems.) Replace the toner or the drum cartridge. Refer to the 4.7 The Image Quality Problems. Follow the instruction manual. Check No. 2. Check No. 3. Replace the Main PCB. Replace the Main PCB. Replace the machine. Press <Reset> to delete the LCD message. Check No. 2. Check No. 3. Disconnect the line, then press the transmission switch. Restart the transmission after printing the check messages. Check No. 4. Replace the panel A PCB. Check No. 5. Replace the harness between the PCB panel A PCB and the Main PCB. Check No. 6. Replace the Main PCB. Replace the machine.
11 When using the auto feeder, the reception image compressed.
Yes No Yes No Yes No
12 The printouts are 1. Are copied and test print images too too light. light, or uneven density? Note: The following causes are also possible. The contrast setting might be not appropriate. Contrast irregularities are likely on printouts of documents containing thin lines. 2. If you replace the toner or the drum cartridge, the symptom will be fixed.
Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No
13 Clock malfunction
1. Are there any errors in the clock setting process? 2. Is it possible to reset the clock? 3. If you replace the Main PCB, the symptom will be fixed.
14 The LCD does not show the message for receiving or sending a FAX.
1. Is an error message displayed on the LCD? 2. Has the phone line been connected?
3. Are the check messages printing during fax transmission? 4. If you replace the panel A PCB, the symptom will be fixed. 5. If you replace the harness between the panel A PCB and the Main PCB, the symptom will be fixed. 6. If you replace the Main PCB, the symptom will be fixed.
4-22
No. Symptom 15 The machine does not receive or send a FAX.
What to confirm 1. Is the machine verifying the password? 2. Is the password correct? Yes No Yes No 3. Have the machine parameter output and the memory switch equalizer been set properly? 4. If you replace the NCU PCB, the symptom will be fixed. 5. If you replace the harness between the NCU PCB and the Main PCB, the symptom will be fixed. 6. If you replace the harness between the panel A PCB and the Main PCB, the symptom will be fixed. 7. If you replace the panel A PCB, the symptom will be fixed. 8. If you replace the Main PCB, the symptom will be fixed. Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No
Countermeasure Check No. 2. Check No. 3. Stop using the password verification, then check No. 3. Match with the password Check No. 4. Adjust the settings properly. Replace the NCU PCB. Check No. 5. Replace the harness between the NCU PCB and the Main PCB . Check No. 6. Replace the harness between the panel A PCB and the Main PCB . Check No. 7. Replace the panel A PCB. Check No. 8. Replace the Main PCB. Replace the machine. Check No. 2. Press auto memory reception key to illuminate the lamp. Replace the NCU PCB . Check No. 3. Replace the harness between the NCU PCB and the Main PCB . Check No. 4. Replace the harness between the panel A PCB and the Main PCB . Check No. 5. Replace the panel A PCB . Check No. 6. Replace the Main PCB . Replace the machine. Check No. 2. Set the correct line type. Replace the NCU PCB. Check No. 3. Replace the harness. Check No. 4. Replace the harness. Check No. 5. Replace the panel A PCB. Check No. 6. Replace the Main PCB. Replace the machine.
16 The auto memory reception does not work.
1. Has the auto memory receive lamp been illuminated? 2. If you replace the NCU PCB, the symptom will be fixed. 3. If you replace the NCU PCB, the symptom will be fixed. 4. If you replace the harness between panel A PCB and the Main PCB , the symptom will be fixed. 5. If you replace the panel A PCB, the symptom will be fixed. 6. If you replace the Main PCB, the symptom will be fixed.
17 A dial signal output fails after entering the number from the numeric keys.
1. Has the line type setting been set correctly ? 2. If you replace the NCU PCB, the symptom will be fixed. 3. If you replace the harness between the NCU PCB and the Main PCB, the symptom will be fixed. 4. If you replace the harness between the panel A PCB and the Main PCB, the symptom will be fixed. 5. If you replace the panel A PCB, the symptom will be fixed. 6. If you replace the Main PCB, the symptom will be fixed.
4-23
No.
Symptom
What to confirm Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No
Countermeasure Set the volume except OFF. Check No. 2. Check No. 3. Set up the setting. Replace the speaker. Check No. 4. Replace the Main PCB. Replace the machine. Check No. 2. Check No. 10.
18 The transmission 1. Has the volume setting been set to monitor does not OFF? work. 2. Has the setting for the transmission monitor been set up? 3. If you replace the speaker, the symptom will be fixed. 4. If you replace the Main PCB, the symptom will be fixed. 19 An unusual sound occurs. 1. Does the sound occurs while scanning? 2. Does the sound occurs while scanning using the ADF/RADF or FBS. 3. Are there any objects interfering with the roller or the roller pole? 4. Has the motor (ADF) sounded abnormal? 5. Are there any foreign objects around the gear (ADF)? 6. Has the motor (FBS) sounded abnormal? 7. Are there any foreign objects around the gear (FBS)? 8. Are there any foreign objects around the FBS pulley? 9. Are there any foreign objects on the Mirror carriage path? 10. Does the sound occur while printing? 11. If you remove the drum or toner cartridge, the symptom will be fixed. 12. Are there any foreign objects around the drum gear, fuser gear or transfer gear? 13. If you replace the drum or toner cartridge, the symptom will be fixed. 14. If you replace the transfer roller or the fusing unit, the symptom will be fixed. 15. Are there any foreign objects around the transferring parts? 16. Does the fan rotate smoothly? 17. If you replace the Main PCB, the symptom will be fixed.
ADF Check No. 3. FBS Check No. 6. Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Remove the objects. Check No. 4. Clean the rollers / Check the harness. Check No. 5. Remove the objects. Check No. 17. Check the harness. Check No. 7. Remove the objects. Check No. 8. Remove the objects. Check No. 9. Clean the path using dustless cloth. Check No. 17. Check No. 11. Check No. 17. Replace either cartridge or both. Check No. 12. Remove the objects. Check No. 13. Replace either cartridge or both. Check No. 14. Replace the transfer roller or the fusing unit. Check No. 15. Remove the objects. Check No. 16. Check No. 17. Replace the parts. Replace the Main PCB. Replace the machine.
4-24
No.
Symptom
What to confirm 1. Is the memory backed up with the following procedure? 1) During transmission First disconnect the phone line, then send the data. Next, turn the machine off while waiting for re-dial. When you turn the machine on again, the document memory should remain. 2) During reception Initiate out of memory reception without the document, then turn the machine off. When you turn the machine on again, the document memory should remain. 2. Has the battery been set to the voice PCB? 3. Have the voice PCB and the battery been connected to P2? 4. Has the voice PCB been connected to the Main PCB? 5. Is the voltage between the GND and the Main PCB P2 pin 13 and 14 within the correct range? (+3.57V through +3.13V) 6. Is the battery voltage within the possible value (above 2.2V) to be backed up? 7. Did you charge the battery for more than 24 hours? 8. If you replace the power supply, the symptom will be fixed. 9. If you replace the Main PCB, the symptom will be fixed. Yes No
Countermeasure No problem. Check No. 2.
20 The document memory can not be backed up.
Yes No
Put a jumper pin on JP2 of the Main PCB to back up. Check No. 2.
Check No. 4. Set the battery. Check No. 5. Connect the harness. Check No. 5. Connect the harness. Check No. 7. Check No. 6.
Check No. 7. Replace the battery. Check No. 8. Charge the battery. Replace the power supply. Check No. 9. Replace the symptom. Replace the machine.
4-25
No.
Symptom
What to confirm 01 03 Yes No
Countermeasure Check No. 2. Check No. 3. Check No. 7. Replace the NCU PCB or the harness. Check No. 4. Check No. 6. Check No. 5. Replace the OfficeBridge board or the Network interface board.
21 The message 1. Check the error code. Systemstatus instabil Strom aus- und ein XX 2. Is the NCU PCB correctly connected to the Main PCB? (Check the harness is displayed on connecting NCU PCB P90 and Main the LCD. PCB P9) XX indicates the 3. Is the OfficeBridge board or the Neterror code 01 work interface board equipped to the or 03 machine? 01: Modem PCB error 4. Is the OfficeBridge board or the 03: Error of Network interface board correctly coninitializing nected to the Main PCB? optional con(Check the harness connecting to necting PCB Main PCB P7) 5. Is the printer control board equipped to the machine? 6. Is the printer control board correctly connected to the Main PCB? (Check the harness connecting to Main PCB P6) 7. Turn off the machine and wait for more than three minutes. Turn the machine on. Does the message disappear? 8. If you replace the Main PCB, the symptom will be fixed.
Yes No Yes No
Yes No Yes No
Check No. 6. Check No. 7. Check No. 7. Replace the printer control board or the Joint PCB. Solved. heck No. 8. Replace the Main PCB. Replace the machine.
Yes No Yes No
4-26
4.9 The Image Quality Problems

If any image failure has occurred, first make the initial checks (refer to page 4-1), then proceed to the corresponding image failure troubleshooting procedure. Check the parameters for image quality adjustments and see if the problems solves. Adjust the background level and see if the problem solves. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9> and select Background level, and press <Start>.) Determine if the failure is attributable to the input system (Scanner Section) or the output system (Printer section):
1. Make copy full size copy of a document.
(Original)
(Copy)
2. Make a reduction copy of the document.
(Original)
(Copy) - Input system cause scanner
(Original)
(Copy) - Output system cause: printer
4-27
4.9.1 Blank Copy or black copy

Typical Fault Image:
Blank copy: Section Scanner
Step Check Item Result Action 1 Is the Scanner drive transmisNO Check and change as necession mechanism in good condisary. tion? 2 Do the connections from CCD NO Reconnect. Scanner PCB Main PCB YES Change Scanner PCB, Main LPH PCB LED unit rePCB in that order. main intact? Step Check Item 1 Does the Exposure Lamp turn ON when make a copy with open the platen cover? 2 Does the voltage across P140B pin 1 on the Scanner PCB change from DC0V to DC24V when step 1 is performed again? Does the voltage across P147 pin 2 on the Scanner PCB change to Low when step 1 is performed again? Are the mirrors and lens installed properly? Are the mirrors and lens dirty? Result Action YES Perform steps 4 and onward. NO NO Check connectors and harnesses and perform steps 2 and 3. Change Scanner PCB.
Black copy: Section Scanner
YES NO NO YES
Change Inverter or exposure lamp, in that order. Change Scanner PCB. Install them properly. Clean or change.
4 5
4-28
Blank copy and black copy: Section Drum cartridge Step Check Item 1 Developing Unit is driven properly. 2 Developing bias contact terminal, glide bias, sealed ground or come electrode is dirty or deformed. 3 Is the LED unit (lever B3) set properly? 4 5 6 LED unit and LPH PCB connected properly? Image transfer current contact terminal is dirty or deformed. Is the trouble settled with above steps? Result Action NO Correct or change drive coupling mechanism. YES Clean or change the drum cartridge. NO NO YES NO Install it properly. Correct. Clean or change the terminal. Change drum cartridge. Change LED unit. Change High Voltage Power Supply. Change LPH PCB. Change PRT PCB. Change Main PCB.
LED unit PCBs Transfer -
4-29
4.9.2 Low Image Density or rough image

Section Scanner
Step Check Item 1 Image transfer current contact terminal is dirty or deformed. 2 Do the connections from CCD Scanner PCB Main PCB LPH PCB LED unit remain intact? 3 Are the press document plate and contact glass dirty? 4 Are you copying a thick volume while trying to close the platen cover trying to close?
Result Action NO Check and change as necessary. NO Reconnect. YES YES YES Change Scanner PCB, Main PCB, LPH PCB in that order. Clean each parts and set the background level again. Copy with opened platen cover.
Section LED Transfer Drum cartridge
Step Check Item 1 Is the LED unit (lever B3) set properly? 2 3 Image transfer current contact terminal is dirty or deformed. Developing bias contact terminal, grid bias, sealed ground or come electrode is dirty or deformed. Is the trouble settled with above steps?
Result Action NO Install properly. YES YES Clean or change the terminal. Clean or change the drum cartridge. Change drum cartridge. Change transfer roller. Change LED unit. Change High Voltage Power Supply. Change LPH PCB. Change PRT PCB. Change Main PCB.
NO
4-30
4.9.3 Foggy background

Section Scanner
Step Check Item Result Action 1 Sunlight or any other extraneYES Protect the machine from exous light enters the machine. traneous light. 1 Are the press document plate YES Clean each parts and set the and contact glass dirty? background level again. 2 Are you copying a thick volume YES Copy with opened platen covwhile trying to close the platen er. cover trying to close? 3 Are the mirrors and lens dirty? YES Clean or change. 4 Is the Exposure Lamp dirty or YES Clean or change. deteriorated? 5 Do the connections between NO Reconnect. the Exposure Lamp and INVERTER remain intact? 6 Do the connections from INNO Reconnect. VERTER to Scanner PCB remain intact? 7 Do the connections from ScanNO Reconnect. ner PCB to Main PCB remain intact? 8 Do the connections from Main NO Reconnect. PCB to High Voltage Unit remain intact?
Section
Drum cartridge part
Step Check Item 1 Sunlight or any other extraneous light enters the copier. 2 PC Drum is dirty. 3 4 Comb Electrode contact terminal is dirty or deformed. Grid voltage contact terminal is dirty or deformed. Erase Lamp is dirty. Erase Lamp is conducting. Is the trouble settled with above steps?
Result Action YES Protect the copier from extraneous light. YES Change the drum cartridge. YES YES YES NO NO Clean or change the drum cartridge. Clean or change the drum cartridge. Clean. Change. Change drum cartridge. Change LED unit. Change High Voltage Power Supply. Change PRT PCB. Change Main PCB.
Erase lamp
5 6 7
4-31
4.9.4 Black Lines / White Lines

Black lines: Section Scanner Step Check Item 1 Are the mirrors, lens, contact glass or document glass dirty with foreign matter? 2 Do the connections from CCD Scanner PCB Main PCB LPH PCB LED unit remain intact? Result Action YES Clean. NO YES Reconnect. Change Scanner PCB or Main PCB in that order.
Black lines : Section Paper path Drum cartridge Fuser Step 1 2 3 4 Check Item Paper path is dirty with toner. OPC Drum is dirty Fusing rollers are dirty or scratchy. Is the trouble settled with above steps? Result YES YES YES NO Action Clean Change the drum cartridge. Change the fuser. Change drum cartridge. Change LPH PCB. Change PRT PCB. Change Main PCB.
White lines: Section Scanner Step Check Item 1 Are the contact glass or document glass dirty with foreign matter? 2 Do the connections from CCD Scanner PCB Main PCB LPH PCB LED unit remain intact? Result Action YES Clean. NO YES Reconnect. Change Scanner PCB or Main PCB in that order.
White lines : Section Transfer roller Drum cartridge Fuser LED Step Check Item Result Action 1 Image Transfer Roller is dented YES Change the transfer roller. or scratchy. 2 OPC Drum is dirty. YES Change the fuser. 3 Fusing rollers are dirty or YES Clean or change. scratchy. 4 LED is dirty. YES Clean. 5 Is the LED unit (lever B3) set NO Install properly. properly? 6 Is the trouble settled with NO Change the drum cartridge. above steps? Change LPH PCB . Change PRT PCB . Change Main PCB .
4-32
4.9.5 Black Spots

Section Scanner
Step Check Item 1 Are the mirrors, lens, contact glass or document glass dirty with foreign matter? 2 Do the connections from CCD Scanner PCB Main PCB PCB LPH LED unit remain intact?
Result Action YES Clean. YES NO Change Scanner PCB, Main PCBin that order. Reconnect.
Section Paper pass Fuser Drum cartridge part
Step Check Item 1 Paper pass is dirty with toner. 2 3 4 5 Fuser rollers are dirty or scratchy. OPC Drum is dirty. Comb Electrode contact terminal is dirty or deformed. Grid voltage contact terminal is dirty or deformed. Erase Lamp is dirty. Erase Lamp is conducting. Is the trouble settled with above steps?
Result Action YES Clean. YES YES YES YES YES NO NO Change the fuser. Change drum cartridge. Clean or change drum cartridge. Clean or change drum cartridge. Clean. Change. Change drum cartridge. Change High Voltage Power Supply. Change the transfer roller. Change PRT PCB. Change Main PCB.
Erase lamp
6 7 8
4-33
4.9.6 Void areas

Section Scanner
Step Check Item 1 Are the mirrors, lens, contact glass or document glass dirty with foreign matter? 2 Do the connections from CCD Scanner PCB Main PCB LPH PCB LED unit remain intact?
Result Action YES Clean. YES NO Change Scanner PCB or Main PCB in that order. Reconnect.
Section Drum cartridge Transfer roller Fuser -
Step Check Item 1 OPC Drum is dirty. 2 3 4 Image Transfer Roller is dented or scratchy. Fuser rollers are dirty or scratchy. Is the trouble settled with above steps?
Result Action YES Change drum cartridge. YES YES NO Change the transfer roller. Change the fuser. Change drum cartridge. Change High Voltage Power Supply. Change PRT PCB. Change Main PCB.
4-34
4.9.7 Smear on back

Section Paper path Transfer roller Fuser -
Step Check Item Result Action 1 Paper path is dirty with toner. YES Clean 2 Image Transfer Roller is dented YES Change the transfer roller. or scratchy. 3 Fusing rollers are dirty or YES Change the fuser. scratchy. 4 Is the trouble settled with NO Change drum cartridge. above steps? Change High Voltage Power Supply. Change PRT PCB. Change Main PCB.
4-35
4.9.8 Uneven image density

Section Scanner
Step Check Item Result Action 1 Are the mirrors, lens, contact YES Clean or change. glass or document glass dirty with foreign matter? 2 Is the Shading Sheet under the YES Clean or change. Size cover dirty? 3 Is the Exposure Lamp dirty or YES Clean or change. deteriorated? 4 Do the connections from CCD NO Reconnect. Scanner PCB Main PCB YES Change Scanner PCB or Main LPH PCB LED unit rePCB in that order. main intact?
Section Transfer roller Drum cartridge
Step Check Item Result Action 1 Image Transfer Roller is dented YES Change the transfer roller. or scratchy. 2 Developing unit is driven propNO Correct or change drive couerly? pling mechanism. 3 Developing bias contact termiYES Clean or change the drum carnal, glide bias, sealed ground tridge. or come electrode is dirty or deformed. 4 Is the trouble settled with NO Change drum cartridge. above steps? Change High Voltage Power Supply. Change the transfer roller. Change PRT PCB. Change Main PCB.
4-36
4.9.9 Gradation Reproduction Failure

Section Scanner
Step Check Item Result Action 1 Is the Shading Sheet under the YES Clean or change. Size cover dirty? 2 3 Are the contact glass or document glass dirty with foreign matter? Do the connections from CCD Scanner PCB Main PCB LPH PCB LED unit remain intact? YES NO YES Clean or change. Reconnect. Change Scanner PCB or Main PCB in that order.
Section Transfer roller Drum cartridge
Step Check Item Result Action 1 Image Transfer Roller is dented YES Change the transfer roller. or scratchy. 2 Developing unit is driven propNO Correct or change drive couerly? pling mechanism. 3 Developing bias contact termiYES Clean or change the drum carnal, grid bias, sealed ground tridge. or come electrode is dirty or deformed. 2 Is the trouble settled with NO Change drum cartridge. above steps? Change High Voltage Power Supply. Change LPH PCB. Change PRT PCB. Change Main PCB.
4-37
4.9.10 Periodically Uneven Image

4040F4C500DA
Section Scanner
Step Check Item Result Action 1 Is the FBS Motor drive gear YES Clean or change. cracked or dirty with foreign matter? 2 Is the Scanner Motor secured NO Secure properly. properly? 3 Are the FBS belts attached YES Adjust the belt tension. loose? 4 Is the Mirror carriage secured NO Secure properly. properly? 5 Are the Mirror carriage drive NO Wind the belts properly. belts wound properly? 6 Are the Scanner rails damaged YES Clean or change. or dirty with foreign matter? 7 Do the connections from CCD NO Reconnect. Scanner PCB Main PCB LPH PCB LED unit reYES Change Scanner PCB or Main main intact? PCB in that order.
Section Drum cartridge
Paper transfer section Fusing section
Transfer roller -
Step Check Item Result Action 1 Developing unit is driving propNO Correct or change drive couerly. pling mechanism. 2 OPC Drum and Image Transfer NO Correct or change drive couRoller are driven properly. pling mechanism. 3 Register roller is driven propNO Correct or change drive couerly. pling mechanism. 4 Fusing Unit is driven properly. NO Change the fuser. 5 Fusing rollers are dirty or YES Clean or change the fuser. scratchy. 6 Image Transfer roller is dented YES Change the transfer roller. or scratchy. 7 Is the trouble settled with NO Change drum cartridge. above steps? Change driving unit. Change LPH PCB. Change PRT PCB. Change Main PCB.
4-38
5 Maintenance & Adjustment

5.1 Maintenance schedule ..................................................................................................... 5-2 5.2 Re/Disassemble ............................................................................................................... 5-4 5.2.1 COVERS ................................................................................................................... 5-7 5.2.2 PCBS....................................................................................................................... 5-20 5.2.3 ADF SECTION (MFX-2700 and MFX-2200) ........................................................... 5-37 5.2.4 FBS SECTION ........................................................................................................ 5-54 5.2.5 PRINTER SECTION................................................................................................ 5-74 5.2.6 RADF SECTION (MFX-2725 and MFX-2225)....................................................... 5-128 5.3 Adjustment ................................................................................................................... 5-190 5.3.1 Outline of printer registration adjustment .............................................................. 5-190 5.3.2 Printer registration mode ....................................................................................... 5-190 5.3.3 Registration adjustment......................................................................................... 5-193 5.3.4 Zoom adjustment................................................................................................... 5-198 5.3.5 Separation pressure adjustment ........................................................................... 5-202 5.3.6 ADF skew adjustment (MFX-2700 and MFX-2200) .............................................. 5-203 5.3.7 RADF Adjustment (MFX-2725 and MFX-2225)..................................................... 5-204 5.3.8 Drum ATDC adjustment ........................................................................................ 5-208
5-1
5.1 Maintenance schedule

Scanning Section (ADF) Parts Name Roller Separator *1 Piece Separator *1 Contact glass & Pane *2 Sheet document press (White sheet) *2 Exposure Lamp *2 Roller Feed Roller Exit Maintenance Cycle (pages) Clean Replace 50,000 or 2 years 50,000 or 2 years Clean when dirty Clean when dirty 1,000 hours 100,000 100,000 QTY 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Reference Page 5-40 5-52
5-54, 5-55
5-71 5-56 5-47 5-46
*1 Replace these parts at the same time. *2 It is not a maintenance parts. However, please replace when they do not work. Scanning Section (RADF)
Parts Name White plate (pressure plate) Document glass (large / small) Document glass holder Vertical size plate Platen roller Pickup Roller Unit Lower Registration Roller Maintenance Cycle (pages) Clean Replace As required As required or ever 2000 sheets As required As required As required or ever 2000 sheets 80,000 80,000 80,000 80,000 80,000 80,000 QTY 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Reference
[5]
[1], [4] [2] [3] [6] page 5-137 page 5-142 page 5-148 page 5-148 page 5-153 page 5-158
Delivery Reversing Roller (upper) Reverse guide Unit Read Roller 1 Read Roller 2
[1] [4]
[5] [6]
[3] [2]
5-2
Printer Section
Parts Name Roller Retard Roller Feed Roller Separator / Roller Pickup Roller Pickup MP Pad Pressure MP Maintenance Cycle (pages) Clean Replace 100,000 100,000 100,000 50,000 or 2 years 100,000 100,000 100,000 QTY 1 Reference Page 5-115 5-124 5-118 5-101 5-103
1
1
1
1
Roller Register Roller Exit A, B Roller Transfer Gear at the Roller Transfer Filter Ozone Case dust Developing Section
Parts Name Drum cartridge Toner cartridge Toner cartridge LED print head
60,000 30,000
150,000 150,000 Maintenance Cycle (pages) Clean Replace 100,000 10,000 20,000 1,000 hours
1 1 1 1 1 1
5-99 5-94, 5-95 5-76 5-76 5-126 5-127
QTY 1
Reference Page See Operating Instructions
1
1 1
Note: means to clean the mechanism when a paper take-up or transport failure or print quality problems occurs. Note: The maintenance cycle (pages or years) may be shorter than the above value according to the environment or usage of the machine, and the documents and paper that are used. The maintenance cycle (pages or years) are not insured and early replacement of the parts may be needed to maintain the machine quality.
5-3
5.2 Re/Disassemble
Before disassembling, disconnect the power cord and line cord. 5.2.1 COVERS ................................................................................................................... 5-7 PLATE PRINTER B........................................................................................................ 5-8 COVER PLATEN ........................................................................................................... 5-8 COVER TX SIDE B ........................................................................................................ 5-9 COVER TX SIDE F ...................................................................................................... 5-10 GUIDE OUTER ............................................................................................................ 5-11 COVER LEFT TOP ...................................................................................................... 5-12 COVER RIGHT TOP .................................................................................................... 5-13 COVER FRONT UPPER.............................................................................................. 5-14 COVER BACK TOP ..................................................................................................... 5-15 PLATE PRINTER A...................................................................................................... 5-16 COVER L ..................................................................................................................... 5-16 COVER SIDE R ........................................................................................................... 5-17 COVER BACK SIDE .................................................................................................... 5-17 COVER TRAY .............................................................................................................. 5-18 COVER SPEAKER ...................................................................................................... 5-19 5.2.2 PCBS....................................................................................................................... 5-20 PCB ADF...................................................................................................................... 5-21 PCB PANEL A / PANEL B ........................................................................................... 5-22 LCD .............................................................................................................................. 5-23 PCB CONN MOT ......................................................................................................... 5-25 PCB LPH ...................................................................................................................... 5-26 PCB CCD ..................................................................................................................... 5-27 PCB INVERTER........................................................................................................... 5-28 PCB MAIN .................................................................................................................... 5-29 PCB VOICE.................................................................................................................. 5-30 PCB NCU ..................................................................................................................... 5-31 PCB PRT...................................................................................................................... 5-32 PCB SCANNER ........................................................................................................... 5-33 PCB PSU HV ............................................................................................................... 5-34 PCB PSU ..................................................................................................................... 5-35 PCB BPSIZE ................................................................................................................ 5-36 5.2.3 ADF SECTION (MFX-2700 and MFX-2200) ........................................................... 5-37 TRAY DOCUMENT ...................................................................................................... 5-37 SENSOR (DL1) ............................................................................................................ 5-38 SENSOR (DW1) / SENSOR (DW2) ............................................................................. 5-39 ROLLER SEPARATOR................................................................................................ 5-40 ROLLER PRESS.......................................................................................................... 5-41 GUIDE INNER.............................................................................................................. 5-42 FRAME MOTOR .......................................................................................................... 5-43 CLUTCH (MG) ............................................................................................................. 5-44 CLUTCH (CL)............................................................................................................... 5-45 ROLLER EXIT .............................................................................................................. 5-46 ROLLER FEED ............................................................................................................ 5-47 SENSOR (DS1)............................................................................................................ 5-49 SENSOR (TXIL) ........................................................................................................... 5-50 SENSOR (DS2) / SENSOR (DRS) .............................................................................. 5-51 PIECE SEPARATOR ................................................................................................... 5-52 HINGE .......................................................................................................................... 5-53 5.2.4 FBS SECTION ........................................................................................................ 5-54 CONTACT GLASS ....................................................................................................... 5-54 PANE ........................................................................................................................... 5-55 LAMP ........................................................................................................................... 5-56 CARRIAGE A ............................................................................................................... 5-57 MIRROR A ................................................................................................................... 5-60 CARRIAGE B ............................................................................................................... 5-61 MIRROR B / MIRROR C .............................................................................................. 5-63 MIRROR CARRIAGE ALIGNMENT ............................................................................. 5-64 5-4
SENSOR (HOME) ........................................................................................................ 5-66 SENSOR (BSS) ........................................................................................................... 5-67 FBS MOTOR ................................................................................................................ 5-68 SENSOR (APS) / SENSOR (BIS) ................................................................................ 5-70 SHEET DOCUMENT PRESS ...................................................................................... 5-71 FRAME SCANNER ...................................................................................................... 5-72 5.2.5 PRINTER SECTION................................................................................................ 5-74 TRAY MP ..................................................................................................................... 5-74 COVER JAM ACCESS ................................................................................................ 5-75 ROLLER TRANSFER .................................................................................................. 5-76 ROLLER FEED DUPLEX A ......................................................................................... 5-77 SENSOR (DUP) ........................................................................................................... 5-79 SENSOR (J1-OP) ........................................................................................................ 5-80 MOTOR 1 ..................................................................................................................... 5-81 MOTOR 2 ..................................................................................................................... 5-81 CLUTCH (PAPER REGIST)......................................................................................... 5-82 CLUTCH (PAPER FEED) ............................................................................................ 5-83 PCB DUPLEX .............................................................................................................. 5-84 FRAME DRIVE UNIT DUPLEX .................................................................................... 5-84 MOTOR (Dupex) .......................................................................................................... 5-85 CLUTCH (Duplex) ........................................................................................................ 5-85 SENSOR (THRM) ........................................................................................................ 5-86 FRAME DRIVE A ......................................................................................................... 5-87 SPEAKER .................................................................................................................... 5-89 SENSOR (INTERLOCK) .............................................................................................. 5-90 FUSER UNIT................................................................................................................ 5-91 EXIT ASSY................................................................................................................... 5-92 ROLLER EXIT A .......................................................................................................... 5-94 ROLLER EXIT B .......................................................................................................... 5-95 SENSOR (SWBK) ........................................................................................................ 5-96 SENSOR (PDS) ........................................................................................................... 5-97 LED .............................................................................................................................. 5-98 ROLLER REGISTER ................................................................................................... 5-99 ROLLER PICKUP ...................................................................................................... 5-101 PAD PRESSURE MP................................................................................................. 5-103 SENSOR (PES BS).................................................................................................... 5-104 SENSOR (PSS) ......................................................................................................... 5-105 SOLENOID................................................................................................................. 5-106 FAN ............................................................................................................................ 5-107 CLUTCH (SCREW) .................................................................................................... 5-108 MOTOR (DC) ............................................................................................................. 5-110 SENSOR (TOS) ......................................................................................................... 5-111 SENSOR (CART) ....................................................................................................... 5-114 ROLLER RETARD ..................................................................................................... 5-115 ROLLER PICKUP / ROLLER SEPARATE ................................................................. 5-118 REMOVING THE ROLLER SEPARATE .................................................................... 5-119 REMOVING THE ROLLER PICKUP.......................................................................... 5-120 SENSOR (PES) ......................................................................................................... 5-121 SENSOR (LIFT UP) ................................................................................................... 5-122 SENSOR (PSIZE) ...................................................................................................... 5-123 ROLLER FEED .......................................................................................................... 5-124 FILTER OZONE ......................................................................................................... 5-126 CASE DUST............................................................................................................... 5-127 5.2.6 RADF SECTION (MFX-2725 and MFX-2225)....................................................... 5-128 Removing from the Host Machine .............................................................................. 5-128 Feeder(Cover Platen)................................................................................................. 5-128 External Covers.......................................................................................................... 5-129 Front Cover ................................................................................................................ 5-129 Rear Cover ................................................................................................................. 5-129 Feeder Cover ............................................................................................................. 5-130 Drive System .............................................................................................................. 5-131 Pickup Motor .............................................................................................................. 5-131 Feed Motor ................................................................................................................. 5-132 Timing Belt/Pulley ...................................................................................................... 5-133 Document Feeding System ........................................................................................ 5-137 Pickup Roller Unit....................................................................................................... 5-137 5-5
Pickup Roller/Separation Roller ................................................................................. 5-138 Separation Plate/Separation Pad ............................................................................... 5-140 Upper Registration Roller ........................................................................................... 5-141 Lower Registration Roller ........................................................................................... 5-142 Delivery Reversing Roller (upper) / Reverse Guide Unit ............................................ 5-148 Read Roller 1 ............................................................................................................. 5-153 Read Roller 2 ............................................................................................................. 5-158 Platen Roller............................................................................................................... 5-163 Delivery Reversing Roller (lower)............................................................................... 5-168 Document Tray........................................................................................................... 5-177 Electrical System........................................................................................................ 5-179 Inner Sensor of Feed Unit .......................................................................................... 5-179 Document Width Volume ........................................................................................... 5-185 Cover Open/Closed Sensor ....................................................................................... 5-186 Document Set Sensor ................................................................................................ 5-186 Document Length sensor ........................................................................................... 5-187 Pressurization Solenoid ............................................................................................. 5-188
5-6
5.2.1 COVERS
Cover TX side F (Page5-10) Cover platen (Page5-8)
Cover front upper (Page5-14) Cover panel top (Page5-14) Cover speaker (Page5-19)
Cover left top (Page5-12)
Cover side L sub (Page5-16)
Cover L (Page5-16)
Cover tray (Page5-18)
Tray document
Guide outer (Page5-11) Cover TX side B (Page5-9) Cover back top (Page5-15) Plate printer B (Page5-8) Plate printer A (Page5-16)
Cover right top (Page5-13)
Cover side R (Page5-17)
Cover back side (Page5-17)
5-7
PLATE PRINTER B
1. Remove one Plate printer B mounting screw and then remove the PLATE PRINTER B. 2. Disconnect the connector from the PCB SCANNER. Note: ADF models (MFX-2720, MFX-2320 and MFX-2020) have one connector. RADF models (MFX-2725 and MFX-2325) have two connectors.
PCB scanner
ADG01 1)
Plate printer B Ground wire
Note: When mounting the Plate printer B, pay attention not to allow the Plate printer B to pinch the Harness.
COVER PLATEN
1. Remove the Plate printer B. Page 5-8 2. Open the Cover platen. 3. Raise the Cover platen, incline it, release the hinge tab, and then remove the COVER PLATEN.
Cover platen Hinge
Tab
5-8
COVER TX SIDE B
1. Open the Cover platen. 2. Remove two Cover TX side B mounting screws.
AFF01 AFF01 2) 2)
3. Close the Cover platen. 4. Open the Guide outer. 5. Release three locking tabs, and then remove the COVER TX SIDE B.
Cover TX side B
Guide outer
5-9
COVER TX SIDE F
1. Open the Cover platen. 2. Remove one Cover TX side F mounting screw.
AFF01 2)
3. Close the Cover platen. 4. Open the Guide outer. 5. Release the locking tab, and then remove the COVER TX SIDE F. Cover TX side F Guide outer
5-10
GUIDE OUTER
1. Remove the Cover TX side F. Page 5-10 2. Remove the GUDE OUTER.
Guide outer
5-11
COVER LEFT TOP

1. Open the Cover platen. 2. Remove two Cover left top mounting screws. 3. Raise the Cover left top, release the two locking tabs, and then remove the COVER LEFT TOP.
Cover left top
ADG04 2)
5-12
COVER RIGHT TOP

1. Open the Cover platen. 2. Remove two Cover right top mounting screws. 3. Raise the Cover right top, release the two locking tabs, and then remove the COVER RIGHT TOP.
Cover right top
ADG04 2)
5-13
COVER FRONT UPPER

1. Open the Cover platen. 2. Remove the Cover left top. Page 5-12 3. Remove the Cover right top. Page 5-13 4. Remove four caps and mounting screws. 5. Remove the Cover front upper together with the panel. Cap screw ADG01 4)
Cover front upper Cover panel top
6. Turn over the Cover front top, and then disconnect the connector. 7. Remove three Cover front upper mounting screws at backside of the Panel top front, and then remove the COVER FRONT UPPER. Cover panel top AFF01 7)
Cover front upper
5-14
COVER BACK TOP

1. Remove the Cover platen. Page 5-8 2. Remove the Cover left top. Page 5-12 3. Remove the Cover right top. Page 5-13 4. Remove three Cover size H mounting screws, and then remove the Cover size H. ADG04 4) Cover size H
5. Remove four Cover back top mounting screws, and then remove the COVER BACK TOP by spreading its right and left.
Cover back top ADG04 4)
5-15
PLATE PRINTER A
1. Remove the Plate printer B. Page 5-8 2. Remove eleven Plate printer A mounting screws, and then remove the PLATE PRINTER A.
ADG01 2)
Plate printer A
COVER L
1. Remove two Cover side L sub mounting screws, and then remove the Cover side L sub. 2. Remove five Cover L mounting screws, and then remove the COVER L. ADG04 2) ADG04 1)
Cover side L sub
Cover L
5-16
COVER SIDE R
1. Remove three Cover side R mounting screws. 2. Release two tabs, and then remove the COVER SIDE R.
ADG04 1)
Cover side R
COVER BACK SIDE

1. Remove the Cover side R. Page 5-16 2. Remove three Cover back side mounting screws, and then remove the COVER BACK SIDE R.
ADG04 2)
Cover back side
5-17
COVER TRAY
1. Remove the Cover L. Page 5-16 2. Remove two Cover tray upper mounting screws. 3. Release the locking tab, and then remove the Cover tray upper. ADG04 2)
Cover tray upper
4. Open the Cover front, and then remove the COVER TRAY.
Cover tray
Cover front
5-18
COVER SPEAKER
1. Open the Cover front and the Cover jam access. 2. Remove one Cover speaker mounting screw. 3. Release two tabs, and then remove the COVER SPEAKER. Cover speaker
ADG04 2)
Cover front
Cover jam access
5-19
5.2.2 PCBS
PCB Inverter (Page 5-28) PCB CCD (Page 5-27) PCB Panel B (Page 5-22) PCB Panel A (Page 5-22)
PCB PSU (Page 5-35)
PCB LPH (Page 5-26)
PCB ADF (Page 5-21) PCB CONN MOT (Page 5-25) PCB Duplex (Page 5-84) PCB Bpsize (Page 5-36) PCB Scanner (Page 5-33) PCB PRT (Page 5-32) PCB NCU (Page 5-31) PCB Main (Page 5-29)
PCB PSU HV (Page 5-34)
PCB Voice (Page 5-30)
5-20
PCB ADF
1. Remove the Cover TX side B. Page 5-9 2. Disconnect the seven connectors. 3. Remove two PCB ADF mounting screws, and then remove the PCB ADF.
AFF01 3)
PCB ADF
5-21
PCB PANEL A / PANEL B

1. Remove the Cover left top. Page 5-12 2. Remove the Cover right top. Page 5-13 3. Remove the Cover front upper. Page 5-14 4. Remove the Cover panel top. Page 5-14 5. Remove ten PCB PANEL A / PANEL B mounting screws, and then remove the PCB panel A and PCB panel B. 6. Remove the PCB PANEL A and the PCB PANEL B from the Panel top.
PCB panel A
AFF 01 5)
PCB panel B
Cover panel top

Note: The figure shows the panel being turned over. 7. Remove the PCB PANEL A and the PCB PANEL B.
PCB panel A
PCB panel B
5-22
LCD
1. Remove the Cover left top. Page 5-12 2. Remove the Cover right top. Page 5-13 3. Remove the Cover front upper. Page 5-14 4. Remove the Cover panel top. Page 5-14 5. Remove the PCB PANEL A. Page 5-22 6. Disconnect the connector, and then remove two Film harnesses. 7. Release three locking tabs, and then remove the LCD.
Assy LCD
PCB panel A
8. Spread the side of the Supporter LCD, slide and raise the LCD, and then remove the LCD.
LCD
Supporter LCD
5-23
Note: When mounting the Assy LCD, tuck the Film harness inside.
Assy LCD
PCB panel A
5-24
PCB CONN MOT

1. Remove the Cover platen. Page 5-8 2. Remove the Cover left top. Page 5-12 3. Remove the Cover right top. Page 5-13 4. Remove the Cover back top. Page 5-15 5. Disconnect the connector. 6. Remove two PCB CONN MOT mounting screws, and then remove the PCB CONN MOT.
ADG01 6) PCB CONN MOT
5-25
PCB LPH
1. Remove the Cover side L sub. Page 5-16 2. Remove the Cover L. Page 5-16 3. Remove the Cover tray upper. Page 5-18 4. Remove the Cover tray. Page 5-18 5. Disconnect the connector, and then pull out the Harness. 6. Remove two Duct side mounting screws. 7. Remove two Duct side mounting projection, and then remove the Duct side. 8. Remove the connector of the thermistor.
Duct side
9. Remove two Case shield mounting screws, and then remove the Case shield. 10. Disconnect one connector, and then remove two Film harnesses. Note: When removing the film harnesses, be sure to unlock them. 11. Remove two PCB LPH mounting screws, and then remove the PCB LPH.
Case shild
PCB LPH
5-26
PCB CCD
1. Open the Cover platen. 2. Remove the Cover left top. Page 5-12 3. Remove the Cover right top. Page 5-13 4. Remove the Cover size H. Page 5-15 5. Remove the Contact glass. Page 5-54 6. Remove the Pane. Page 5-55 7. Remove three Cover scanner mounting screws, and then remove the Cover scanner.
Cover scanner ADG01 7)
8. Remove the Film harness. 9. Remove two PCB CCD mounting screws, and then remove the PCB CCD.
ADG01 9) PCB CCD
5-27
PCB INVERTER
1. Open the Cover platen. 2. Remove the Cover left top. Page 5-12 3. Remove the Cover right top. Page 5-13 4. Remove the Cover size H. Page 5-15 5. Remove the Contact glass. Page 5-54 6. Remove the Pane. Page 5-55 7. Remove the Cover scanner. Page 5-27 8. Disconnect the two connectors. 9. Remove one Bracket inverter mounting screws, and then remove the Bracket PCB inverter.
ADG01 9)
Bracket inverter
10. Remove two Inverter mounting screws, and then remove the PCB INVERTER.
Bracket inverter ADG01 10) PCB Inverter
5-28
PCB MAIN
1. Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-16 2. Disconnect the connected from the PCB MAIN. Note: Do not disconnect one connector (P22). (Otherwise, the backup memory is deleted). 3. Remove five PCB MAIN mounting screws, and then remove the PCB MAIN.
ADG01 3) PCB main

P22
Note: When replacing the PCB MAIN, disconnect all the connectors.
5-29
PCB VOICE
1. Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-16 2. Remove two PCB VOICE mounting screws. 3. Remove one spacer, and then remove the PCB VOICE. Note: Do not disconnect the connector.
PCB voice
ADG01 2)
Note: When replacing the PCB VOICE, disconnect the connectors from the PCB MAIN.
5-30
PCB NCU
1. Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-16 2. Remove the Cover side L. Page 5-16 3. Remove two Bracket shield D mounting screws, and then remove the Bracket shield D.
Bracket shild D
ADG01 3)
4. Remove the PCB MAIN. Page 5-29 5. Disconnect all the connectors from the PCB NCU. 6. Remove one mounting screw, and then disconnect the Ground wire. 7. Remove three PCB NCU mounting screws, and then remove the PCB NCU.
ADG01 7)
ADG01 6) PCB NCU
Ground wire
5-31
PCB PRT
1. Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-16 2. Disconnect all the connectors from the PCB PRT. 3. Remove two PCB PRT mounting screws, and then remove the PCB PRT.
PCB PRT
ADG01 3)
5-32
PCB SCANNER
1. Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-16 2. Disconnect all the connectors from the PCB SCANNER. 3. Remove two PCB SCANNER mounting screws, and then remove the PCB SCANNER.
PCB scanner
ADG01 3)
5-33
PCB PSU HV
1. Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-16 2. Remove four PCB PSU HV mounting screws, and then remove the PCB PSU HV. 3. Disconnect the three connectors.
ADG01 2) PCB PSU HV
5-34
PCB PSU
1. Remove the Cover side L sub. Page 5-16 2. Remove the Cover L. Page 5-16 3. Remove two PCB PSU mounting screws, and then pull out the PCB PSU. 4. Disconnect the three connectors.
ADG01 3)
PCB PSU
5-35
PCB BPSIZE
1. Remove the Tray MP. Page 5-74 2. Remove two the Tray A-2 MP mounting screws. 3. Release the locking tabs, and then remove the Tray A-2 MP. 4. Remove two PCB BPSIZE mounting screws, and then remove the PCB BPSIZE. 5. Disconnect the connector. 6. Remove the Knob dial.
Tray A-2 MP
AFF01 2)
AFF06 4) PCB bpsize Knob dial
Note: When mounting the Knob dial, fit the Knob dial projection in the groove of the PCB BPSIZE.
5-36
5.2.3 ADF SECTION (MFX-2700 and MFX-2200)

Note: See 5.2.6 RADF section for MFX-2725 and MFX-2225
TRAY DOCUMENT
1. Remove the Cover TX side B. Page 5-9 2. Remove the Cover TX side F. Page 5-10 3. Remove one connector. 4. Raise the Tray document.
Tray document
5. Pass the connector vertically through the Platen cover hole, and then remove the TRAY DOCUMENT.
Tray document
5-37
SENSOR (DL1)
1. Remove the Tray document. Page 5-37 2. Turn over the Tray document, remove three mounting screws, release five locking tabs, and then remove the Tray document B.
AFF01 2)
Tray document B
Tray document A
3. Disconnect the connector, and then remove the SENSOR (DL1).
Sensor (DL1)
Note: When mounting the Sensor, pay attention to its mounting direction.
5-38
SENSOR (DW1) / SENSOR (DW2)

1. Remove the Tray document. Page 5-37 2. Remove the Tray document B. Page 5-38 Procedure 2 3. Remove the Sensor stoppers. 4. Disconnect the connectors, and then remove the SENSOR (DW1)/SENSOR (DW2).
Sensor (DW2)
Sensor (DW1)
Sensor stopper
Sensor stopper
5-39
ROLLER SEPARATOR
1. Remove the Guide outer. Page 5-11 2. Remove five Guide outer mounting screws, and the remove the Guide outer A.
AFF01 2)
Guide outer A
Roller separator
3. Remove five E-rings of the Roller separator, and then remove the gear and bearings.
ANB02 Bearing D6 8 3) 3) Bearing D6 3) Gear 27 0.8 D ANB03 3)
ANB03 3)
ANB03 3) Bearing D6 3)
5-40
4. Slide the Roller separator, and then remove the ROLLER SEPARATOR.
Roller separater
ROLLER PRESS
1. Remove the Guide outer A. Page 5-40 Procedure 2 2. Remove one Holder register mounting screw, and then remove the Holder register. 3. Remove the ROLLER PRESS.
Roller press B
AFF01 2) Holder register
Note: When mounting the Roller press, pay attention to the shaft mounting direction.
5-41
GUIDE INNER
1. Open the Cover platen, and then remove one screw.
ADG01 1)
2. Remove the Cover TX side B. Page 5-9 3. Remove the Cover TX side F. Page 5-10 4. Remove the Guide outer. Page 5-11 5. Remove the Cover platen. Page 5-8 6. Disconnect the four connectors. 7. Remove four Guide inner mounting screws, and then remove the GUIDE INNER.
AFF01 7) Guide inner AFF01 7) AFF01 7) Ground wire
5-42
FRAME MOTOR
1. Remove the Cover TX side B. Page 5-9 2. Remove the Cover TX side F. Page 5-10 3. Remove the Guide outer. Page 5-11 4. Remove the Cover platen. Page 5-8 5. Remove the Guide inner. Page 5-42 6. Remove the clamp, remove one Plate drive mounting screw, and then remove the Plate drive. 7. Remove three Frame motor mounting screws, and then remove the FRAME MOTOR.
Clutch(MG)
ADG01 7) Clamp
ADG01 7)
Flame motor ADG01 7) Plate drive
ADG04 6)
8. Remove one Sensor mounting screw, and then remove the Sensor. 9. Remove the E-ring and gears.
ADG01 8) Sensor (TXIL) Gear 28/36 ANB02 9)
Gear 34/75
Flame motor
Note: Mount the Plate drive in position after mounting the Guide inner to the Cover platen.
5-43
CLUTCH (MG)
1. Remove the Cover TX side B. Page 5-9 2. Remove the Cover TX side F. Page 5-10 3. Remove the Guide outer. Page 5-11 4. Remove the Cover platen. Page 5-8 5. Remove the Guide inner. Page 5-42 6. Remove the Frame motor. Page 5-43 7. Remove the CLUTCH (MG). 8. Disconnect the connector. 9. Remove the plastic ring, and then remove the shaft.
Gear 15 0.5 D
Bearing D6 Shaft clutch A
Clutch (MG) AVA01 9) Bearing D6
5-44
CLUTCH (CL)
1. Remove the Cover TX side B. Page 5-9 2. Remove the Cover TX side F. Page 5-10 3. Remove the Guide outer. Page 5-11 4. Remove the Cover platen. Page 5-8 5. Remove the Guide inner. Page 5-42 6. Remove the Frame motor. Page 5-43 7. Remove the plastic ring, and then remove the CLUTCH (CL). 8. Disconnect the connector.
Clutch (CL)
AVA01 7)
5-45
ROLLER EXIT
1. Remove the Cover TX side B. Page 5-9 2. Remove the Cover TX side F. Page 5-10 3. Remove the Guide outer. Page 5-11 4. Remove the Cover platen. Page 5-8 5. Remove the Guide inner. Page 5-42 6. Remove the Frame motor. Page 5-43 7. Remove the Clutch (MG). Page 5-44 8. Remove three Spring P earth mounting screws, and the remove the Spring P earth.
Spring P earth
AFF01 8)
9. Remove the E-ring, and then remove the bearings. 10. Remove the ROLLER EXIT. 11. Remove the E-ring, and then remove the gear and bearings.
ANB02 9)
Bearing D6 9)
Gear 37 0.5 D
Roller exit
Bearing D6 11) ANB03 11)
5-46
ROLLER FEED
1. Remove the Cover TX side B. Page 5-9 2. Remove the Cover TX side F. Page 5-10 3. Remove the Guide outer. Page 5-11 4. Remove the Cover platen. Page 5-8 5. Remove the Guide inner. Page 5-42 6. Remove the Frame motor. Page 5-43 7. Remove the Clutch (MG) and Clutch (CL). Page 5-44, 5-45 8. Remove the Spring P earth. Page 5-46 9. Remove the Plate document press. 10. Remove the E-ring, and then remove the bearing.
Plate document press 9)
Bearing 10) ANB03 10)
11. Remove the gear, and then remove the pin. 12. Remove the E-ring, and then remove the bearing.
AQA04 11)
AVA02 12) Gear 76 0.5
Bearing 12)
5-47
13. Remove four Frame drive mounting screws, and then remove the Frame drive. Note: Spring P FG B may not be mounted on your machine according to the production lot. 14. Remove the ROLLER FEED. Roller feed 14)
Frame drive AFF01 13)
Spring P FG B
5-48
SENSOR (DS1)
1. Remove the Cover TX side B. Page 5-9 2. Remove one Sensor (DS1) mounting screw, and then remove the SENSOR (DS1). 3. Disconnect the connector.
Sensor (DS1)
ADG01 2)
4. Remove the Sensor stopper, and then remove the SENSOR.
Sensor (DS1) 4)
Plate sensor
Sensor stopper 4)
5-49
SENSOR (TXIL)
1. Remove the Cover TX side B. Page 5-9 2. Remove one Plate sensor open mounting screw, and then remove the Plate sensor open. 3. Disconnect the connector.
ADG01 2) Plate sensor open
Sensor stopper Plate sensor open
Sensor (TXIL)
5-50
SENSOR (DS2) / SENSOR (DRS)

1. Open the Guide outer. 2. Remove two Sensor cover mounting screws. 3. Remove the Cover sensor. Note: Put a small screwdriver into the center and remove the Cover sensor.
AFF01 2) Cover sensor
4. Remove each one of Sensor (DS2)/Sensor (DRS) mounting screws, and then remove the SENSOR (DS2)/SENSOR (DRS). 5. Disconnect the connectors.
AFF01 2) Sensor (DRS) AFF01 2) Sensor (DS2)
6. Remove the Sensor stopper, and then remove the SENSOR (DS2)/SENSOR (DRS).
Sensor stopper Plate sensor DS2 Sensor (DS2) Sensor stopper Plate sensor DRS
Sensor (DRS)
5-51
PIECE SEPARATOR
1. Open the Guide outer. 2. Release two locking tabs, and then remove the PIECE SEPARATOR.
Piece separator
5-52
HINGE
1. Remove the Cover platen. Page 5-8 2. Remove three Hinge mounting screws, and then remove the HINGE.
AHB01 2)
Hinge (L)
AHB01 2)
Hinge (R)
Note: When mounting the Hinges, pay attention to the mounting position. Mount the Hinge (L) in a position where the Hinge comes in contact with the Cover platen. Align the Hinge (R) with the graduation and the Cover platen graduation.
Hinge (L)
Hinge (R)
Note: Cover platen angle can be adjusted with the position of the Hinge (R) graduation.
5-53
5.2.4 FBS SECTION

CONTACT GLASS
1. Open the Cover platen. 2. Remove the Cover left top. Page 5-12 3. Remove the CONTACT GLASS.
Contact glass C
Note: Mount the Contact glass so that the face lined with film comes to upper left side. Handle the fragile Contact glass with due care.
5-54
PANE
1. Open the Cover platen. 2. Remove the Cover left top. Page 5-12 3. Remove the Cover right top. Page 5-13 4. Remove the Cover size H. Page 5-15 5. Remove the Cover size V. 6. Remove the PANE.
Cover size V Pane
Note: Handle the fragile Pane with due care.
5-55
LAMP
1. Open the Cover platen. 2. Remove the Cover left top. Page 5-12 3. Remove the Cover right top. Page 5-13 4. Remove the Cover front upper. Page 5-14 5. Remove the Cover size H. Page 5-15 6. Remove the Contact glass. Page 5-54 7. Remove the Pane. Page 5-55 8. Remove the Blind sheet. 9. Move the Carriage to the Lamp replacing position (notch), and then remove two Lamp mounting screws. 10. Disconnect the connector, and then remove the LAMP.
ADG01 9)
Blind sheet
Lamp
Holder lamp B
Note: When mounting the Lamp, pass the Harness below the Holder lamp B projection.
5-56
CARRIAGE A
1. Open the Cover platen. 2. Remove the Cover left top. Page 5-12 3. Remove the Cover right top. Page 5-13 4. Remove the Cover front upper. Page 5-14 5. Remove the Cover size H. Page 5-15 6. Remove the Contact glass. Page 5-54 7. Remove the Pane. Page 5-55 8. Remove the Blind sheet. Page 5-56 9. Disconnect the connector from between the FPC harness and the Inverter. 10. Remove one FPC harness mounting screw, and then remove the FPC harness.
AFF01 10) Inverter
Assy Lamp-CBL
5-57
11. Remove the Cover back top. Page 5-15 12. Move the Carriage to the replacing position (notch). 13. Tuck the tab of the Guide FPC center inside, and then raise the Guide FPC out of position. 14. Pull out the FPC harness from the Carriage B hole.
Guide FPC FPC harness
Note: When puling out the FPC harness from the Carriage hole, pay attention not to damage the film. 15. Put a screwdriver into the hole at the right side of the replacing position, and then remove the screw at the center of the Holder belt AB. 16. Remove the screw at the center of the Holder belt AF.
AEH01 15) Holder belt AB
AEH01 16)
Holder belt AF
5-58
17. Remove the Belt from the locking tabs of the Holder belt AB and the Holder belt AF.
Holder belt AB
Holder belt AF
Belt
Belt
18. Move the Carriage A askew, and then remove the CARRIAGE A.
Carriage A
Note: Magnets are attached at the both ends of the Carriage A.
5-59
MIRROR A
1. Remove the Cover platen. Page 5-8 2. Remove the Cover left top. Page 5-12 3. Remove the Cover right top. Page 5-13 4. Remove the Cover front upper. Page 5-14 5. Remove the Cover back top. Page 5-15 6. Remove the Contact glass. Page 5-54 7. Remove the Pane. Page 5-55 8. Remove the Blind sheet. Page 5-56 9. Remove the Lamp. Page 5-56 10.Remove the Carriage A. Page 5-57 11. Remove the Clamp mirrors AB, AF. 12. Remove the MIRROR A.
Mirror A 12) Clamp mirror AB 11)
Clamp mirror AF 11)
Note: Pull out the Clamp mirror by pulling the spring to the Mirror side. Note: Mount the Mirror A so that its surface faces upwards and the side C downwards.
5-60
CARRIAGE B
1. Remove the Cover platen. Page 5-8 2. Remove the Cover left top. Page 5-12 3. Remove the Cover right top. Page 5-13 4. Remove the Cover front upper. Page 5-14 5. Remove the Cover back top. Page 5-15 6. Remove the Contact glass. Page 5-54 7. Remove the Pane. Page 5-55 8. Remove the Blind sheet. Page 5-56 9. Remove the Carriage A. Page 5-57 10. Remove two Holder belt B mounting screws.
ADG01 10)
Holder belt B 10)
Carriage B
Holder belt B 10)
11. Remove the Belts from the Holder belt B locking tabs.
Holder belt B
Holder belt B
Belt
Belt
5-61
12. Move the Carriage B askew, and then remove the CARRIAGE B.
Carriage B
5-62
MIRROR B / MIRROR C
1. Remove the Cover platen. Page 5-8 2. Remove the Cover left top. Page 5-12 3. Remove the Cover right top. Page 5-13 4. Remove the Cover front upper. Page 5-14 5. Remove the Cover back top. Page 5-15 6. Remove the Contact glass. Page 5-54 7. Remove the Pane. Page 5-55 8. Remove the Blind sheet. Page 5-56 9. Remove the Carriage A. Page 5-57 10. Remove the Carriage B. Page 5-61 11. Remove the four Clamp mirrors B.
Clamp mirror B Mirror B
Mirror C
Lot number
Clamp mirror B
Lot number
Note: When mounting the Mirrors, pay attention to their top and bottom faces. The face marked with lot number is the bottom side. (The face without mark is the top side). Note: Pay attention to the mounting position. Mirror B comes on the upper side. Mirror C comes on the lower side. (The Mirror C is 2 mm larger than the Mirror B). Mount the mirrors so that their surfaces face each other as shown in the figure.
5-63
MIRROR CARRIAGE ALIGNMENT

1. Put the Carriage A askew in the Frame scanner, and then move it to the replacing position (notch). 2. Put the Belt through the Holder belt AF and the Holder belt AB, and then lock it temporarily.
Holder belt AB
Holder belt AF
AFF01 2) Frame scanner
3. Move the Carriage A to the position where the projections of its both ends come in contact with the right side inner wall of the chassis. 4. Put the Carriage B askew in the Frame scanner.
Holder belt B
Holder belt B
Frame scaner
5-64
5. To mount the Carriage A, put a screwdriver in the Frame scanners right-side holes and tighten the Holder belt AF and Holder belt AB mounting screws. 6. Tighten the Holder belt B of the Carriage B.
5-65
SENSOR (HOME)
1. Open the Cover platen. 2. Remove the Cover left top. Page 5-12 3. Remove the Cover right top. Page 5-13 4. Remove the Cover front upper. Page 5-14 5. Remove the Cover size H. Page 5-15 6. Remove the Contact glass. Page 5-54 7. Remove the Pane. Page 5-55 8. Remove the Cover front lower. Page 5-72 9. Disconnect the connector. 10. Remove the Sensor (Home) stopper, and the remove the SENSOR (HOME).
Carriage A
Sensor (Home)
Sensor stopper
Note: When carrying out the work, manually move the Carriage A to the center.
5-66
SENSOR (BSS)
1. Open the Cover platen. 2. Remove the Cover left top. Page 5-12 3. Remove the Cover right top. Page 5-13 4. Remove the Cover size H. Page 5-15 5. Remove the Contact glass. Page 5-54 6. Remove the Pane. Page 5-55 7. Remove one Sensor (BSS) mounting screw. 8. Disconnect the connector, and then remove the SENSOR (BSS).
AFF01 7) Sensor (BSS)
5-67
FBS MOTOR
1. Remove the Cover platen. Page 5-8 2. Remove the Cover left top. Page 5-12 3. Remove the Cover right top. Page 5-13 4. Remove the Cover back top. Page 5-15 5. Remove four Bracket hinge R mounting screws, and then remove the Bracket hinge R. 6. Remove the Harness from the Bracket hinge R clamp, and then disconnect the connector.
Bracket hinge R
ADG04 5)
7. Remove the Spring. 8. Remove three Bracket motor mounting screws, and then remove the Bracket motor.
ADG04 8)
Spring C tension A
Bracket motor
5-68
9. Remove two Bracket motor mounting screws, and then remove the FBS MOTOR.
Bracket motor
Motor
AJD02 9)
Note: Mount the Bracket motor temporarily by screws. Apply the Spring in position and tighten up the screws.
5-69
SENSOR (APS) / SENSOR (BIS)

1. Remove the Cover platen. Page 5-8 2. Remove the Cover left top. Page 5-12 3. Remove the Cover right top. Page 5-13 4. Remove the Cover back top. Page 5-15 5. Remove four Bracket hinge R mounting screws, and then remove the Bracket hinge R. 6. Disconnect the connector.
ADG04 5)
Brown
Red Bracket hinge L
7. Remove the Sensor (APS)/ Sensor (BIS) stopper, and then remove the Sensor (APS)/ Sensor (BIS).
Sensor stopper
Sensor stopper
Sensor (APS)
Sensor (BIS)
5-70
SHEET DOCUMENT PRESS

1. Open the Cover platen. 2. Remove the release coated paper of the double-adhesive tape of the Sheet document press. 3. Put the Sheet document press on the panel with its adhesive side facing up. 4. Place the Sheet document press 1 mm away from the document reference position. 5. Close the Cover platen. 6. Open the Cover platen, and then apply the Sheet document press firmly.
Sheet document press
1mm 1mm
5-71
FRAME SCANNER
1. Open the Cover platen. 2. Remove the Cover left top. Page 5-12 3. Remove the Cover right top. Page 5-13 4. Remove the Cover front upper. Page 5-14 5. Remove three Cover front lower screws, and then release three Cover front lower locking tabs. 6. Release one right locking tab, and then remove the Cover front lower. Note: Mount the Cover front lower in the reverse order. 7. Remove two mounting screws.
Cover front lower ADG03 7)
ADG01 5)
8. Remove the Plate printer B. Page 5-8 9. Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-16 10. Disconnect the five connectors from the PCB SCANNER, and then remove one film harness.
PCB scanner
5-72
11. Remove two Frame scanner mounting screws, and then remove the FRAME SCANNER.
Frame scanner
ADG01 11)
5-73
5.2.5 PRINTER SECTION

TRAY MP
1. Remove the Cover side R. Page 5-17 2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Remove two mounting screws. 4. Release two locking tabs, and then remove the Piece B and Piece F. 5. Remove the TRAY MP.
Pice B
Pice F
Tray MP
5-74
COVER JAM ACCESS

1. Remove the Cover side R. Page 5-17 2. Remove the Tray MP. Page 5-74 3. Remove two screws and Cover cam F nad Cover cam B.
Cover cam B
Cover cam F
4. Remove one screw, and then disconnect the Ground wire. 5. Open the Cover jam access. 6. Remove two knob lock jacks, and then remove the COVER JAM ACCESS.
Knob lock JAC ADG01 4)
Knob lock JAC
Cover jam acsses
Knob lock JAC
5-75
ROLLER TRANSFER
1. Open the Cover jam access. 2. Remove one screw and the ground wire on the Guide transfer. 3. Remove four screws, and then remove the Guide transfer JAC.
Guide transfer JAC
4. Remover two Sheet stoppers. 5. Release four locking tabs, and then remove the Guide transfer B.
Sheet stopper Guide transfer B
Sheet stopper
Guide transfer JAC
6. Release the locking tabs, and then remove the Bracket transfer B and the Bracket transfer A. 7. Remove the ROLLER TRANSFER. 8. Remove the Roller gap B and the Bracket transfer B. 9. Remove the gear, the Roller gap A and the Bracket transfer F.
Roller gap B
Bracket transfer B
Roller transfer
Bracket transfer F Roller gap A
Gear 25H 0.6
5-76
ROLLER FEED DUPLEX A

1. Open the Cover jam access. 2. Remove four Guide transfer mounting screws, and then remove Guide transfer. Guide transfer AFF01 4)
3. Remove four Guide duplex Assy mounting screws, and then remove the Guide duplex Assy. AFA07 5)
Guide duplex Assy
5-77
4. Remove the belt. 5. Remove two plastic rings, and then remove the Flange pulleys and the gears. 6. Remove two plastic rings. 7. Remove four bearings, and then remove the ROLLER FEED DUPLEX.
Belt AVA01 7) Flange pulley Gear 20/25P Bearing
Roller feed duplex A
AVA01 7) Frange pulley Gear 20/25P Bearing
Bearing
Bearing
AVA01 8)
Note: When mounting the Roller feed duplex, pass the bearings over the springs. Bearing Bearing
Spring T FG duplex
5-78
SENSOR (DUP)
1. Open the Cover jam access. 2. Remove the Guide transfer. Page 5-77 3. Remove the Guide duplex Assy. Page 5-77 4. Remove the Sensor stopper, and then remove the SENSOR. 5. Disconnect the connector.
Guide duplex Assy
Sensor stopper
Sensor (DUP)
5-79
SENSOR (J1-OP)
1. Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-16 2. Open the Cover jam access. 3. Remove the PCB DUPLEX. Page 5-84 4. Remove one Bracket sensor jack mounting screw, and then remove the Bracket sensor jack. 5. Disconnect the connector.
ADG01 2)
Bracket sensor jac
Sensor (J1-OP)
Sensor stopper
5-80
MOTOR 1
1. Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-16 2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Remove four Motor 1 mounting screws, and then remove the Motor 1.
Motor 1
AJD01 3)
MOTOR 2
1. Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-16 2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Remove four Motor 2 mounting screws, and then remove the Motor 2.
Motor 2
AJD01 3)
5-81
CLUTCH (PAPER REGIST)

1. Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-16 2. Remove the PCB PSU HV. Page 5-34 3. Disconnect the connector. 4. Remove three Motor bracket mounting screws, and then remove the Motor bracket.
Motor bracket ADG01 4)
5. Remove the plastic ring, and then remove the CLUTCH. 6. Disconnect the connector.
Clutch AVA02 6)
5-82
CLUTCH (PAPER FEED)

1. Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-16 2. Remove the PCB PSU HV. Page 5-34 3. Remove the Motor bracket. Page 5-82 4. Disconnect the connector. 5. Remove the plastic ring, and then remove the CLUTCH.
AVA01 5)
Clutch
5-83
PCB DUPLEX
1. Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-16 2. Disconnect all the connectors from the PCB DUPLEX. 3. Remove two PCB DUPLEX mounting screws, and then remove the PCB DUPLEX.
ADG01 3)
PCB duplex
FRAME DRIVE UNIT DUPLEX

1. Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-16 2. Open the Cover jam access. 3. Remove the PCB DUPLEX. Page 5-84 4. Remove three Frame drive unit duplex mounting screws, and then remove the FRAME DRIVE UNIT DUPLEX. PCB duplex
ADG01 4) Frame drive unit duplex
5-84
MOTOR (Dupex)
Note: The Motor can be removed with the Frame drive unit duplex being mounted to the machine. 1. Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-16 2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Remove two Motor mounting screws, and then remove the MOTOR.
ACE01 3)
Motor
CLUTCH (Duplex)
Note: The Clutch can be removed with the Frame drive unit duplex being mounted to the machine. 1. Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-16 2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Remove one Bracket mounting screw, and then remove the Bracket and bearing. 4. Remove the CLUTCH.
Bearing Clutch Bracket
ADG01 3)
5-85
SENSOR (THRM)
1. Remove the Cover printer A. Page 5-16 2. Remove the PCB PSU HV. Page 5-34 3. Remove one Sensor mounting screw, and then remove the SENSOR. 4. Disconnect the connector.
Sensor (THRM)
AFF01 3)
5-86
FRAME DRIVE A
1. Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-16 2. Remove the PCB DUPLEX, and then remove Frame drive unit duplex. Page 5-84 3. Remove the Motor 1. Page 5-81 4. Remove the Motor 2. Page 5-81 5. Remove the PCB PSU HV. Page 5-34 6. Remove the Motor bracket. Page 5-82 7. Remove the Clutch (paper regist). Page 5-82 8. Remove the Clutch (paper feed). Page 5-83 9. Remove two Cover PCB HV mounting screws, and then remove the Cover PCB. 10. Disconnect the connector. Note: When removing the Cover PCB HV, pay attention not to allow the spring to drop and get lost.
Spring
Cover PCB HV
ADG04 9)
5-87
11. Remove the plastic ring, and then remove the Flange. 12. Remove the belt.
Belt Flange AVA02 11)
13. Remove one plastic ring. 14. Remove six Frame drive A mounting screws, and then remove the FRAME DRIVE A. 15. Remove the bearing.
Drive A assy
ADG01 14)
Bearing AVA02 13)
5-88
SPEAKER
1. Remove the Cover speaker. Page 5-19 2. Remove one Holder speaker mounting screw, and then remove the Holder speaker. 3. Disconnect the connector.
ADG04 2)
Holder speaker
4. Remove two Holder mounting screws, and then remove the Holder. 5. Remove the SPEAKER. AFF01 4) Holder
Speaker
5-89
SENSOR (INTERLOCK)
1. Remove the Cover speaker. Page 5-19 2. Remove the Speaker. Page 5-89 3. Disconnect the connector. 4. Remove one screw. 5. Release one locking tab, and then remove the Holder IL.
Holder IL
ADG04 4)
6. Release two locking tabs, and then remove the Plate sensor IL. 7. Remove the SENSOR.
Plate sensor IL
Sensor (Inter lock)
5-90
FUSER UNIT
1. Open the Cover jam access. 2. Remove two Fuser unit mounting screws. 3. Open the Cover guide exit, and then remove the FUSER UNIT.
Cover guide exit
Fuser unit
ABF02 2) ABF02 2)
5-91
EXIT ASSY
1. Open the Cover jam access. 2. Remove the Cover speaker. Page 5-19 3. Remove the Bracket speaker. Page 5-89 4. Remove three screws.
AFF01 4)
F. G. wire ADG01 4)
5. Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-16 6. Remove the PCB DUPLEX, and then remove Frame drive unit duplex. Page 5-84 7. Remove the Frame drive unit duplex.
AFF01 7)
5-92
8. Remove the Cover side R. Page 5-17 9. Remove the Cover back side. Page 5-17 10. Remove one Cover speaker back mounting screw, and then remove the Cover speaker back.
Cover speaker back
ADG04 10)
11. Open the Cover guide exit, and then remove three Exit Assy mounting screws. 12. Remove the EXIT ASSY.
Cover guide exit
Exit Assy
ADG04 11)
5-93
ROLLER EXIT A
1. Remove the Exit Assy. Page 5-92 2. Remove one screw, and then disconnect the Ground wire. 3. Remove one screw, and then remove the Plate terminal and the Spring P.
Exit Assy
Plate terminal F. G. wire AFF01 3)
AFF06 2)
Spring p FG resister
4. Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the Bearing. 5. Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the Gear clutch. 6. Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the Bearing. 7. Remove the ROLLER EXIT A. Gear clutch Bearing
AVA04 5)
AVA01 6)
Roller exit A
Bearing AVA01 4)
5-94
ROLLER EXIT B
1. Remove the Exit Assy. Page 5-92 2. Disconnect the Ground wire. Page 5-94 3. Remove the Plate terminal and the Spring P. Page 5-94 4. Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the Bearing. 5. Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the Gear. 6. Remove the Bearing. 7. Remove the ROLLER EXIT B.
Gear 20 AVA04 5) Bearing
Bearing AVA01 4)
Roller exit B
5-95
SENSOR (SWBK)
1. Remove the Cover side L sub. Page 5-16 2. Remove the Cover L. Page 5-16 3. Remove the Cover tray upper. Page 5-18 4. Release two locking tabs, and then remove the Bracket sensor.
Bracket sensor
5. Remove the Sensor plate, and then remove the SENSOR. 6. Disconnect the connector. Sensor (SWBK)
Sensor stopper
5-96
SENSOR (PDS)
1. Remove the Cover side L sub. Page 5-16 2. Remove the Cover L. Page 5-16 3. Remove the Cover tray upper. Page 5-18 4. Release the locking tabs, and then remove the Bracket sensor.
Bracket sensor
5. Remove the Sensor plate, and then remove the SENSOR. 6. Disconnect the connector.
Sensor (PDS)
Sensor stopper
5-97
LED
1. Open the Cover front. 2. Open the Cover jam access. 3. Return the Knob, and then pull out the LED unit. 4. Release two locking tabs, and then remove the LED. LED
Knob LED
LED unit
5. Remove two Film harnesses. Note: When removing the Film harnesses, unlock them. Harness
Plate FG LED
Plate FG LED
LED
Note: Mount the LED so that the Plate FG LED would touch the inside wall of the LED. Otherwise it may be damaged. LED
Plate FG LED
5-98
ROLLER REGISTER
1. Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-16 2. Remove the PCB DUPLEX. Page 5-84 3. Remove the Frame drive A. Page 5-87 4. Remove one screw, and then remove the Spring P. 5. Remove the Spring C (yellow).
Spring C resister rear
Spring P FG resister ADG01 4)
6. Remove the right Bearing regist D8. 7. Remove the left Bearing regist D8, and then remove the Regist Assy.
Bearing regist D8
Bearing regist D8
Regist Assy
5-99
8. Remove the two Bearing regist D8s. 9. Remove the gear. 10. Remove the Knob lever regist and the Knob lever regist B. 11. Remove the E-ring. 12. Remove the Guide paper.
Bearing regist D8 Knob lever regist B Gear 16 regist Roller regist
ANB05 11) Knob lever regist Guide paper Spring C resister front Bearing regist D8
5-100
ROLLER PICKUP
1. Remove the Cover side R. Page 5-17 2. Remove the Cover back side. Page 5-17 3. Remove the Tray MP. Page 5-74 4. Remove the Cover jam access. Page 5-75 5. Remove two MP guide Assy mounting screws, and then remove the MP guide Assy.
ADG01 5) MP guide Assy
6. Remove the Bracket shaft MP (F) and the Bearing. 7. Remove two plastic rings. 8. Remove the Bearing, and then remove the Roller pickup MP. 9. Remove the Cam flapper MP.
Roller pickup MP Bearing Cam flapper MP Bearing AVA01 7)
5-101
10. Remove the E-ring, and then remove the Roller. ANA07 10)
Roller
Note: When mounting the Roller, pay attention to the mounting direction. When the Roller is turned clockwise, it is locked. (The Shaft turns.) When the Roller is turned counterclockwise, it is unlocked. (The Shaft does not turn.)
FREE
Shaft Roller
LOCK
5-102
PAD PRESSURE MP
1. Remove the Cover side R. Page 5-17 2. Remove the Cover back side. Page 5-17 3. Remove the Tray MP. Page 5-74 4. Remove the Cover jam access. Page 5-75 5. Remove the MP guide Assy. Page 5-101 6. Remove the PAD PRESSURE MP.
Pad pressure MP
5-103
SENSOR (PES BS)

1. Remove the Cover side R. Page 5-17 2. Remove the Cover back side. Page 5-17 3. Remove the Tray MP. Page 5-74 4. Remove the Cover jam access. Page 5-75 5. Release two hooks, and then remove the Flapper MP. Note: Raise the Flapper MP and then release the hooks. Flapper MP
6. Remove the Sensor stopper, and then remove the SENSOR. 7. Disconnect the connector.
Sensor stopper Sensor (PES BS)
5-104
SENSOR (PSS)
1. Open the Cover jam access. 2. Remove one Bracket PSS mounting screw. 3. Hold up the Guide paper and the Feeler PSS, and then remove the Bracket PSS. 4. Disconnect the connector. Guide paper Feeler PSS Bracket PSS
ADG04 2)
5. Remove the Sensor stopper, and then remove the SENSOR. Sensor stopper
Sensor (PSS)
Note: When mounting the Sensor, pay attention not to allow the Feeler PSS to touch the wire Harness.
5-105
SOLENOID
1. Remove the Cover side R. Page 5-17 2. Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-16 3. Remove one Bracket solenoid mounting screw, and then remove the Bracket solenoid. 4. Pull out one connector. 5. Remove the Harness from the clamp, and then pull it out through the hole.
Bracket solenoid MP
ADG01 3)
6. Remove one Solenoid mounting screw, and then remove the SOLENOID. ADG01 6)
Solenoid
5-106
FAN
1. Remove the Cover side L sub. Page 5-16 2. Remove the Cover L. Page 5-16 3. Remove the Cover tray upper. Page 5-18 4. Remove the Filter ozone. 5. Disconnect the connector. 6. Release two locking tabs, and then remove the FAN.
Fan
Filter ozone
7. Remove the Holder fan.
Holder fan
Fan
5-107
CLUTCH (SCREW)
1. Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-16 2. Remove the Cover side L sub. Page 5-16 3. Remove the Bracket shield D. Page 5-31 4. Remove the PCB MAIN. Page 5-29 5. Remove the PCB VOICE. Page 5-30 6. Remove the PCB NCU. Page 5-31 7. Remove one Bracket connector mounting screw, and then remove the Bracket connector.
Bracket connector
ADG01 7)
8. Remove six Case shield mounting screws, and then remove the Case shield.
Case shilde
ADG01 8) .
5-108
9. Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the Gear. 10. Disconnect the connector. 11. Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the CLUTCH.
AVA01 9)
Gear 20/40
AVA01 11)
Clutch
5-109
MOTOR (DC)
1. Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-16 2. Remove the Cover side L sub. Page 5-16 3. Remove the Bracket shield D. Page 5-31 4. Remove the PCB MAIN. Page 5-29 5. Remove the PCB VOICE. Page 5-30 6. Remove the PCB NCU. Page 5-31 7. Remove the Bracket connector. Page 5-108 8. Remove the Case shield. Page 5-108 9. Disconnect one connector. 10. Remove three Motor mounting screws, and then remove the MOTOR.
Motor (DC)
ABF05 10)
5-110
SENSOR (TOS)
1. Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-16 2. Remove the Cover side L sub. Page 5-16 3. Remove the Bracket shield D. Page 5-31 4. Remove the PCB MAIN. Page 5-29 5. Remove the PCB VOICE. Page 5-30 6. Remove the PCB NCU. Page 5-31 7. Remove the Bracket connector. Page 5-108 8. Remove the Case shield. Page 5-108 Procedure 9 9. Remove the Clutch (screw). Page 5-109 Procedure 11 10. Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the Gear. 11. Remove the Bearing. 12. Remove two plastic rings, and then remove two Pulley guides. 13. Remove the belt. 14. Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the Pulley gear. 15. Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the bearing. Gear 32 0.8 oneway AVA01 10) Pulley guide AVA01 12) AVA01 14) Pulley gear 32/60 AVA01 12) Pulley guide Bearing AVA01 15) Bearing
Note: When mounting the Gear which was removed in 10, pay attention to the mounting direction. When the Gear is turned clockwise, it is locked. When turned counterclockwise, it is unlocked.
FREE
LOCK
5-111
16. Remove six Frame drive mounting screws, and then remove the Frame drive F.
Frame drive F ADG01 16)
AFF01 16) ADG01 16) 17. Remove four Chassis pillar mounting screws, and then remove the Chassis pillar. Note: There is no need to remove the harness.
ADG01 17)
Chassis pillar
5-112
18. Remove four Hopper Assy mounting screws, and then remove the Hopper Assy.
Hopper Assy ADG04 18)
19. Remove one Bracket mounting screw, and then remove the Bracket enpty. 20. Disconnect the connector.
Bracket enpty
AFF01 19)
21. Remove two Sensor mounting screws, and the remove the SENSOR. ACE01 21) Sensor (TOS)
5-113
SENSOR (CART)
1. Remove the Cover side L sub. Page 5-16 2. Remove the Cover L. Page 5-16 3. Remove the Cover tray upper, and then remove the Cover tray. Page 5-18 4. Remove the Spring C CT SW, and then remove the Piece CT SW.
Piece CT SW Spring C CT SW
5. Remove the Sensor stopper, and then remove the SENSOR. 6. Disconnect the connector. Sensor (CART)
Sensor stopper
5-114
ROLLER RETARD
1. Pull out the Cassette. 2. Remove two Duct cable mounting screws, and then remove the Duct cable.
Duct cable
ADG01 2)
3. Disconnect one connector. 4. Remove two Pickup Assy mounting screws, and then remove the Pickup Assy.
Pickup Assy
ADG01 4)
5-115
5. Remove two Retard unit mounting screws, and then remove the Retard unit.
ADG01 5) Retard unit
6. Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the Shaft retard. 7. Remove the Guide retard. Guide retard ANB01 6) Retard
Spring retard
Base retard
Shaft retard
5-116
8. Remove the plastic ring, and then remove the ROLLER RETARD.
AVA01 8)
Roller retard
Bracket retard
Note: When you reassemble the Pickup Assy, be sure that the notch of the Shaft-Pickup couples to the Pickup Assy correctly. If not, the first paper picked up from that cassette jams. But after the first paper jam, the shaft couples to the assy and the paper will not jam after it.
5-117
ROLLER PICKUP / ROLLER SEPARATE

1. Pull out the Cassette. 2. Remove the Duct cable. Page 5-115 3. Remove the Pickup Assy. Page 5-115 4. Remove the Retard unit. Page 5-116 Procedure 5 5. Remove two Guide A pickup mounting screws, and then remove the Guide A pickup. 6. Remove four Cover pickup mounting screws, and then remove the Cover pickup. ADG01 6) Cover pickup
Guide A pickup
ADG01 5)
AFF01 6)
7. Remove two plastic rings. 8. Remove two Bearings, and then remove the Roller pickup unit. AVA01 7) Roller pickup unit Bearing
Bearing AVA01 7)
5-118
REMOVING THE ROLLER SEPARATE

1. Remove two plastic rings. 2. Remove the Feeler. 3. Remove the Spring and the Collar from the Bracket. 4. Remove the Roller separator unit.
AVA01 1) Roller separate unit Spring Collar separate
Bracket Feller AVA01 1)
5. Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the ROLLER SEPARATE.
Roller separate
AVA01 5)
5-119
REMOVING THE ROLLER PICKUP

1. Remove two plastic rings. 2. Remove two Bearings. 3. Remove the Roller pickup unit.
AVA01 1) Bearing
Bearing AVA01 1) 4. Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the ROLLER PICKUP.
Roller pickup unit
Roller pickup
AVA01 4)
5-120
SENSOR (PES)
1. Pull out the Cassette. 2. Remove the Duct cable. Page 5-115 3. Remove the Pickup Assy. Page 5-115 4. Remove the Retard unit. Page 5-116 Procedure 5 5. Remove the Guide A pickup. Page 5-118 6. Remove the Cover pickup. Page 5-118 7. Remove the Feeler. 8. Remove the Sensor stopper, and then remove the SENSOR. 9. Disconnect the connector.
Sensor (PES)
Sensor stopper
Feller
5-121
SENSOR (LIFT UP)

1. Pull out the Cassette. 2. Remove the Duct cable. Page 5-115 3. Remove the Pickup Assy. Page 5-115 4. Remove the Retard unit. Page 5-116 Procedure 5 5. Remove the Guide A pickup. Page 5-118 6. Remove the Cover pickup. Page 5-118 7. Remove the Sensor stopper, and then remove the SENSOR. Note: Push down the Pickup unit, and then remove the SENSOR. 8. Disconnect the connector. Sensor (Lift up)
Pickup unit
Sensor stopper
5-122
SENSOR (PSIZE)
1. Pull out the Cassette. 2. Remove the Duct cable. Page 5-115 3. Remove two Sensor mounting screws, and then remove the SENSOR. 4. Disconnect the connector.
Sensor (Psize)
5-123
ROLLER FEED
1. Open the Cover jam access. 2. Remove the Cassette. 3. Remove the Duct cable. Page 5-115 4. Remove the Pickup Assy. Page 5-115 5. Remove the Sensor (PSIZE). Page 5-123 6. Remove one Holder cassette screw.
ADG01 6)
7. Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-16 8. Remove the Frame drive A. Page 5-87 9. Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the bearing. 10. Remove two plastic rings, and then remove the bearing. 11. Remove one Holder casette screw. AFF01 11)
Bearing AVA01 10) Gear 17 0.8 ONEWAY AVA01 9)
5-124
12. Remove the Holder cassette R with the Roller feed.
Holder cassette R
13. Remove one plastic ring. 14. Remove the bearing, and then remove the ROLLER FEED.
Roller feed Bearing AVA01 13)
5-125
FILTER OZONE
1. Remove the Cover side L sub. Page 5-16 2. Remove the Cover L. Page 5-16 3. Remove the Cover tray upper, and then remove the Cover tray. Page 5-18 4. Remove the FILTER OZONE.
Filter ozone
5-126
CASE DUST
1. Open the Cover front. 2. Open the Cover jam access. 3. Remove the Fuser unit. Page 5-91 4. Remove two Case dust screws.
AFF01 4)
5. Remove the Case dust over the projection.
Case dust
5-127
5.2.6 RADF SECTION (MFX-2725 and MFX-2225)

Note: See 5.2.3 Scanning section for MFX-2700 and MFX-2200
Removing from the Host Machine Feeder(Cover Platen)

1. Turn off the main power switch of the host machine. 2. Remove one Plate printer B mounting screw and then remove the PLATE PRINTER B. 3. Disconnect the connector from the PCB SCANNER. Note: ADF models (MFX-2720, MFX-2320 and MFX-2020) have one connector. RADF models (MFX-2725 and MFX-2325) have two connectors.
PCB scanner
ADG01 1)
Plate printer B Ground wire
4. Raise the Feeder(Cover Platen), incline it, release the hinge tab, and then remove the Feeder(Cover Platen).
Cover platen Hinge
Tab
5-128
External Covers Front Cover

Removing the Front Cover 1. Open the feeder cover [1], and then remove the screw [2].
[2] [1]
2. Remove the two screws [3], and then detach the front cover [4].
[4]
[3]
Rear Cover
Removing the Rear Cover 1. Open the feeder cover. 2. Move to the back of the machine, remove the two screws [1], and then detach the rear cover [2].
[1]
[2]
[3]
Note: Remove the rear cover with the two claws [3] released.
5-129
Feeder Cover
[2] [1]
[4]
[3]
Removing the Feeder Cover 1. Remove the screw [1] and positioning pin [2], and then detach the feeder cover [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
5-130
Drive System Pickup Motor

[1]
[2]
[3]
Note: Remove the rear cover with the two claws [3] released. Removing the Pickup Motor 1. Disconnect the connector [1], and then remove the tension spring [2]. 2. Remove the two screws [3], and then remove the pickup motor [4] together with the adjusting plate.
[1] [3]
[4] [3] [2]
5-131
Installing the Pickup Motor 1. Attach the tension spring [1] to the adjusting plate and motor base, and then install the motor in such a manner that the motor pulley and the timing belt are engaged. 2. Install the pickup motor [3] together with the adjusting plate using two screws [2]. 3. Connect the connector [4].
[4] [2]
[3] [2] [1]
Feed Motor
[1]
[2]
[3]
Note: Remove the rear cover with the two claws [3] released. Removing the Feed Motor 1. Disconnect the connector [1], and then remove the tension spring [2]. 2. Remove the two screws [3], and then remove the feed motor [4] together with the adjusting plate.
[4] [1]
[2] [3]
5-132
Installing the Feed Motor 1. Install the feed motor in such a manner that the motor pulley is engaged with the timing belt, and then tighten two screws [1] temporarily. 2. Attach the tension spring [2] to the adjusting plate and motor base, and then securely tighten the screws tightened temporarily in step 1. 3. Connect the connector [3].
[3]
[2] [1]
Timing Belt/Pulley
[2] [1]
[4]
[3]
5-133
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Note: Remove the rear cover with the two claws [3] released. Removing the ADF Driver PCB 1. Disconnect all connectors from the ADF driver PCB. (10 connectors) 2. Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the ADF driver PCB [2].
[1]
[2]
5-134
Removing the Pickup Motor 1. Disconnect the connector [1], and then remove the tension spring [2]. 2. Remove the two screws [3], and then remove the pickup motor [4] together with the adjusting plate.
[1] [3]
[4] [3] [2]
Removing the Feed Motor 1. Disconnect the connector [1], and then remove the tension spring [2]. 2. Remove the two screws [3], and then remove the feed motor [4] together with the adjusting plate.
[4] [1]
[2] [3]
Removing the Timing Belt 1. Remove the screw [1], and then disconnect the ground cable [2].
[1] [2]
5-135
2. Disconnect the two sensor connectors [1]. 3. Remove the harness from the harness guide [2]. 4. Remove the screw [3], and remove the harness guide [2]. 5. Remove the two screws [4], and then remove the metal plate [5]. 6. Remove the four screws [6], and then remove the left hinge [7].
[1] [3]
[2] [4] [7] [5]
[6]
[6]
7. Remove the four screws [1], and then remove the metal plate.
[1]
[1]
[1]
8. Remove the timing belt [1].
[1]
5-136
Document Feeding System Pickup Roller Unit

[2] [1]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
Removing the Pickup Roller Unit 1. Release the two hooks [1], and then detach the inner cover [2] of the feeder cover.
[1] [2] [1]
5-137
2. Remove the two resin rings [1] and the two bearings [2], and then remove the pickup roller unit [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Precaution about Pickup Roller Unit Installation Note: - Install the pickup roller unit with the stopper arm [1] at the front as shown below. - Install the pickup roller unit with the stopper [2] at the rear as shown below.
[2]
[1]
Pickup Roller/Separation Roller

[2] [1]
[4]
[3]
5-138
[3]
[1]
[2]
Removing the Pickup Roller Unit 1. Release the two hooks [1], and then detach the inner cover [2] of the feeder cover.
[1] [2] [1]
2. Remove the two resin rings [1] and the two bearings [2], and then remove the pickup roller unit [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Removing the Pickup Roller and Separation Roller 1. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the drive gear [2].
[2]
[1]
5-139
2. Remove the pickup roller [1]. 3. Remove the E-ring [2], and then remove the separation roller [3].
[3] [1]
[2]
Separation Plate/Separation Pad

Removing the Separation Pad 1. Open the feeder cover. 2. Release the two hooks [1], and then remove the separation pad [2].
[1]
[2]
5-140
Upper Registration Roller

[2] [1]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
5-141
Removing the Upper Registration Roller 1. Release the two hooks [1], and then detach the inner cover [2] of the feeder cover.
[1] [2] [1]
2. Slide the shaft [1] in the direction of the arrow, and then remove the upper registration roller [2]. Note: Do not remove the upper registration roller shaft holder [3] because it was factory-adjusted.
[2]
[3]
[1]
Lower Registration Roller

[2] [1]
[4]
[3]
5-142
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Remove the rear cover with the two claws [3] released. Removing the ADF Driver PCB 1. Disconnect all connectors from the ADF driver PCB. (10 connectors) 2. Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the ADF driver PCB [2].
[1]
[2]
5-143
[4] [1]
[2] [3]
[1] [2]
[1] [3]
[2] [4] [7] [5]
[6]
[6]
5-144
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
Removing the Document Tray 1. Remove the screw [1] at the front of the machine, and then remove the tray holder [2]. 2. Remove the document tray [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
Removing the Feeding Unit 1. Remove the two screws [1].
[1]
5-145
2. Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the feeding unit.
[1]
[2]
Removing the Platen Roller Unit 1. Turn over the feeder unit. 2. Remove the resin ring [1], and then remove the three gears [2] and the bearing [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
3. Remove the resin ring [1], belt [2], gear [3], and bearing [4]. 4. Remove the platen roller unit [5].
[5] [2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
Removing the Read Roller 2 1. Remove the two screws [1], and then detach the cover [2].
[1]
[2]
5-146
2. Remove the resin ring [1], gear [2], and bearing [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
3. Remove the resin ring [1], belt [2], gear [3], and bearing [4], and then remove the read roller 2 [5]. Note: When installing the read roller 2, loosen the screws [6] and attach the belt.
[2] [5]
[1]
[3]
[4] [6]
Removing the Sensor Unit in the Feeder Unit 1. Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the sensor unit [2].
[1]
[2]
Removing the Lower Registration Roller 1. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the gear [2]. 2. Remove the resin ring [3], and then remove the gear [4].
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
5-147
3. Remove the E-ring [1] and resin ring [2], and then remove the bearing [3]. 4. Remove the screw [4], and then remove the spring [5] and metal plate [6].
[4]
[6] [5] [3] [2] [1]
5. Remove the resin ring [1], and then remove the bearing [2] and lower registration roller [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
Delivery Reversing Roller (upper) / Reverse Guide Unit

[2] [1]
[4]
[3]
5-148
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
5-149
[1] [3]
[4] [3] [2]
[4] [1]
[2] [3]
[1] [2]
5-150
[1] [3]
[2] [4] [7] [5]
[6]
[6]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
5-151
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
Removing the Upper Delivery Reversing Roller and the Reverse Guide Unit 1. Remove the resin ring [1] and bearing [2].
[1]
[2]
5-152
2. Remove the resin ring [1], gear [2], and bearing [3], and then remove the upper delivery reversing roller [4] from the Reverse Guide Unit [5].
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Read Roller 1
[2] [1]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
5-153
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1] [3]
[4] [3] [2]
5-154
[4] [1]
[2] [3]
[1] [2]
[1] [3]
[2] [4] [7] [5]
[6]
[6]
5-155
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
5-156
[1]
[2]
Removing the Read Roller 1 1. Turn over the feeder unit. 2. Remove the two resin rings [1], four gears [2], and one bearing [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
3. Remove the resin ring [1], belt [2], gear [3], and bearing [4].
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
4. Remove the two screws [1], two springs [2], the member [3], and the member [4] and then remove the read roller 1 [5].
[1]
[3]
[5] [4]
[2]
[2]
Note: When the read roller 2 is removed first, it works easily [the installation of the read roller [1].
5-157
Read Roller 2
[2] [1]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
5-158
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1] [3]
[4] [3] [2]
5-159
[4] [1]
[2] [3]
[1] [2]
[1] [3]
[2] [4] [7] [5]
[6]
[6]
5-160
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
5-161
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2] [5]
[1]
[3]
[4] [6]
5-162
Platen Roller
[2] [1]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
5-163
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1] [3]
[4] [3] [2]
5-164
[4] [1]
[2] [3]
[1] [2]
[1] [3]
[2] [4] [7] [5]
[6]
[6]
5-165
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
5-166
[1]
[2]
Removing the Platen Roller 1. Turn over the feeder unit. 2. Remove the resin ring [1], three gears [2], and one bearing [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
3. Remove the resin ring [1], belt [2], gear [3], and bearing [4].
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
4. Remove the two screws [1], two springs [2], the member [3], and the member [4] and then remove the platen roller [5].
[1]
[3]
[5] [4]
[2]
[2]
Note: When the read roller 2 is removed first, it works easily [the installation of the platen roller].
5-167
Delivery Reversing Roller (lower)

[2] [1]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
5-168
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1] [3]
[4] [3] [2]
5-169
[4] [1]
[2] [3]
[1] [2]
[1] [3]
[2] [4] [7] [5]
[6]
[6]
5-170
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
5-171
[1]
[2]
Removing the Lower Delivery Reversing Roller 1. Remove the lower delivery reversing roller [1].
[1]
Feeding Unit Removing the Front Cover 1. Open the feeder cover [1], and then remove the screw [2].
[2] [1]
[4]
[3]
5-172
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
5-173
[4] [2]
[3] [2] [1]
[4] [1]
[2] [3]
[1] [2]
5-174
[1] [3]
[2] [4] [7] [5]
[6]
[6]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
5-175
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
5-176
Document Tray
[2] [1]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Note: Remove the rear cover with the two claws [3] released.
5-177
Removing the Document Tray 1. Remove the screw [1] at the front of the machine, and then remove the tray holder [2].
[1]
[2]
2. Remove the screw [1] at the back of the machine, and disconnect the ground cable [2]. 3. Disconnect the tray harness connector (CN7) [3] from the ADF driver PCB. 4. Remove the harness [4] from the harness guide, and then detach the document tray [5].
[5] [4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
5-178
Electrical System Inner Sensor of Feed Unit

[2] [1]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
5-179
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1] [3]
[4] [3] [2]
5-180
[4] [1]
[2] [3]
[1] [2]
5-181
[1] [3]
[2] [4] [7] [5]
[6]
[6]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
5-182
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
Removing the Platen Roller Unit 1. Turn over the feeder unit. 2. Remove the resin ring [1], and then remove the three gears [2] and the bearing [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
5-183
3. Remove the resin ring [1], belt [2], gear [3], and bearing [4]. 4. Remove the platen roller unit [5].
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2] [5]
[1]
[3]
[4] [6]
5-184
Removing the Sensor in the Feeder Unit 1. Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the sensor unit [2].
[1]
[2]
2. Remove the sensor [1] from the sensor unit.
[1]
Document Width Volume

Removing the Relay PCB (Document Width Sensor PCB) 1. Remove the three screws [1] on the reverse side of the document tray using the stubby driver, and then detach the cover [2].
[1]
[2]
2. Disconnect the two connectors [1], and then remove the relay PCB (document width sensor PCB) [2].
[2]
[1]
5-185
Cover Open/Closed Sensor

[1]
[2]
[3]
Note: Remove the rear cover with the two claws [3] released. Removing the Feeder Cover Open/Close Sensor 1. Disconnect the connector [1], and then remove the feeder cover open/ close sensor [2].
[1]
[2]
Document Set Sensor

[1]
[2]
[3]
Note: Remove the rear cover with the two claws [3] released. 5-186
Removing the Document Placement Sensor 1. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the document placement sensor [2].
[1]
[2]
Document Length sensor

Removing the Document Length Sensor 1. Remove the three screws [1] on the reverse side of the document tray using the stubby driver, and then detach the cover [2].
[1]
[2]
2. Disconnect the connector, and then remove the document length sensor [1].
[1]
5-187
Pressurization Solenoid
[1]
[2]
[3]
Note: Remove the rear cover with the two claws [3] released. Removing the Pressurization Solenoid (Roller Release Solenoid) 1. Disconnect the connector [1] from the ADF driver PCB. 2. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the pressurization solenoid (Roller Release Solenoid) [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
5-188
ADF Driver PCB Removing the Rear Cover 1. Open the feeder cover. 2. Move to the back of the machine, remove the two screws [1], and then detach the rear cover [2].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
5-189
5.3 Adjustment
5.3.1 Outline of printer registration adjustment
1. Adjust the printer registration of the first cassette. 2. Adjust the scan position and zoom for ADF, RADF and FBS. 3. After performing step1 and 2, adjust printer position for each cassette.
5.3.2 Printer registration mode

This mode adjusts the print registration for each paper source.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <3>.
2. Select Vertical registration or Horizontal registration and press [Enter]. 3. To adjust the vertical registration, go to step 4. To adjust the horizontal registration, select the paper source, and press [Enter].
4. Adjust the printer registration:

For example: When you set +12.3 for Vertical registration, the printing image moves 12.3 mm downward. If you set 12.3, the printing image moves 12.3 mm upward. When you set +12.3 for Horizontal registration, the printing image moves 12.3 mm rightward. If you set 12.3, the printing image moves 12.3 mm leftward. You can adjust between 12.7 mm and +12.7 mm.
5. Press [Enter] to save the settings. 6. To return to the standby, press [Reset]. Note: If you adjust the printer registration using this mode, the value entered by the machine parameter will also be overwritten.
5-190
Printer registration (top)
Ladder patern
Adjust so that width A on the test pattern Checkered output falls within the following range.
Standard 10 1.9 (mm)
Setting Range -12.7 to 12.7 (mm) (0.1 mm step)
Adjustment procedure
1. Load A3 size paper to the cassette. 2. Use the Unique Switch 52 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. (bit 0, 10) 3. Printout the test pattern Ladder. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, [Enter], select Ladder and press [Enter].) 4. Check width A on the test pattern Ladder meets the specifications.
If width A falls outside the specified range, perform following steps to make the adjustment.
5. To use the Printer registration mode, press <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <3>. 6. Refer to the last page and adjust the registration. 7. After you have finished the adjustment, you must reenter the setting of Unique Switch 52, you changed in step 2.
5-191
Printer registration (side)
Ladder pattern
Adjust so that width A on the test pattern Checkered output falls within the following range.
Standard 10 2.3 (mm)
Adjustment Tool Machine parameter: 100, 120, 140, 160 110, 130, 150, 170
Setting Range 12.7 to 12.7 (mm) (0.6773 mm step)
1. Load A3 size paper to the cassette. 2. Use the Unique Switch 52 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. (bit 0, 10) 3. Printout the test pattern Ladder. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, [Enter], select Ladder and press [Enter].) 4. Check width A on the test pattern Ladder meets the specifications.
If width A falls outside the specified range, perform following steps to make the adjustment.
5. To use the Printer registration mode, press <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <3>. 6. Refer to the last page and adjust the registration. 7. After you have finished the adjustment, you must reenter the setting of Unique Switch 52, you changed in step 2. Important: The setting you have entered in Printer registration mode is reflected in the following Machine parameters. Cassette1 : Machine parameter 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170 Cassette2 : Machine parameter 101, 111, 121, 131, 141, 151, 161, 171 Cassette3 : Machine parameter 102, 112, 122, 132, 142, 152, 162, 172 Cassette4 : Machine parameter 103, 113, 123, 133, 143, 153, 163, 173 Bypass Tray : Dupex printing : Machine parameter 107, 117, 127, 137, 147, 157, 167, 177 Machine parameter 108, 118, 128, 138, 148, 158, 168, 178
5-192
5.3.3 Registration adjustment

FBS registration (top)
Edge of the paper
A
Test Chart
0.10
1.40
0.15
1.25
0.20
1.00
0.25
0.75
0.30
Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1st cassette and FBS zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.
Standard 10 2.4 (mm) Adjustment Tool Machine parameter: 018 Setting Range 4.36 4.36 (mm) (0.0141 mm step)
1. Load A3 size paper to the 1st cassette. 2. Use the Unique Switch 52 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. (bit 0, 10) 3. Place a Test Chart on the document glass. 4. Make a copy of it in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification. 5. Check that the difference of width A and the copy of A (A) meets the specifications. If the difference falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment. 6. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <0>) 7 Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 018 to meet the specification.
If the width A is shorter than the standard, decrease value. If the width A is longer than the standard, increase value.
8. After you have finished the adjustment, you must reenter the setting of Unique Switch 52, you changed in step 2.
0.55
5-193
FBS registration (side)
A
Test Chart
0.10
Edge of the paper
1.40
0.15
1.25
0.20
1.00
0.25
0.75
0.30
Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1st cassette and FBS zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.
Standard 10 2.7 (mm) Adjustment Tool Machine parameter: 015 Setting Range 5.29 5.29 (mm) (0.2116 mm step)
1. Load A3 size paper to the 1st cassette. 2. Use the Unique Switch 52 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. (bit 0, 10) 3. Place a Test Chart on the document glass. 4. Make a copy of it in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification. 5. Check that the difference of width A and the copy of A (A) meets the specifications. If the difference falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment. 6. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <0>) 7. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 015 to meet the specification.
If the width A is shorter than the standard, increase value. If the width A is longer than the standard, decrease value.
0.55
5-194
ADF/RADF registration (top)
Edge of the paper
A
Test Chart
0.10
1.40
0.15
1.25
0.20
1.00
0.25
0.75
0.30
Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1st cassette and ADF/RADF zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.
Model MFX-2200 MFX-2700 MFX-2225 MFX-2725 Standard 20 3.0 (mm) 20 3.0 (mm) Adjustment Tool Machine parameter: 013 Machine parameter: 383 (Front page) 398 (Back page) Setting Range 10.76 10.76 (mm) (0.0847 x 2 mm step) 7.86 7.86 (mm) (0.03093 x 2 mm step)
1. Load A3 size paper to the 1st cassette. 2. Use the Unique Switch 52 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. (bit 0, 10) 3. Place a Test Chart on the ADF or RADF. 4. Make a copy of it in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification. 5. Check that the difference of width A and the copy of A (A) meets the specifications. If the difference falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment. 6. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <0>) 7. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 013, 383 or 384 to meet the specification.
0.55
5-195
ADF/RADF registration (bottom)
2000-15
Test Chart No.200-15 A3
A
Model MFX-2200 MFX-2720 MFX-2225 MFX-2725 Standard 15 3.0 (mm) 15 3.0 (mm) Adjustment Tool Machine parameter: 014 Machine parameter: 384 (Front page) 399 (Back page) Setting Range 10.76 10.76 (mm) (0.169 mm step) 7.86 7.86 (mm) (0.03093 x 2 mm step)
1. Load A3 size paper to the 1st cassette. 2. Use the Unique Switch 52 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. (bit 0, 10) 3. Place a Test Chart on the ADF or RADF. 4. Make a copy of it in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification. 5. Check that the difference of width A and the copy of A (A) meets the specifications. If the difference falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment. 6. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <0>) 7. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 014, 384 or 399 to meet the specification.
5-196
ADF/RADF registration (side)
A
Test Chart
0.10
Edge of the paper
1.40
0.15
1.25
0.20
1.00
0.25
0.75
0.30
Model MFX-2200 MFX-2700 MFX-2225 MFX-2725 Standard 20 3.3 (mm) 20 3.3 (mm) Adjustment Tool Machine parameter: 010 Machine parameter: 380 Setting Range 26.88 26.88 (mm) (0.2116 mm step) 26.88 26.88 (mm) (0.2116 mm step)
1. Load A3 size paper to the 1st cassette. 2. Use the Unique Switch 52 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. (bit 0, 10) 3. Place a Test Chart on the ADF or RADF. 4. Make a copy of it in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification. 5. Check that the difference of width A and the copy of A (A) meets the specifications. If the difference falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment. 6. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <0>) 7. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 010 or 380 to meet the specification.
0.55
5-197
5.3.4 Zoom adjustment
FBS zoom adjustment (Vertical)
Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1st cassette have been made.
Zoom ratio 100 % Standard 330 2.0 (mm) (330 0.6 %) Adjustment Tool Machine parameter: 435 Setting Range
1.5 to 1.5 % (0.1 % step)
1. Load A3 size paper to the first cassette. 2. Place a Test Chart on the document glass. 3. Make two copies on paper in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification. 4. Measure the length of A on the second copy to find the difference.
If length A falls outside the standard range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment.
5. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <0>) 6. Adjust so that the setting of Machine Parameter 435 meets the specification.
If length A is shorter than the standard, increase value. If length A is longer than the standard, decrease value.
5-198
FBS zoom adjustment (Horizontal)
Zoom ratio 100 % Standard 240 1.4 (mm) (240 0.6 %) Adjustment Tool Machine parameter: 016 Setting Range 1.5 to 1.5 % (0.1 % step)
1. Load A3 size paper to the first cassette. 2. Place a Test Chart on the document glass. 3. Make two copies on paper in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification. 4. Measure the length of A on the second copy to find the difference.
If length A falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment.
5. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <0>) 6. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 016 to meet the specification.
If the length A is shorter than the standard, increase value. If the length A is longer than the standard, decrease value.
5-199
ADF/RADF zoom adjustment (Vertical)
Mode MFX-2200 MFX-2700 MFX-2225 MFX-2725 Zoom ratio 100 % 100 % Standard 1.0 % 1.0 % Adjustment Tool Machine parameter: 430 Machine parameter: 385 Setting Range 6.3 to 6.3 % (0.1 % step) 6.3 to 6.3 % (0.1 % step)
1. Load A3 size paper to the first cassette. 2. Place a Test Chart on the ADF or RADF. 3. Make two copies on paper in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification. 4. Measure the length of A on the second copy to find the difference.
5. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <0>) 6. Adjust so that the setting of Machine Parameter 430 or 385 meets the specification.
5-200
ADF/RADF zoom adjustment (Horizontal)
Mode MFX-2200 MFX-2700 MFX-2225 MFX-2725 Zoom ratio 100 % 100 % Standard 1.0 % 1.0 % Adjustment Tool Machine parameter: 011 Machine parameter: 381 Setting Range 6.3 to 6.3 % (0.1 % step) 6.3 to 6.3 % (0.1 % step)
1. Load A3 size paper to the first cassette. 2. Place a Test Chart on the ADF or RADF. 3. Make two copies on paper in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification. 4. Measure the length of A on the second copy to find the difference.
5. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <0>) 6. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 011 or 381 to meet the specification.
5-201
5.3.5 Separation pressure adjustment

Adjust the separation pressure using a screwdriver.
Rotate the screw by half-turn.

Rotate direction Clockwise Counterclockwise Separation pressure Up Down
5-202
5.3.6 ADF skew adjustment (MFX-2700 and MFX-2200)

Adjust the resist roller by changing the position of the holder resister. 1. Remove the Guide Outer A and take out the Holder Resister.
Holder Register
Guide Outer A
2. Reattach the Holder Resister with its direction up-side-down.
Direction B
Normal position
Adjustment position
Direction A
3. Loosen the screw of the Holder Resister and adjust its position. Tighten the screw after the adjustment. When the Holder Resister is moved to direction A: The Copies will rotate to the clockwise direction.
When the Holder Resister is moved to direction B: The Copies will rotate to the counterclockwise direction.
5-203
5.3.7 RADF Adjustment (MFX-2725 and MFX-2225)

Outline
This machine has the following adjustment items. Carry out each adjustment after replacing the relevant parts. No. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Adjustment type Height adjustment Perpendicularity adjustment Magnification adjustment Side registration adjustment Leading edge registration adjustment Reading position adjustment Replaced parts Hinge Hinge White roller White roller Remarks
During installation only During installation only
Note: Carry out the adjustment of above all after removing the RADF from the reader unit.
Height Adjustment
1. Pre-check Check that the front and rear feet on the pickup side of the RADF are close contact with the document glass when the RADF is closed.
Insert a sheet of paper between the RADF's document glass and the feet (two) and pull the paper in the direction of the arrow to check that you feel slight resistance. The recommended way of making this check is as follows: First, insert a sheet of paper between the front foot [1] and the RADF's document glass, and then pull it. Next, insert a sheet of paper between the rear foot [2] and the RADF's document glass, and then pull it. Note: - Use plain paper for this adjustment. - Insert the paper [3] in such a manner that the sheet portion [4] of the document glass is covered.
[2] [1]
[3] [4]
5-204
2. Adjustment Sequence * When the front foot or rear foot is floating 1) Adjust the left hinge. (See 3.) 2) Adjust the right hinge. (See 4.) 3) Adjust the left hinge (see 3) or check the left hinge (see 1). * When both feet are floating 1) Adjust the left hinge. (See 3.) 2) Adjust the right hinge. (See 4.) 3) Adjust the left hinge. (See 3.) 4) Adjust the right hinge (see 4) or check the right hinge (see 4). 3. Adjusting the Left Hinge Height 1) Adjust the left hinge height using the left height adjusting screw [1]. Note: Loosen the nut [2] before adjustment, and tighten it after adjustment. * If the front foot is floating, turn the adjusting screw clockwise to lower the front foot until it touches the glass. * If the rear foot or both feet are floating, turn the adjusting screw counterclockwise to lower the rear foot until it touches the glass.
4. Adjusting the Right Hinge Height 1) When closing the RADF, perform the following checks: - The rib [1] on the bottom of the RADF must contact the copyboard glass holder (right) [2]. (Gap A should not exist.) - Check that the document pressure sheet [2] touches the document glass.
[2] A
[1]
[3]
5-205
2) If the height is inappropriate, adjust it using the right hinge height adjusting screw [1]. Note: Loosen the nut [2] before adjustment, and tighten it after adjustment.
* Turning the adjusting screw clockwise reduces clearance A. * Turning the adjusting screw counterclockwise increases clearance A. 3) Perform step 1 of the left hinge height adjustment procedure. If the height is inappropriate, adjust it again.
Perpendicularity Adjustment
1) Place the test chart on the RADF and take a copy of it.
A
Chart feed direction
Test chart
Feed direction
Copy
2) Check the squareness of the image on the copy. Measure the dimensions A and B at the leading edge of the test chart and the dimensions A' and B' at the leading edge of the copy. If it not (A-B) = (A'-B'), perform steps 3 and later.
5-206
3) Loosen the right hinge clamping screw [1], and slide the hinge back and forth with reference to the graduation marks.
4) Tighten the hinge clamping screw loosened in step 3).
5-207
5.3.8 Drum ATDC adjustment

Important : When the Main PCB is replaced, the ATDC value and drum life should be reentered. Note: Before replacing the Main PCB, be sure to see the Life Monitor and ATDC adjustment to write down the machine condition. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9> and press [Enter]) For more information about Life Monitor see section 3, 3.11.1 Life Monitor and 3.11.9 ATDC adjustment. 1. When the machine is restarted, the following message will be displayed.
2. Press either [Manual] or [Auto]. 3. If you have pressed [Auto], wait about six minutes until the machine adjust the ATDC value itself. When the adjustment is over, go to step 10. 4. If you have pressed [Manual] the following screen will be displayed:
5. Select ASTD and press [Enter]. 6. Enter the ASTD value, and press [Enter].
7. Select DeltaVCONT and press [Enter]. 8. Enter the DeltaVCONT value, and press [Enter].
9. Select Drum Life Time and press [Enter]. 10. Enter the drum life time, and press [Enter].
11. Press [Close] to exit the mode. 12. Enter the life monitor value using the Life Monitor Maintenance mode. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <0> and enter the values.) For more information about Life Monitor Maintenance mode, see section 3.
5-208
6 Options
CAUTION: This installation should be done by a qualified service technician.
6.1 Paper cassette

The way to attach the second cassette to the MFP, and the third or fourth cassette to the seccond or the third is almost the same. Here the procedures are explained with the second cassette attaching to the MFP. Note: Do not lift the machine by using anything other than the handles. Doing so may damage the unit.
6.1.1 Packaging contents:

1. Optional paper cassette................................... 1 2. Fixing plates .................................................... 4 3. Screws ............................................................ 8 4. Paper size label .............................................. 1
6.1.2 Installation
1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. 2. Set the machine on top of the optional cassette. (To attach the third cassette or fourth cassette to the second or third cassette, set it on the counterpart.)
Option cassette
6-1
3. Remove four screws and the Cover Rear of the optional cassette. 4. Remove one screw and the Plate Printer C from the MFP back side. 5. Slide the harness through the machine and attach the connector of the PCB Main (P23).
Plate printer C
Harness
Cover rear
*Attaching the third cassette or fourth cassette to the second or third cassette.
Option cassette (2nd)
Cover rear (2nd)
Harness
Cover rear (3rd)
Option cassette (3rd)
6. Reattach the covers removed in steps 3 and 4. Note: Make sure the harness is not wedged into the machine. 7. Open the first cassette and attach the fixing plates on both ends of the machine using each two screws. 8. Attach the fixing plates on the backside of the machine on both ends using each two screws.
Fixture
6-2
9. Open the paper cassette and load the paper into the cassette. 10. Adjust the rear and side paper guides to the paper.
11. Turn the paper size dial to indicate the paper size.
12. Close the cassette. 13. Plug the power cord and turn on the machine. 14. If you have set the dial to Others in step 11, press <Menu>, <3>, [Enter] and select Other paper and press [Enter]. Select the cassette you are going to set the paper size, press [Enter], select the paper size and press [Enter]. 15. Apply the correct paper size label and the cassette number label to the cassette. The paper size labels are supplied with the optional cassette. The cassette number label is supplied with the MFP.
6-3
6.2 Conformation Stamp

About 30,000 times stamp is available with blue ink stamp, 10,000 times with pink ink stamp. Note: The concormation stamp for MFX-2725 and MFX-2225 are standard equipment.

1. Stamp solenoid ................................................ 1 2. Stamp .............................................................. 1 3. Screw............................................................... 1
6.2.2 Installation
1. Open the cover platen. 2. Peel off the left side of the Sheet document press.
Sheet document press
3. Turn the Bracket stamp out and attach the stamp solenoid using one screw. 4. Connect the harness to the connector.
Solenoid
Bracket stamp
5. Remove the stamp cap from the stamp and insert it to the solenoid.
6. Turn the stamp unit back to the platen cover. 7. Reattach the Sheet document press. 8. Close the platen cover. 6-4
6.3 Page Counter

The mechanical counter shows the total number of pages the machine has printed. Note: This device counts up to 999,999 pages. If more pages are printed, the counter resets to zero and begins counting the new pages from that point.

1. Mechanical counter ........................................ 1
6.3.2 Installation
1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. 2. Open the front cover. 3. Use nippers and open the cover. 4. Pull out the harness and connect it to the counter. 5. Tuck the harness into toe machine and set the counter to the opening. 6. Close the front cover.
Counter
The counter will now count the number of pages printed.
6-5
6.4 PCL printer controller

1. PCL printer board ............................................ 1 2. PCB Joint......................................................... 1 3. PCB spacer ..................................................... 1 4. Stud spacers.................................................... 2 5. Spacers ........................................................... 4 6. Screw .............................................................. 5 7. Soft key laber .................................................. 1 8. Setup Disk ....................................................... 1 (Contains PCL and TWAIN drivers and manuals) . Contains ontains 9. Installation Instruction ...................................... 1
6.4.2 Installation
1. Turn the power off and unplug the power cord. 2. If the machine has an ADF or RADF, remove one screw and plate printer B. Otherwise go to step 4. 3. Disconnect one connector for ADF model, two connectors for RADF model. 4. Remove eleven screws and the plate printer A. 5. Attach one PCB spacer. 6. Attach two stud spacers. 7. Attach the PCL printer board and screw it using three screws.
Stud spacer PCB spacer
PCL PCB
6-6
8. Attach two spacers to the Main PCB. 9. Attach two spacers to the PCL printer board. 10. Attach the Joint PCB to the PCL printer board and Main PCB, and screw it using two screws.
Spacer PCB joint
11. Reattach the parts that was removed in steps 2 to 4. *Use the enclosed CD to install the print drivers.
6-7
6.5 OfficeBridge Expansion kit

1. OfficeBridge board........................................... 1 2. Spacers ........................................................... 2 3. Screws ............................................................. 4 4. Soft key label .................................................. 1 5. Caution label for power off .............................. 1 6. Setup Guide .................................................... 1 7. Setup Disk ....................................................... 1 (Contains OfficeBridge programs and manuals) Contains ontains 8. Installation Instruction ..................................... 1 Note: To connect the machine to the network a 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX LAN cable (Category 5) is required.
6.5.2 Installation
1. Turn the power off and unplug the power cord. 2. If the machine has an ADF or RADF, remove one screw and plate printer B. Otherwise go to step 4. 3. Disconnect one connector for ADF model, two connectors for RADF model. 4. Remove eleven screws and the plate printer A. 5. Remove two screws and Cover side L Sub. 6. Use nippers to punch out the cover for network connection. 7. Reattach the Cover side L Sub.
Cover side L sub
8. Attach two spacers to the PCB Main. 9. Attach the OfficeBridge board and screw it using four screws.
6-8
PCB main
Network Interface Board Spacer
10. Reattach the parts that was removed in steps 2 to 4. 11. Attach the caution label at the power switch.
*Refer to the setup guide how to set up OfficeBridge.
6-9
6.6 Network Interface Board

1. Network Interface Board ................................. 1 2. Spacers ........................................................... 2 3. Screws ............................................................. 4 4. Installation Instruction ...................................... 1 Note: To connect the machine to the network a 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX LAN cable (Category 5) is required
6.6.2 Installation
1. Turn the power off and unplug the power cord. 2. If the machine has an ADF or RADF, remove one screw and plate printer B. Otherwise go to step 4. 3. Disconnect one connector for ADF model, two connectors for RADF model. 4. Remove eleven screws and the plate printer A. 5. Remove two screws and Cover side L Sub. 6. Use nippers to punch out the cover for network connection. 7. Reattach the Cover side L Sub.
Cover side L sub
8. Attach two spacers to the PCB Main. 9. Attach the Network Interface Board and screw it using four screws.
PCB main
Network Interface Board Spacer
10. Reattach the parts that was removed in steps 2 to 4. 11. Connect one end of an LAN cable to the Network Interface Board. 6-10
12. Plug the other end of the LAN cable into the 10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet hub. 13. Plug the power cord and turn the power on. Go ahead to the Network settings.
Network Settings
To use the machine on a network, set the IP address and Subnet mask on the machine. There are two ways of settings according to the network environment: Automatic setup If a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server is installed on your network, the IP address and Subnet mask is assign automatically to the machine when the machine is turned. Important: Once the DHCP server has assigned the IP address to your machine, that IP address MUST be reserved within the specific DHCP scope. Failure to do so could result in failed operation when the IP address lease expires. Manual setup If a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server is NOT installed on your network, see the steps below and set up the IP address and Subnet mask. 1. Press <Menu>, <7>, <2>, <3> and [Enter]. 2. If the password is registred, enter the password and press [Enter]. Otherwise, go to step 3.
3. Select IP Address and press [Enter].
4. Select DHCP Setting and press [Enter].
5. Select Off and press [Enter]. 6. Select IP address and press [Enter]. 7. Enter the IP address using the numeric keys and press [Enter]. 8. Select Subnet mask and press [Enter]. 9. Enter the Subnet mask using the numeric keys and press [Enter].
6-11
6.7 Scanner heater

1. Scanner heater ............................................... 1 2. Sheet heater .................................................... 1 3. Screw............................................................... 1 4. Installation Instruction ..................................... 1
6.7.2 Installation
1. Turn the power off and unplug the power cord. 2. If the machine has an ADF or RADF, remove one screw and plate printer B. Otherwise go to step 4. 3. Disconnect one connector for ADF model, two connectors for RADF model. 4. Remove eleven screws and the plate printer A. 5. Remove the Cover platen. 6. Remove the Cover left top and Cover right top. 7. Remove the Cover size H and Cover back top.
Size H cover
Back top cover Right top cover
Left top cover
8. Remove the Pane. 9. Attach the scanner heater using one screw. 10. Remove one screw from the Supporter FPC and thread the harness of the heater under the supporter. 11. Thread the harness through the opening in the machine frame.
Tape Heater
Supporter FPC
6-12
12. Connect the harness to the Scanner PCB (P149).
P149
PCB Scanner
13. Reattach the screw that was removed in step 8. 14. Reattach all the covers and the pane that were removed. 15. Put the Sheet document on the bottom side of the FBS.
Heater sheet
6-13
6.8 Cassette heater

1. Heater ............................................................. 1 2. AC Inlet ........................................................... 1 3. AC power ........................................................ 1 4. Chassis cover ................................................. 1 5. Screw (A) ........................................................ 7 6. Screw (B) ........................................................ 1 7. Clamps ........................................................... 3 8. Rating Label ................................................... 1 9. Caution Label ................................................. 1 10. Installation Instruction ................................... 1
6.8.2 Installation
1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. 2. Open the rear cover of the second, third or fourth cassette.
6-14
3. Open the left cover of the second, third or fourth cassette.
4. Attach the chassis cover to the cassette-chassis using two screws (screw A).
5. Insert the heater from the rear side of the cassette. Make sure that the heater mounts on the cassette-chassis on the front side of the casette. 6. Attach the heater using one screw (screw A) from the front side of the cassette. 7. Attach the heater using two screws (screw A) from the rear side of the cassette.
8. Attach the AC inlet to the cassette-chassis using two screws (screw A).
A A
6-15
9. Attach the clamps to the cassette-chassis. 10. Attach the ground wire to the cassette-chassis using one screw (screw B).
B
11. Connect the connectors. 12. Fix the cable to the clamps.
13. Use nippers to punch out the cover for AC inlet and reattach the cover.
14. Reattach the rear cover. 15. Attach the Rating label to the rear cover. 16. Plug the non-pronged end of the supplied power cord into the power socket.
6-16
17. Attach the caution label to the front of the cassette.
18. Plug the pronged end into a properly grounded electrical outlet.
6-17
MFX-2725 / MFX-2225 (RADF Model) Cable Diagram

Fuser (A3) THERMISTER(A3) Z90-55856-00 HF-DB2 ASSY FUSER TH -CBL CBL-ASSY FUSER TH A170
BU02P-TR-P-H
PRINTER UNIT DB2-08730-40A DB2-08730-50A Drawer 130mm connector 1B CZHR-07V-S (A3) (1-n connection)
PCB MAIN Drawer connector 1A (A3) (1-n connection) CZHR-07V-S
DB2-08010-50 P23 B30B-PHDSS A110-A-1 15 CBL-ASSY CAS DB2-08290-50B (1-n connection) 14 320mm
2 A010 CBL-ASSY THMS DB2-08220-50A
640mm
?? B5B-SH-K
200mm A110-B-2 15 BU15P-TR-P-H(LF)(SN) Z07-24145-00 (1-n connection) ASSY EXCAS1-CBL DB2-08570-40B
2nd CASSETTE PCB CASSETTE DB2-08100-50 B15B-PH-K
A110-B-2 15 200mm ASSY EXCAS1-CBL DB2-08570-40B
3rd CASSETTE PCB CASSETTE DB2-08100-50 B15B-PH-K
320mm
?A1-03085-00(Z07-74551-00) DB2-08740-40B Thermostat 36FXE04_560907 A180-1
ASSY FUSER1-CBL 45mm Thermal Fuse Z90-48827-00 CBL-ASSY FUSER 1 E4A50167C DB2-08740-50B (Fuse side) A230 105mm
(1-n connection) AWG#18
BU14P-TR-P-H(LF)(SN) A110-A-2 14 180mm Z07-46281-00 (1-n connection) ASSY EXCAS2-CBL DB2-08560-40A
B14B-PH-K
180mm A110-A-2 14 ASSY EXCAS2-CBL DB2-08560-40A
B14B-PH-K
PCB NCU DAA DB5-0808X-50 P90 LINE B28B-PHDSS TEL EXTEL
FBS UNIT 28 A030 DCB-52836-50A (CBL-ASSY NCU) (DB2-08230-50A) 350mm P9 P14A B28B-PHDSS BM50B-SRDS A121 26 120mm CBL-ASSY SCANNER1 DB2-08200-50B 2 A123 120mm CBL-ASSY SCANNER2 DB2-08210-50B
A110-B-2 15 200mm ASSY EXCAS1-CBL DB2-08570-40B 0 A110-A-2 14 180mm ASSY EXCAS2-CBL DB2-08560-40A 0
4th CASSETTE PCB CASSETTE DB2-08100-50 B15B-PH-K
B14B-PH-K
PCB SCANNER RADF P147 P140A BM50B-SRDS B3B-EH-K DB2-28020-50 P140B B2PVH
B010 3 700mm CBL-ASSY INVERTER DB2-08340-40A
HEATER LAMP(A3)
A180-2 SRWM-61GG-S0.6 CBL-ASSY FUSER 4 7R-RIZ-K4GG-SQ3FL(LF) DB2-08870-50A (Receptacle) (Front Heater Lamp side)
SRWF-61GG-M0.6 7P-RIZ-K2GG-S3RL(LF) (Plug)
P14B B2PVH
LAMP INVERTER CN1 CN2 S3B-EH-K S2P4-VH Z904758300 DA1??
VHR-4N D010 2 (105mm) (DA10847050C) (CBL-ASSY LAMP) RADF UNIT
DA10847040C FPC
B2P4VH
2 (Direct attachec to LAMP) LAMP Z904758200 VHR-4M
DB2-08950-40A ASSY FFC-CBL
PBA-ADF
DB26807050A CN4
6 (Attached to Motor)
Feed Motor M1 MOT-17PM-J344-P1VS DB26012160
DB2-08750-50A CBL-ASSY FUSER2 (HEATERLAMP <-> Thermal Fuse) DB2-08760-50A CBL-ASSY FUSER3 (HEATERLAMP <-> Tehrmostat) *DB2-100 *DB2-220 ZA1-02909-A0 ZA1-02908-70
70mm 100mm
2 620mm A160 ASSY PSU-HEATER-CBL DB2-08280-40C
PCB PSU DB2 LPS CN1 B2P3VH
DB2-089XX-50 CN2 B16B-XH-A 12 A050 CBL-ASSY LVPS DB2-08240-40A 500mm P12 B16B-XH-A EXT MEMORY
P141 DA1:360mm +FBS:260mm 20FMN-BTK +rear:230mm 850 Direct from motor :360mm +FBS:30mm
B030
660mm 20 FFC
PCB CCD P180
DB50814050A CN11
TFL-100K-20-0660? ZA1-03084-30
Feed Motor M2 MOT-17PM-J344-P1VS DB26012160
A280
ASSY AC IL-CBL DB2-08790-40C
P1420 B040 DCB-20618-50A 180mm 6 (Attached to Motor)
890mm
DFG-01S4G-514
(CBL-ASSY AC-SW2) (DB2-08780-50A) VLP-02V 50mm VLR-02V A270 ASSY AC-SW1-CBL DB2-08770-40C 210mm P20
P142 B6B-EH-K +rear:250mm 640
P19
DA1:600mm P143 +FBS:30mm B3B-PH-K +rear:100mm 730 DA1:140mm P144 B6B-PH-K +FBS:30mm +rear:100mm 6-Blue 270
(CBL-ASSY AC-SW1) (DB2-08770-50A)
B050 3 740mm DCB-70374-50A (CBL-ASSY HOME) (DB2-08350-50A) RED 230mm B060 3 CBL-ASSY APS DB2-08360-50B
P1421 PCB CONN MOT(DB2-08180-50A) HOME SENSOR SG-2482A S3B-PH-K Z903777750
FBS MOTOR (Bi HB) ZA10233100 (385mm)
CN5
2 (Attached to Solenoid)
Divider Solenoid SOL-TDS-10SL-174 DB26804050A
CN9
ASM-SENS2 3 DB26806050A
COVER PI10 TLP1243(C8,CANO2) DB26809050A
APS SG-2482A S3B-PH-K Z903777750 3
EMPTY PI11 TLP1243(C8,CANO2) DB26809050A EXIT PI6 TLP1243(C8,CANO2) DB26809050A
PCB LPH PCB THERMISTOR D71-28080-50B P800 2 CBL-ASSY TEMP DB2-08980-50A 140mm P6 B2B-PH-K
DB2-08070-50 P1 B28B-PHDSS A142 28 DB2-08250-40A ASSY LPH-CBL 500mm P13 B28B-PHDSS
BROWN BIS 230mm SG-2482A S3B-PH-K Z903777750
CN8
ASM-SENS1 3 DB26816050A
CN 53254-0272 2P RED LED HEAD (KYOCERA) Z90-55180-00 FH12-40S-0.5SV [HIROSE] (HRS No.586-0566-900)
3 SBS P21 DA1:230mm P146 +FBS:270mm B6B-PH-K +rear:50mm 550 P145 B5B-PH-K 3 520mm B080-1 CBL-ASSY SBS DB2-08370-40A Except USA 51090-0500 MBS 3 600mm CBL-ASSY SBS-USA DB2-08380-50B USA Only 53325-0510 B090 2 HEATER (Heater attached) Z903755550 Black dot in tASSY CBL-C P151 B28B-PHDSS ASM-IF-LONG DB26805050A 28 700mm CN2 CN1 PS181FL17 Z076499900 Except USA EY3A-3051 Z903593650 USA Only CN6 ASM-STAM 2 P DB26803050A 3
READ PI7 TLP1243(C8,CANO2) DB26809050A
(1-n connection) 250mm 40 FFC A091
P4
A091
40 FFC
P5
REG PI8 TLP1243(C8,CANO2) DB26809050A
TFL-100K-22-0250(W5) Z90-55073-00 PCB PCL DA5-08010-50 PCB CONN PCL DA50801050H DB2-08160-50 P3
DHB-RD50-S13NN-4.9
CN201
P6 DHB-PB50-S13NN
P149 53258-0210
STMPER SL2
?????? PBA-TYUKEI DB26813050A CN31
PCB LIME DA4-08013-50 DA40801050G P2

DHB-RD50-S13NN-4.9
LAST PI3 TLP1243(C8,CANO2) DB26809050A
P7 DHB-PB50-S13NN
3 4 CN10
SIZE_L1 PI4 TLP1243(C8,CANO2) DB26809050A
FLASH WRITER JIG
PCB DPRAM I/F D000819050 A150 16 DCB5161050A
100mm
P18 B16B-PHDSS
P150 B4B-XH-A
DB5-0813X-50 PCB NCU DAA 2ND LINE P90 B28B-PHDSS TEL EXTEL
PCB EXT LINE2 DA5-18020-50 A100 26 500mm(A3) DCB-52850-50A (CBL-ASSY NCU DB2) (DB2-08990-40A) XH3A-6841-4 P8 XH3B-6841-4
CN7
ASM-L-SIZE 7 Motor DB26810050A
CN31
SIZE_L2 PI5 TLP1243(C8,CANO2) DB26809050A
SIZE_W1 PI2 TLP1243(C8,CANO2) DB26809050A SIZE_W2 PI1 TLP1243(C8,CANO2) DB26809050A
PCB PANEL B
DB2-08060-50 PCB PANEL A
DB2-08050-50
A210 32 1060mm ASSY PANEL-CBL DB2-08260-40B
P11 B32B-PHDSS
LCD Z90-55074-00
A290
A300 DFG-S3S3B-520 (FBS PNL-FLM)
200mm
PCB VOICE
DB2-0809X-50
A240 180mm 16 DCB-51618-50A (CBL-ASSY VOICE) (DB2-08270-50A)
P22 B16B-PHDSS
PCB MAIN
DB2-08010-50 P15A BM40B-SRDS A131 40 CBL-ASSY PRT1 DB2-08300-50B A133 20 CBL-ASSY PRT2 DB2-08310-50C 140mm
PCB PRT P150A BM40B-SRDS
DB2-08040-50 PRT MOTOR-1[RX MOTOR] (DC) 50M3203011 B6B-EH-A Z904868100 (A3) PRT MOTOR-2[RX MOTOR] (DC) 50M3203011 B6B-EH-A Z904868100 (A3) SLR-02VF Printer cover sensor (A3) (Microswitch)
P15B B20B-PHDSS
150mm
P150B B20B-PHDSS
P159 B6B-EH-A [f-a-e] 6-Blue P187 B6B-EH-A [f-a-e]
620mm E060 6 DCB-20662-54A (CBL-ASSY PRT MOTOR1) (DB2-08470-50A) 6 240mm E340 DCB-20624-50A (CBL-ASSY PRT MOTOR2) (DB2-08480-50A) E080 2 990mm CBL-ASSY INTERLOCK DB2-08490-50C SLP-02V
Paper detection senfor (1st CAS) SG-2482A Z903777750 S3B-PH-K /PES Lift up location sensor(1st) (A3) SG-2482A Z903777750 S3B-PH-K
E010-A-2 3 CBL-ASSY PES2 DB2-08610-50A
90mm
(1-n connection) BU06P-TR-P-H Z07-46288-00
(1-n connection) 840mm E010-A-1 6 CBL-ASSY PES1 DB2-08600-40A
P153 B11B-PH-K 11-Blue [I-H] P189
P152 B3B-EH-K
140mm
E400
DB2-08880-40B PCB DUPLEX DB2-08170-50 PHR-6 DUP MOTOR(A3) KBL42LLH286A ZA102456A0 (260mm)
Paper size / Open sensor (1st)(A3)) 51090-0500[MOLEX] 5 SW-186 E020-A 1010mm Z076499500 53325-0510 CASOP,PSIZE(4bit Type)
P175 B10B-PH-K P154 P178
10 E260 280mm ASSY DUP MOTOR-CBL DB2-08670-40A
???
TOTAL 400mm
51006-0200 51005-0200 CZHR-03V-S DUP Clutch (A3) 2 E450 2 210mm (2.5K) DA10857050C DB20881050A Z905606900 CBL-ASSY DUP CL CBL-ASSY CLUTCH2
Paper supply sensor (A3)

SG-2482A Z903777750 PSS S3B-PH-K
E030-A 3 ASSY PSS-CBL DB2-08620-40A
520mm
Developer (A3)
Developing Roller
580mm 1 CBL-ASSY DEVHV DB2-08860-50A PCB ERS DB2-08140-50 B3B-PH-K
HV unit
ATDC Sensor(A3)
51021-0200 Z90-55860-00 E370 4 TS0524ANK(TDK)53047-0410 CBL-ASSY DEV DB2-08630-50B DB2-08130-50 B10B-PH-K 10 PHR-10
130mm
Drawer Connector 2B
Drawer Connector 2A
(1-n connection) E240 CZHR-14V-S 14 430mm
P155 B17B-CZHK-B-1 P188 [I-H] B4B-PH-K 4-Blue [e] P173 P171 B11B-PH-K 11-Natural P186 B6B-PH-K 6-Blue P185
E410 4 350mm CBL-ASSY TEMP HUMD DB2-08690-50B
Temperature and humidity (A3) CHS-CSC-18* Z90-55854-00 175489-4 [AMP] PSU HV(A3) Z90-55855-00 EUKMBZ984H B11B-PH-K
(1-n connection) 60mm (A3) (A3)
DRUM UNIT(A3)
FUSE Z07-65650-00 0251.062MXL
E380 3 CBL-ASSY ERS DB2-08640-50A
500mm
PCB DEV B3B-PH-K
E360 11 220mm DCB-71122-50A (CBL-ASSY HVPS) (DB2-08460-50A)
CBL-ASSY TRANSFER DB2-08850-50A E??? 285mm E??? 195mm CBL-ASSY CHAGER DB2-08840-50A
HV TRANSFER HV CHAGER
Transfer roller
DB2-08890-50B CBL-ASSY TRANSFER2 DFG-S3S3B-509
Transfer roller
Paper feed
FCL_1
CZHR-14V-S 14R-RIZ-K4GG-FL(LF) 14P-RIZ-K2GG-RL Z07-65106-00 Z07-65107-00 clutch (B4) CZHR-03V-S 51005-0200 51006-0200 2 E160 (2.5K) 1st CAS 2 790mm DA10857050C ASSY LU MOTOR-CBL Z905606900 CBL-ASSY CLUTCH2 DB2-08650-40A 51005-0200 51006-0200 2 50mm DA10857050C CBL-ASSY CLUTCH2
P172 B4B-EH-A
Toenr catridge ON(A3) E330 3 310mm SG-2482A CBL-ASSY TONER EMPTY S3B-PH-K Z903777750 DB2-08700-40A CART_ON (A3) 173977-3[AMP] TONER EMPTY(A3) TSP15D10C-01(TDK) 3 340mm 175489-3 Z90-55859-00 [AMP]
EXIT roller
Chassis
Bypass tray flapper
DFG-S3S3B-518
Chassia
Paper register clutch (A3) CZHR-03V-S

(5.0K) Z905623000
P156 B6B-PH-K 6-Natural [f-G-A-e] P157
Discharger brush
DFG-S3S3B-530
Chassia
730mm
P177 B4B-PH-K 4-Natural
51006-0200 51005-0200 CZHR-03V-S SCREW Clutch (A3) 350mm E190 2 (2.5K) 2 DA10857050C Z905606900 ASSY TONER MOTOR-CBL DB2-08710-40A CBL-ASSY CLUTCH2 173977-2[AMP] Toner transfer MOTOR(A3) 2 DU2432-1 280mm ZA10298900 292250-2 [AMP]
Dup. Feed roller
DFG-S3S3B-520
Chassia
Paper feed solenoid (A3)

Z90-45101-00
FCLCHH
SLND TDS-F08G-35 * BYPASS (nonpoler)
Lift up MOTOR(1st) (A3) 173977-2[AMP] 2 DU2421-1 ZA102988A0 175489-2[AMP] (1-n connection) BU02P-TR-P-H E050 2 100mm 2 PHNR02
820mm
P190
P176
650mm
Paper detect sensor (B4)

SG-2482A Z903777750 /BP_PES S3B-PH-K
PHNR02 ASSY BP SIZE-CBL DB2-08660-40E 3 1050mm
P158 B13B-PH-K [F-E-e] P160 PDS S3B-PH-K
a G
SG-2482A Z903777750
A e f B I J H C d D b
P165 B11B-PH-K 11-Red
E200 3 ASSY JCOP-CBL DB2-08720-40A
710mm
PCB BPSIZE DB2-08150-50 BYPASS PAPER SIZE (A3) S-1110A B5B-PH-K
DUP JAM SENSOR(A3) SG-2482A Z903777750 S3B-PH-K
E430 DCB-D0564-50A (CBL-ASSY BPSIZE) (DB2-08800-50A)
(1-n connection) BU05P-TR-P-H 640mm 5
720mm
P169
P181
420mm
DUP Switch back senser (A3) SG-2482A Z903777750 S3B-PH-K Jam access cover sensor (1st) SG-2482A Z903777750 S3B-PH-K /JCOP BU02P-TR-P-H SPEAKER
Mechanical counter (A3)
CNTR MZ-671 DC24V_D18 Z903522350
Process FAN (80mm dice) D08K-24TG_14B(AX) ZA1-02364-40
E420 DCB-D0342-50A (CBL-ASSY DUP JAM) (1-n connection) (DB2-08680-50A) PHNR02C(Reverse type) BU02P-TR-P-H 2 265mm 1 1 E210 2 2 2 PHNR03 ASSY FAN-CBL DB2-08500-40C PHNR03 BU03P-TR-P-H 3 1 1 (70mm) 3 3 PHNR03 (1-n connection)
(1-n connection) BU03P-TR-P-H 3 420mm
720mm
P184
P166
330mm
F
CP057044 ZA10008870
E c
920mm
P179 B5B-PH-K [J-I] P161
P151
D880862040B (1-n connection) ASSY SPEAKER
890mm
520mm
PCB CASSETTE DB2-08100-50 P1 B15B-PH-K P2 B14B-PH-K Jam access cover sensor(2,3,4) SG-2482A Z903777750 S3B-PH-K (1-n connection) BU12P-TR-P-H Z07-46283-00 (1-n connection) F030-A 12 660mm CBL-ASSY EXCAS JCOP2 DB2-08540-50B P4 B12B-PH-K HEATER (OPTIONCASSETTE)
F020-A 3 410mm CBL-ASSY EXCAS JCOP1 DB2-08530-50B
P5 B5B-PH-K
PAPER SIZE SENSOR F040-A 5 830mm SW-186 ASSY EXCAS SIZE-CBL Z076499500 DB2-08510-40A CASOP , PSIZ (4bit Type) 280mm CAS MOTOR 120mm PM55L-048-MRE6 24V ZA10298770
DB2-08970-40A ASSY CAS HEATER-CBL
Paper Jam sensor SG-2482A Z903777750
S3B-PH-K
440mm
P6 B6B-PH-K
F060 PHR6
List up location sensor SG-2482A Z903777750 S3B-PH-K
140mm
P3 B4B-PH-K
Paper detection sensor (2,3 CAS) SG-2482A Z903777750 S3B-PH-K PES
90mm
51006-0200 51005-0200 CZHR-03V-S FCL_2,3,4 2 F010-A 2 180mm CBL-ASSY EXCAS CL DA10857050C DB2-08520-50B CBL-ASSY CLUTCH2 173977-2[AMP] List up MOTOR 2 170mm DU2421-1 175489-2[AMP] ZA102988A0
Paper feed clutch (2.5K) 2,3,4 CAS Z905606900
MFX-2700/MFX-2200 (ADF Model) Cable Diagram

Fuser (A3) THERMISTER(A3) Z90-55856-00 HF-DB2 ASSY FUSER TH -CBL CBL-ASSY FUSER TH A170
BU02P-TR-P-H
DB2-08730-40A DB2-08730-50A 130mm CZHR-07V-S
PRINTER UNIT (1-n connection) CZHR-07V-S A010 2 CBL-ASSY THMS DB2-08220-50A 640mm
PCB MAIN
DB2-08010-50 P23 B30B-PHDSS A110-A-1 15 CBL-ASSY CAS DB2-08290-50B (1-n connection) 14 320mm BU15P-TR-P-H(LF)(SN) Z07-24145-00 (1-n connecton)
2nd CASSETTE PCB CASSETTE DB2-08100-50 A110-B-2 15 200mm ASSY EXCAS1-CBL DB2-08570-40B A110-A-2 14 180mm ASSY EXCAS2-CBL DB2-08560-40A B15B-PH-K
3rd CASSETTE PCB CASSETTE DB2-08100-50 A110-B-2 15 200mm ASSY EXCAS1-CBL DB2-08570-40B A110-A-2 14 180mm ASSY EXCAS2-CBL DB2-08560-40A B15B-PH-K
4th CASSETTE PCB CASSETTE DB2-08100-50 A110-B-2 15 200mm ASSY EXCAS1-CBL DB2-08570-40B 0 A110-A-2 14 180mm ASSY EXCAS2-CBL DB2-08560-40A 0 B15B-PH-K
Drawer Connector 1B (A3)
Drawer Connector 1A (A3) (1-n connection)
B5B-SH-K
320mm
DB2-08740-40B ASSY FUSER1-CBL Thermostat 36FXE04_560907 A180-1 45mm THERMAL FUSE Z90-48827-00 CBL-ASSY FUSER 1 E4A50167C DB2-08740-50B (Fuse Side) A230 105mm
(1-n conneciton) AWG#18
BU14P-TR-P-H(LF)(SN) Z07-46281-00 (1-n connection)
B14B-PH-K
B14B-PH-K
B14B-PH-K
PCB NCU DAA DB5-0808X-50 LINE P90 B28B-PHDSS TEL EXTEL
FBS UNIT A030 28 DCB-52836-50A (CBL-ASSY NCU) (DB2-08230-50A) 350mm P9 P14A B28B-PHDSS BM50B-SRDS A121 26 120mm CBL-ASSY SCANNER1 DB2-08200-50B A123 2 120mm CBL-ASSY SCANNER2 DB2-08210-50B
PCB SCANNER DB2-08020-50 P140A P147 BM50B-SRDS B3B-EH-K
HEATER LAMP(A3)
A180-2 SRWM-61GG-S0.6 CBL-ASSY FUSER 4 DB2-08870-50A 7R-RIZ-K4GG-SQ3FL(LF) (Front Heater Lamp Side) (Receptacle)
SRWF-61GG-M0.6 7P-RIZ-K2GG-S3RL(LF) (Plug)
P14B B2PVH
P140B B2PVH P148 B34B-PHDSS
DB2-089XX-50 DB2-08750-50A CBL-ASSY FUSER2 (HEATERLAMP <-> THERMAL FUSE) 70mm DB2-08760-50A CBL-ASSY FUSER3 (HEATERLAMP <-> Tehrmostat) 100mm *DB2-100 *DB2-220 ZA1-02909-A0 ZA1-02908-70 A160 2 620mm ASSY PSU-HEATER-CBL DB2-08280-40C LPS CN1 B2P3VH CN2 B16B-XH-A A050 12 CBL-ASSY LVPS DB2-08240-40A 500mm P12 B16B-XH-A EXT MEMORY 890mm DA1:360mm P141 +FBS:260mm 20FMN-BTK +rear:230mm 850 Direct from moter:360mm P142 +FBS:30mm B6B-EH-K +rear:250mm 640
LAMP INVERTER VHR-4N DA10847040C B010 3 700mm CN1 CN2 D010 2 (105mm) FPC CBL-ASSY INVERTER S3B-EH-K S2P4-VH (DA10847050C) DB2-08340-40A Z904758300 (CBL-ASSY LAMP) DA1:340mm +FBS:280mm ADF UNIT Black dot in tASSY +rear:180mm DFG-S3S3B-590 PCB ADF B020 800 34 600mm P1480 ASSY ADF-CBL DA1:540mm B34B-PHDSS DB2-08320-40C +100mm (1-n connection) 660mm PCB CCD 640 B030 20 FFC P180 DB50814050A TFL-100K-20-0660 ZA1-03084-30
B2P4VH 2 LAMP (Direct attachec to LAMP) Z904758200 VHR-4M
DB2-08950-40A ASSY FFC-CBL
DB5-08030-50
P1481 B6B-EH-K
C010
(Attach to Motor) 6 300mm
ADF MOTOR (Bi HB) ZA10293120
P1482 B7B-PH-K
51006-0200 51005-0200 CZHR-03V-S DCLCSE 2 C020 2 100mm CBL-ASSY ADF CL DA10857050C DB5-08400-50B CBL-ASSY CLUTCH2 51006-0200 51005-0200 CZHR-03V-S DCLCRE 240mm 2 DA10857050C CBL-ASSY CLUTCH2 TXIL 3 370mm S3B-PH-K SG-2482A Z903777750
Separator clutch (2.5K) Z905606900
A280
ASSY AC IL-CBL DB2-08790-40C
P1420 B040 DCB-20618-50A 180mm
6 (Attached to Moter)
FBS MOTOR (Bi HB) ZA10233100 (385mm)
Register clutch (5.0K) Z905485900
DFG-01S4G-514
(CBL-ASSY AC-SW2) (DB2-08780-50A) VLP-02V 50mm VLR-02V A270 (CBL-ASSY AC-SW1) (DB2-08770-50A) ASSY AC-SW1-CBL DB2-08770-40C 210mm P20
P19
DA1:600mm P143 +FBS:30mm B3B-PH-K +rear:100mm 730 DA1:140mm P144 +FBS:30mm B6B-PH-K +rear:100mm 6-Blue 270
B050 3 740mm DCB-70374-50A (CBL-ASSY HOME) (DB2-08350-50A) RED B060 3 230mm CBL-ASSY APS DB2-08360-50B 3 BROWN 230mm
P1421 PCB CONN MOT(DB2-08180-50A) HOME SENSOR SG-2482A S3B-PH-K Z903777750 APS SG-2482A S3B-PH-K Z903777750 BIS SG-2482A S3B-PH-K Z903777750
P1483 B12B-PH-K
RED C030 3 430mm CBL-ASSY ADF SIZE DB5-08410-50B
DW1(DB4) S3B-PH-K SG-2482A Z903777750
PCB LPH PCB THERMISTOR D71-28080-50B P800 2 CBL-ASSY TEMP DB2-08980-50A 140mm P6 B2B-PH-K
DB2-08070-50 P1 B28B-PHDSS A142 28 DB2-08250-40A ASSY LPH-CBL 500mm P13 B28B-PHDSS
CN 53254-0272 2P RED LED HEAD (KYOCERA) Z90-55180-00 FH12-40S-0.5SV [HIROSE] (HRS No.586-0566-900)
(1-n connection) 250mm A091 40 FFC
SBS P21 P4 DA1:230mm P146 +FBS:270mm B6B-PH-K +rear:50mm 550 P145 B5B-PH-K B080-1 3 520mm CBL-ASSY SBS DB2-08370-40A Except USA 51090-0500 MBS 3 600mm CBL-ASSY SBS-USA DB2-08380-50B USA Only 53325-0510 B090 HEATER (Heater attached) Z903755550 2
PS181FL17 Z076499900 Except USA EY3A-3051 Z903593650 USA Only
BROWN DW2(DA3) 3 360mm SG-2482A CBL-ASSY ADF SIZE-USA S3B-PH-K Z903777750 DB5-08420-50B USA Only 179228-3 DL1(DADFA3) 3 530mm PS119EL1 RED 177626-3 Z075111800 [AMP] DL2(DADFREG) PS119EL1 177626-3 Z075111800 USA Only [AMP]
A091
40 FFC
P5
630mm BROWN
TFL-100K-22-0250(W5) Z90-55073-00 PCB PCL DA5-08010-50 DA50801050H P3

DHB-RD50-S13NN-4.9
PCB CONN PCL DB2-08160-50
P6 DHB-PB50-S13NN
P149 53258-0210
P1484 B2B-PH-K
51005-0200 C040 2 450mm CBL-ASSY STAMPER DB5-08430-50B DS2 C060 3 CBL-ASSY DS2 DB5-08440-50C 560mm S3B-PH-K
STAMPER Z904819500
PCB LIME DA4-08013-50 DA40801050G P2

DHB-RD50-S13NN-4.9
P7 DHB-PB50-S13NN
P1486 B6B-PH-K
SG-2482A Z903777750
DRS
FLASH WRITER JIG PCB DPRAM I/F D000819050 A150 16 DCB5161050A
3
100mm P18 B16B-PHDSS
450mm S3B-PH-K
SG-2482A Z903777750
PCB NCU DAA 2ND DB5-0813X-50 LINE P90 B28B-PHDSS TEL EXTEL
PCB EXT LINE2 DA5-18020-50 A100 26 500mm(A3) DCB-52850-50A (CBL-ASSY NCU DB2) (DB2-08990-40A) XH3A-6841-4 P8 XH3B-6841-4
P1487 B3B-PH-K
(DCB-70317-50A) DS1 C070 3 260mm DCB-70326-50A S3B-PH-K (CBL-ASSY DS1) (DB5-08450-50A) C080 180mm DFG-00S3B-518 (ADF ADF-MOT)
SG-2482A Z903777750
PCB PANEL B
DB2-08060-50 PCB PANEL A
DB2-08050-50 A210 32 1060mm ASSY PANEL-CBL DB2-08260-40B P11 B32B-PHDSS
LCD Z90-55074-00
A290
A300 DFG-S3S3B-520 (FBS PNL-FLM)
200mm
PCB VOICE
DB2-0809X-50 A240 16 180mm DCB-51618-50A (CBL-ASSY VOICE) (DB2-08270-50A) P22 B16B-PHDSS
PCB MAIN
DB2-08010-50 P15A BM40B-SRDS A131 40 CBL-ASSY PRT1 DB2-08300-50B A133 20 CBL-ASSY PRT2 DB2-08310-50C 140mm
PCB PRT P150A BM40B-SRDS
DB2-08040-50B PRT MOTOR-1[RX MOTOR] (DC) 50M3203011 B6B-EH-A Z904868100 (A3) PRT MOTOR-2[RX MOTOR] (DC) 50M3203011 B6B-EH-A Z904868100 (A3) SLR-02VF 2 DB2-08880-40B PCB DUPLEX DB2-08170-50 PHR-6 6 ??? DUP MOTOR(A3) KBL42LLH286A ZA102456A0 (260mm) Printer cover sensor (A3) (Microo switch)
P15B B20B-PHDSS
150mm
P150B B20B-PHDSS
P159 B6B-EH-A [f-a-e] 6-Blue P187 B6B-EH-A [f-a-e]
E060 6 620mm DCB-20662-54A (CBL-ASSY PRT MOTOR1) (DB2-08470-50A) E340 6 240mm DCB-20624-50A (CBL-ASSY PRT MOTOR2) (DB2-08480-50A) E080 2 990mm CBL-ASSY INTERLOCK DB2-08490-50C SLP-02V
Paper detection sensor (1st CAS) SG-2482A Z903777750 S3B-PH-K /PES List up location sensor(1st) (A3) SG-2482A Z903777750 S3B-PH-K
E010-A-2 3 CBL-ASSY PES2 DB2-08610-50A
90mm
(1-n connection) BU06P-TR-P-H Z07-46288-00
(1-n connection) E010-A-1 6 840mm CBL-ASSY PES1 DB2-08600-40A
P153 B11B-PH-K 11-Blue [I-H] P189
P152 B3B-EH-K
140mm
E400
P175 B10B-PH-K Paper size/Cassette open sensor (1st)(A3) )51090-0500[MOLEX] SW-186 E020-A 5 1010mm Z076499500 53325-0510 CASOP,PSIZE(4bit Type) P154 P178
E260 10 280mm ASSY DUP MOTOR-CBL DB2-08670-40A
TOTAL 400mm
51006-0200 51005-0200 CZHR-03V-S DUP clutch(A3) E450 2 210mm 2 (2.5K) DB20881050A DA10857050C Z905606900 CBL-ASSY DUP CL CBL-ASSY CLUTCH2 Temperature and humidity sensor (A3) CHS-CSC-18* Z90-55854-00 175489-4 [AMP] PSU HV(A3) Z90-55855-00 EUKMBZ984H B11B-PH-K
Paper supply sensor (A3) SG-2482A Z903777750 S3B-PH-K PSS Developer (A3) Developing Roller 1 580mm CBL-ASSY DEVHV DB2-08860-50A PCB ERS FUSE Z07-65650-00 0251.062MXL DB2-08140-50 B3B-PH-K E380 3 CBL-ASSY ERS DB2-08640-50A 500mm HV unit ATDC SENSOR(A3) Z90-55860-00 51021-0200 TS0524ANK(TDK) E370 4 53047-0410 CBL-ASSY DEV DB2-08630-50B PCB DEV B3B-PH-K DB2-08130-50 B10B-PH-K PHR-10 10 60mm 130mm Drawer Connector 2B Drawer Connector 2A
E030-A 3 ASSY PSS-CBL DB2-08620-40A
520mm
(1-nconnection) E240 14 430mm CZHR-14V-S
P155 B17B-CZHK-B-1 P188 [I-H] B4B-PH-K 4-Blue [e] P173 P171 B11B-PH-K 11-Natural P186 B6B-PH-K 6-Blue P185 P156 B6B-PH-K 6-Natural [f-G-A-e] P157 P177 B4B-PH-K 4-Natural
E410 4 350mm CBL-ASSY TEMP HUMD DB2-08690-50B
DRUM UNIT(A3)
(A3)
(1-n connection) (A3)
E360 11 220mm DCB-71122-50A (CBL-ASSY HVPS) (DB2-08460-50A)
CBL-ASSY TRANSFER DB2-08850-50A E??? 285mm E??? 195mm CBL-ASSY CHAGER DB2-08840-50A
HV TRANSFER HV CHAGER
Transfer roller DB2-08890-50B CBL-ASSY TRANSFER2 EXIT roller DFG-S3S3B-509
Transfer roller
P172 B4B-EH-A
CZHR-14V-S 14P-RIZ-K2GG-RL 14R-RIZ-K4GG-FL(LF) Z07-65106-00 Z07-65107-00 Paper feed clutch (B4) CZHR-03V-S 51005-0200 51006-0200 (2.5K) 1st CAS 2 E160 2 790mm Z905606900 DA10857050C ASSY LU MOTOR-CBL FCL_1 CBL-ASSY CLUTCH2 DB2-08650-40A Paper register clutch (A3) (5.0K) CZHR-03V-S 51005-0200 51006-0200 2 50mm DA10857050C CBL-ASSY CLUTCH2
Toener catridgeON (A3) E330 3 310mm SG-2482A CBL-ASSY TONER EMPTY S3B-PH-K Z903777750 DB2-08700-40A CART_ON (A3) 173977-3[AMP] TONER EMPTY(A3) 3 340mm TSP15D10C-01(TDK) 175489-3 Z90-55859-00 [AMP]
Chassis
Bypass tray flapper DFG-S3S3B-518
Chassis
Discharger brush
Chassis DFG-S3S3B-530 Chassis DFG-S3S3B-520
730mm
51006-0200 51005-0200 CZHR-03V-S SCREW clutch (A3) E190 2 350mm 2 (2.5K) ASSY TONER MOTOR-CBL DA10857050C Z905606900 DB2-08710-40A CBL-ASSY CLUTCH2 173977-2[AMP] Toner transfer MOTOR(A3) 2 280mm DU2432-1 ZA10298900 292250-2 [AMP]
Dup. Feed roller
Paper feed solenoid (A3) SLND TDS-F08G-35 * BYPASS Z90-45101-00 FCLCHH (nonpoler)
List up MOTOR(1st) (A3) 173977-2[AMP] DU2421-1 2 ZA102988A0 175489-2[AMP] (1-nconnection) BU02P-TR-P-H 2 100mm E050 2 PHNR02
820mm
P176 P190
650mm
P158 B13B-PH-K [F-E-e] P160 B11B-PH-K 11-Red E200 3 ASSY JCOP-CBL DB2-08720-40A PDS S3B-PH-K SG-2482A Z903777750
Paper detection sensor (BYPASS) SG-2482A Z903777750 S3B-PH-K /BP_PES (1-n connection) PCB BPSIZE DB2-08150-50 BU05P-TR-P-H BYPASS PAPER SIZE (A3) E430 640mm 5 S-1110A B5B-PH-K DCB-D0564-50A (CBL-ASSY BPSIZE) (DB2-08800-50A) (1-n connection) DUP JAM SENSOR(A3) BU03P-TR-P-H SG-2482A E420 420mm 3 Z903777750 DCB-D0342-50A S3B-PH-K (CBL-ASSY DUP JAM) (DB2-08680-50A) (1-1 connection) Mechanical counter (A3) PHNR02C (Reverse type) BU02P-TR-P-H CNTR MZ-671 DC24V_D18 2 265mm 1 1 E210 2 Z903522350 2 2 PHNR03 ASSY FAN-CBL DB2-08500-40C Process FAN(80mm dice) PHNR03 BU03P-TR-P-H D08K-24TG_14B(AX) 1 1 3 ZA1-02364-40 (70mm) 3 3 PHNR03 (1-n connection)
PHNR02 ASSY BP SIZE-CBL DB2-08660-40E 3 1050mm
710mm
720mm
P181 P169
420mm
DUP Switch back sensor (A3) SG-2482A Z903777750 S3B-PH-K Jam access cover sensor (1st) SG-2482A S3B-PH-K Z903777750 /JCOP BU02P-TR-P-H D880862040B ASSY SPEAKER SPEAKER CP057044 ZA10008870
720mm
P184
P166
330mm
920mm
P151 P179 B5B-PH-K [J-I] P161
890mm
(1-n connection)
520mm
PCB CASSETTE DB2-08100-50 P1 B15B-PH-K P2 B14B-PH-K Jam access cover sensor (2,3,4) SG-2482A Z903777750 S3B-PH-K Paper jam sensor SG-2482A Z903777750 (1-n connection) BU12P-TR-P-H Z07-46283-00 (1-n connection) F030-A 12 660mm CBL-ASSY EXCAS JCOP2 DB2-08540-50B P5 B5B-PH-K P4 B12B-PH-K P6 B6B-PH-K 3 S3B-PH-K P3 B4B-PH-K 3 140mm 51006-0200 51005-0200 CZHR-03V-S FCL_2,3,4 F010-A 2 180mm 2 CBL-ASSY EXCAS CL DA10857050C DB2-08520-50B CBL-ASSY CLUTCH2 173977-2[AMP] List up MOTOR 2 170mm DU2421-1 175489-2[AMP] ZA102988A0 Paper feed clutch (2.5K) 2,3,4 CAS Z905606900 440mm F040-A 5 830mm ASSY EXCAS SIZE-CBL DB2-08510-40A 280mm 120mm HEATER (OPTIONCASSETTE)
Paper size SENSOR SW-186 Z076499500 CASOP , PSIZ(4bit Type) CAS MOTOR PM55L-048-MRE6 24V ZA10298770
DB2-08970-40A ASSY CAS HEATER-CBL
F020-A 3 410mm CBL-ASSY EXCAS JCOP1 DB2-08530-50B
F060 PHR6
List up location sensor SG-2482A Z903777750 S3B-PH-K Paper detection sensor (2,3 CAS) SG-2482A Z903777750 S3B-PH-K PES
90mm

sm-MFX2200 2225 2700 2725

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Deskripsi Asli:

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

sm-MFX2200 2225 2700 2725

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Muratec MFX-2725/MFX-2225 MFX-2700/MFX-2200

MURATA MACHINERY, LTD

1 General Description ................................................................................1-1

2 Machine Composition .............................................................................2-1

3 Adjustment Procedures ..........................................................................3-1

4 Troubleshooting Procedures ..................................................................4-1

5 Maintenance & Adjustment.....................................................................5-1

Equipment and components shown with * are optional.

ADF capacity RADF capacity Scanning resolution

Recording paper capacity

Item Power consumption

MFX-2725 MFX-2225 8.2 20 48 62 930 960 980

2.1 Document Scanning Sequence

Document detection (ADF)

2.1.2 FBS section

Exposure Section: Construction and Function

Scanner frame Moving Mechanism

PCB CCD Caridge A Lamp Mirror A Home sensor Mirror B and C

Document size detection (FBS)

: Means that the unit is used.

2.1.3 RADF section (MFX-2725 and MFX-2225)

[14] [13] [11] [10]

Outline of Electrical Components

ADF driver PCB CN7 CN7

CN32 CN32 CN32

CN7 CN7 CN7 CN8 CN8 CN8 CN9 CN9

PCB1 M1 M2 SL1 PCB2

ADF driver PCB

Scanner RADF PCB

Function Feeds documents. Separates and feeds documents.

Outline of Operation Mode

[2] Forward feed/reversal delivery

Forward Pickup/Delivery (Single-sided document > Simplex Printing) Operation

Waiting for reading

Forward Pickup/Reversal Delivery (Double-sided document > Duplex printing) Operation

Waiting for reading

Waiting for reading

Reverse side reading

Document Presence/Absence Detection

Detection lever PI11

Detection of Last Document

Initial Document Size Detection

Read standby point

LED Read glass

Pickup Unit and Stopper

Reverse rotation Forward rotation

Pickup Motor (M2) Control

KMOT_A KMOT_A* KMOT_B KMOT_B* KMOT_IA KMOT_IB

KMOT_A* KMOT_B KMOT_B*

Scanner RADF PCB

ADF driver PCB

SL1 Platen roller Read roller

SL1 Delivery reversal sensor

Read standby point

Document's reverse side reading

Reverse rotation Forward rotation

Feed Motor (M1) Control

RMOT_A RMOT_A* RMOT_B RMOT_B* RMOT_IA RMOT_IB

RMOT_A RMOT_A* RMOT_B RMOT_B*

Scanner RADF PCB

ADF driver PCB

PI10 PI11 PI7 PI6 PI8